JP2024050982A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest in a game.SOLUTION: While a shift to a pseudo bonus state does not occur in a first section, a shift to a pseudo bonus state may occur in a second section. When a pseudo bonus state is completed in the second section, the second section can continue thereafter. When a shift condition is satisfied in the situation, a shift to a pseudo bonus state occurs again. While a shift to a pseudo bonus state may occur in setting when the second section is set in a situation in which CB winning data are stored in a main-side RAM 74, a shift to a pseudo bonus state does not occur in setting when the second section is set in a situation in which CB winning data are not stored in the main-side RAM 74. In the meantime, in a situation in which the second section continues, a shift to a pseudo bonus state may occur even if CB winning data are not stored.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 9

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine has a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores game balls given to a player, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball launching device and launched toward the game area in response to the player's launch operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is paid out from a payout device to the tray storage section. In addition, a configuration in which an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section are provided as the tray storage section is also known for a pachinko machine, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are guided to the game ball launching device, and the game balls that are surplus in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

In addition, in a slot machine, when medals have been bet and the start lever is operated to start a new game, a lottery process is executed by the control means. When the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation stop control to stop the reels. Then, if the stop result after the reels have stopped rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is awarded to the player (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2014-045989 A

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the entertainment value of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The present invention was made in consideration of the circumstances exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the enjoyment of gaming.

In order to solve the above problem, the present invention provides a situation setting means for setting a specific situation in which a favorable transition can be made based on the occurrence of a setting trigger in a predetermined situation;
When the specific situation occurs, an advantageous transition means for transitioning the game state to an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player;
a situation ending means for ending the specific situation to the predetermined situation based on the establishment of a situation ending condition in the specific situation;
an advantageous end means for ending the advantageous gaming state based on the establishment of an advantageous end condition in the advantageous gaming state, and for ending the advantageous gaming state when the specific situation ends and the predetermined situation occurs based on the establishment of the situation end condition, even if the advantageous end condition is not established;
A predetermined storage means capable of storing predetermined information;
a means for enabling a player to have an advantage in regard to the transition to the advantageous game state when the specific situation is set by the situation setting means in a situation where the specific information is stored in the specific storage means, compared to a case where the specific situation is set by the situation setting means in a situation where the specific information is not stored in the specific storage means;
The present invention is characterized in that it is provided with:

The present invention makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of games.

1 is a front view of a slot machine according to a first embodiment. 1 is an oblique view of the slot machine with the front door open. FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the arrangement of symbols on each reel. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the patterns visible through the display window and the combination lines. FIG. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and benefits provided. 1A is a front view of a common display area, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of information corresponding to a stop order displayed on the common display section. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating the relationship between the notification content of the stop order on the image display device and the display content of the stop order on the combined display unit. FIG. 2 is an electrical configuration diagram of the slot machine. 4 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by a main MPU; 13 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by a main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing normal processing executed by a main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a start waiting process executed by a main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a bet corresponding process executed by the master MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting process at the start executed by the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the role selection process executed by the main MPU. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a role selection table when three coins are bet. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a role selection table when two coins are bet. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the stopping order of the reels and the winning patterns that are achieved. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a reel control process executed by a main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the corresponding processing executed by the main MPU when a game ends. 1 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the game states and game zones existing in a slot machine. FIG. FIG. 2A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first and second intervals, and FIG. 2B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of each game state in the second interval. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first CB role and the second CB role, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first CB state and the second CB state. 13 is a flowchart showing a CB process executed by the main MPU. 13A to 13H are time charts showing how the game state transitions to the CB state and how the transition to the CB state is restricted. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of notifications related to the winning states of the first CB role and the second CB role. (a) to (j) are time charts showing how various notifications are executed in relation to the winning status of the CB role and the number of gaming media bets. 13 is a flowchart showing an internal notification control process executed by the production side MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the control processing executed by the production side MPU at the start of supply. A flowchart showing non-internal notification processing executed by the production side MPU. A flowchart showing the first CB internal notification processing executed by the production side MPU. A flowchart showing the second CB internal notification processing executed by the production side MPU. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of a storage area of a main RAM. 13A is a flowchart showing a full clear process executed by the main MPU, and FIG. 13B is a flowchart showing a partial clear process executed by the main MPU. 13A to 13H are time charts showing how partial clear processing and full clear processing are executed by the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the first control processing of the game area executed by the main MPU. A flowchart showing the second control processing of the game area executed by the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing an ending handling process executed by a main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the advantageous lottery processing executed by the master MPU at the start of a game. 13 is a flowchart showing a normal process executed by a main MPU. FIG. 1A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the image display device when a first start command is received, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the image display device when a second start command is received. (a) to (g) are time charts showing how the transition to the pseudo bonus state occurs. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the situation when an index value IV=10 is reached and it is notified that the first reel will stop on the left reel, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the situation when an index value IV=10 is reached and it is notified that the first reel will stop on the right reel. 13A is a flowchart showing the stop order notification control process executed by the main MPU, and FIG. 13B is a flowchart showing the winning determination process executed by the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the normal performance control processing executed by the performance side MPU. (a) to (i) are time charts showing how various effects are executed during the transition waiting period. 13 is a flowchart showing a pseudo bonus process executed by the main MPU at the start of a game. 13 is a flowchart showing a pseudo bonus process executed by the main MPU. A flowchart showing the presentation control processing for pseudo bonuses executed by the presentation side MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing an addition process executed by the production side MPU. A flowchart showing the processing for the production side added period executed by the production side MPU. (a) to (g) are time charts showing the progression of the pseudo bonus state. FIG. 13A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the execution contents of an ending performance in an image display device, and FIG. 13A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the execution contents of a revival performance in an image display device. (a) to (g) are time charts showing how the number of games is increased during the increase period and how the increase in the number of games is announced. (a) An explanatory diagram for explaining the combination of symbols that will result in the first CB winning and the combination of symbols that will result in the second CB winning in the second embodiment, and (b) a time chart showing the flow of the game when the first CB role or the second CB role is won. A flowchart showing the first control processing of the game area executed by the main MPU in the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a normal process executed by a main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a pseudo bonus process executed by the main MPU. 6A to 6G are time charts showing the progression of the second section. 13 is a flowchart showing the role selection process executed by the main MPU in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 13A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the role selection table when three coins are bet, and FIG. 13B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the combination of symbols that will result in the tenth supplementary winning prize. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a role selection table when two coins are bet. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the stopping order of the reels and the winning patterns that are achieved. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the first control processing of the game area executed by the main MPU. 6A to 6H are time charts showing how a transition to the second section occurs. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the types of game states and transition patterns of the game states in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the first control processing of the game area executed by the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the advantageous lottery processing executed by the master MPU at the start of a game. 13 is a flowchart showing a normal process executed by a main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a pseudo bonus process executed by the main MPU. 11 is a time chart showing transitions in game states (a) to (f). 13A to 13C are explanatory diagrams for explaining the operation of the reels when a special bell winning is achieved in the sixth embodiment.

First Embodiment
A first embodiment of the present invention applied to a slot machine 10, which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. Fig. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, Fig. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, and Fig. 3 is a front view of the cabinet 11.

As shown in Figures 2 and 3, the slot machine 10 has a housing 11 that forms its outer shell. The housing 11 is formed into a box shape that is open at the front as a whole by fixing multiple wooden panels.

As shown in Figs. 1 and 2, a front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11. The front door 12 is supported by the housing 11 around an axis 15 provided on the left side of the housing 11 as a pivot axis so that the internal space of the housing 11 can be opened and closed. The front door 12 is locked so that it cannot be opened by a locking device 13 provided on the back side of the front door, and this locked state is released by unlocking the key cylinder 14 with a specified key.

As shown in FIG. 1, a game panel 20 is provided near the upper center of the front door 12. The game panel 20 has three vertically long display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R arranged side by side. The display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R are made of a transparent or translucent material, and the interior of the slot machine 10 can be seen through each of the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R.

2 and 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into two parts, an upper part and a lower part, by a partition plate 11a, and a reel unit 31 is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 11a. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a center reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, each of which is formed in a cylindrical shape. Each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is supported so that it can rotate with its central axis being the axis of rotation of the reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. The axes of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are arranged on the same axis extending in a substantially horizontal direction, and each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponds one-to-one to each of the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R. Therefore, a part of the surface of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is visible through the corresponding display window 21L, 21M, and 21R. Furthermore, when reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are displayed through display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R as if they are moving from top to bottom.

As shown in FIG. 1, a start lever 41 is provided on the lower left side of the game panel 20, which is operated to start the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. When the start lever 41 is operated when a predetermined number or more of game media, either medals or virtual medals, have been bet, each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R starts to rotate simultaneously.

On the right side of the start lever 41, there are stop buttons 42, 43, 44 that are operated to individually stop each of the spinning reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Each stop button 42, 43, 44 is located directly below the display window 21L, 21M, 21R that corresponds to the reel 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped. Each stop button 42, 43, 44 becomes capable of stopping the left reel 32L when a predetermined time has elapsed since the reel started spinning.

One game (play) is the period from when the start lever 41 is operated to when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate, when the stop buttons 42, 43, and 44 are operated to when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop to when the various processes, such as the awarding of game media and management of the game status, are completed.

A medal insertion port 45 for inserting medals is provided on the lower right side of the display window parts 21L, 21M, and 21R. The medals inserted from the medal insertion port 45 are guided to a hopper device 53 by a selector 52 provided on the back side of the front door 12 when reception is permitted, and are guided to a medal receiving tray 59 from a medal discharge port 58 provided on the lower front side of the front door 12 when reception is prohibited (see FIG. 1). The hopper device 53 has a function of discharging medals stored in a storage tank to the medal receiving tray 59 through the medal discharge port 58 when a winning event corresponding to the award of game media is established on the main line ML described later. Below the medal insertion port 45, a return button 46 is provided, which is pressed when a medal inserted into the medal insertion port 45 gets stuck in the selector 52, as shown in FIG. 1.

On the lower left side of the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R, there are provided a first credit insertion button 47 for inserting the maximum number of credited virtual medals that can be bet at one time, and a second credit insertion button 48 for inserting two virtual medals at one time. In this slot machine 10, there are two situations in which the number of gaming media (medals or virtual medals) that can be bet (i.e., bet setting) at one time is "3" and "2".

When the first credit insertion button 47 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be made at one time is "3", the current number of bets is "0", and three or more virtual medals are stored and stored, the number of bets is reduced by three virtual medals and becomes "3". When the first credit insertion button 47 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be made at one time is "3", the current number of bets is "1", and two or more virtual medals are stored and stored, the number of bets is reduced by two virtual medals and becomes "3". When the first credit insertion button 47 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be made at one time is "3", the current number of bets is "2", and one or more virtual medals are stored and stored, the number of bets is reduced by one virtual medal and becomes "3". When the first credit insertion button 47 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be made at one time is "2", the current number of bets is "0", and two or more virtual medals are stored and stored, the number of bets is reduced by two virtual medals and becomes "2". When the number of bets that can be made at one time is "2", the current number of bets is "1", and one or more virtual medals are stored and stored, if the first credit insertion button 47 is operated, one virtual medal will be deducted and the number of bets will become "2".

If the first credit insertion button 47 is operated when the number of stored virtual medals is less than the difference between the available number of bets and the current number of bets, the number of bets increases by the number of virtual medals, and the number of virtual medals becomes 0.

In a situation where the number of bets that can be made at one time is "3", the current number of bets is "0", and two or more virtual medals are stored and stored, when the second credit insertion button 48 is operated, the number of bets will be "2" instead of two virtual medals being reduced. In a situation where the number of bets that can be made at one time is "3", the current number of bets is "1", and one or more virtual medals are stored and stored, when the second credit insertion button 48 is operated, the number of bets will be "2" instead of one virtual medal being reduced. In a situation where the number of bets that can be made at one time is "2", the current number of bets is "0", and two or more virtual medals are stored and stored, when the second credit insertion button 48 is operated, the number of bets will be "2" instead of two virtual medals being reduced. In a situation where the number of bets that can be made at one time is "2", the current number of bets is "1", and one or more virtual medals are stored and stored, when the second credit insertion button 48 is operated, the number of bets will be "2" instead of one virtual medal being reduced.

If the second credit insertion button 48 is operated when the number of stored virtual medals is one and the current number of bets is "0," the number of bets becomes "1" and the number of virtual medals becomes zero.

The first credit insertion button 47 has a larger pressing surface that is pressed when the player operates the button than the second credit insertion button 48. This improves the operability of the first credit insertion button 47.

A settlement button 51 is provided to the left of the start lever 41. This slot machine 10 has a credit function that stores and memorizes, as virtual medals, any surplus medals inserted up to a predetermined maximum value (equivalent to 50 medals) and any medals paid out when a prize is won. When the settlement button 51 is operated while virtual medals are stored and memorized, the virtual medals are paid out from the medal outlet 58 as real medals.

As shown in Figures 2 and 3, inside the cabinet 11, a power supply unit 54 is provided to the left of the hopper unit 53. The power supply unit 54 is provided with a power switch 55 that is operated when the power is turned on or off, a reset button 56 for resetting various states of the slot machine 10, and a setting key insertion hole 57 into which a setting key held by the amusement hall manager is inserted and operated to change the setting value of the slot machine 10 within the range of "1" to "6."

Next, we will explain the symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Figure 4 shows the arrangement of symbols on the left reel 32L, center reel 32M, and right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 21 symbols are arranged in a row on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Numbers from "0" to "20" are also assigned to each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, but these numbers are numbers that the main control device 70, which will be described later, uses to identify the symbols that are visible through the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R, and are not actually assigned to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, these numbers will be used in the following explanation.

There are seven types of symbols: "Bell" symbol (e.g., 20th on left reel 32L), "Replay" symbol (e.g., 19th on left reel 32L), "Watermelon" symbol (e.g., 18th on left reel 32L), "Red 7" symbol (e.g., 15th on left reel 32L), "BAR" symbol (e.g., 10th on left reel 32L), "Cherry" symbol (e.g., 9th on left reel 32L), and "White 7" symbol (e.g., 5th on left reel 32L). The number and arrangement order of the various symbols are different on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Figure 5 is a front view of the display window sections 21L, 21M, and 21R. Each display window section 21L, 21M, and 21R is formed so that of the 21 symbols on the corresponding reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, only three symbols are visible in their entirety. Therefore, when each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is all stopped, 3 x 3 = 9 symbols are visible through the display window section 21L, 21M, and 21R.

In this slot machine 10, one main line ML is set to connect the positions where the symbols on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are visible. The main line ML is a line that connects the middle symbols on the left reel 32L, the middle symbols on the middle reel 32M, and the middle symbols on the right reel 32R. When a predetermined number or more of gaming media have been bet, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate, and if a winning combination corresponding to a winning combination is established on the main line ML, one of the following benefits is awarded: the provision of gaming media, the provision of a replay, or a transition to a new gaming state.

In other words, in this slot machine 10, only one main line ML is set as a line that can result in a win. The main line ML is set as a line that extends in a straight line. Therefore, even if a combination of symbols that can result in a win is formed on a line that extends in a straight line, such as the subline SL1 connecting the upper pattern of the left reel 32L, the middle pattern of the middle reel 32M, and the lower pattern of the right reel 32R, the subline SL2 connecting the upper pattern of the left reel 32L, the upper pattern of the middle reel 32M, and the upper pattern of the right reel 32R, the subline SL3 connecting the lower pattern of the left reel 32L, the lower pattern of the middle reel 32M, and the lower pattern of the right reel 32R, and the subline SL4 connecting the lower pattern of the left reel 32L, the middle pattern of the middle reel 32M, and the upper pattern of the right reel 32R, no win is formed.

Below, we will explain the relationship between winning symbol combinations and the benefits that will be awarded if a prize is won, with reference to Figure 6. Figure 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between winning symbol combinations and the benefits that will be awarded if a prize is won.

The minor prizes that will award gaming media include the first compensation prize, the second compensation prize, the third compensation prize, the fourth compensation prize, the fifth compensation prize, the sixth compensation prize, the seventh compensation prize, the eighth compensation prize, the ninth compensation prize, the first bell prize, the second bell prize, the special bell prize, the first watermelon prize, the second watermelon prize, and the cherry prize. In detail, if the stopping pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "bell" pattern, the stopping pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" pattern, and the stopping pattern on the right reel 32R is a "red 7" pattern, then the first compensation prize will be awarded. If the stopping pattern on the left reel 32L is a "bell" pattern, the stopping pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "red 7" pattern, and the stopping pattern on the right reel 32R is a "bell" pattern on the main line ML, a second supplementary win will be made. If the stopping pattern on the left reel 32L is a "red 7" pattern, the stopping pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" pattern, and the stopping pattern on the right reel 32R is a "bell" pattern on the main line ML, a fourth supplementary win will be made. If the stopping pattern on the left reel 32L is a "bell" pattern, the stopping pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "BAR" pattern, and the stopping pattern on the right reel 32R is a "bell" pattern on the main line ML, a fifth supplementary win will be made. If the stopping pattern on the left reel 32L is a "BAR" pattern, the stopping pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" pattern, and the stopping pattern on the right reel 32R is a "bell" pattern on the main line ML, a sixth supplementary win will be made. If the stopping pattern on the left reel 32L is a "bell" pattern, the stopping pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" pattern, and the stopping pattern on the right reel 32R is a "white 7" pattern on the main line ML, a seventh supplementary win will be made. If the stopped pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "bell" pattern, the stopped pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "white 7" pattern, and the stopped pattern on the right reel 32R is a "bell" pattern, then an 8th supplementary win is awarded. If the stopped pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "white 7" pattern, the stopped pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" pattern, and the stopped pattern on the right reel 32R is a "bell" pattern, then a 9th supplementary win is awarded. If any of the 1st to 9th supplementary wins are awarded, the number of game media to be awarded will be "1".

The first bell will be won if the stopping pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "bell" pattern, the stopping pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" pattern, and the stopping pattern on the right reel 32R is a "bell" pattern, if the stopping pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "bell" pattern, the stopping pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "replay" pattern, and the stopping pattern on the right reel 32R is a "red 7" pattern, if the stopping pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "bell" pattern, the stopping pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "white 7" pattern, and the stopping pattern on the right reel 32R is a "red 7" pattern, or if the stopping pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "bell" pattern, the stopping pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "white 7" pattern, and the stopping pattern on the right reel 32R is a "replay" pattern. If the stopped pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "bell" pattern, the stopped pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" pattern, and the stopped pattern on the right reel 32R is a "replay" pattern, a second bell win will occur. If the stopped pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "white 7" pattern, the stopped pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "white 7" pattern, and the stopped pattern on the right reel 32R is a "red 7" pattern, a special bell win will occur. If any of the first bell win, second bell win, and special bell win occurs, the number of game media to be awarded will be "15".

If the stopping pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "watermelon" pattern, the stopping pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "watermelon" pattern, and the stopping pattern on the right reel 32R is a "watermelon" pattern, the first watermelon win is obtained. If the stopping pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "watermelon" pattern, the stopping pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "watermelon" pattern, and the stopping pattern on the right reel 32R is a "BAR" pattern, the second watermelon win is obtained. In the case of either the first watermelon win or the second watermelon win, the number of game media to be awarded is "5". If the stopping pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "cherry" pattern, regardless of the stopping pattern on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R, a cherry win is obtained. In the case of a cherry win, the number of game media to be awarded is "2".

Winnings that grant a replay privilege, which allows a player to play the next game without betting gaming media, include the normal replay win, the first chance replay win, and the second chance replay win. In detail, a normal replay win occurs when the stopped pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "replay" pattern, the stopped pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "replay" pattern, and the stopped pattern on the right reel 32R is a "replay" pattern. A first chance replay win occurs when the stopped pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "replay" pattern, the stopped pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "cherry" pattern, and the stopped pattern on the right reel 32R is a "bell" pattern. If the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L along the main line ML is a "watermelon" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "replay" symbol, a second chance replay win will occur.

If any of the above replay wins are won, a replay bonus will be awarded, which allows you to play the next game without having to bet on a gaming medium. Specifically, if any of the replay wins are won in a game where you have bet on gaming medium "3", you will be able to start playing the next game with gaming medium "3" betted, without having to bet on a gaming medium. Also, if any of the replay wins are won in a game where you have bet on gaming medium "2", you will be able to start playing the next game with gaming medium "2" betted, without having to bet on a gaming medium.

State transition winnings that only result in a transition of the game state include the first CB winning and the second CB winning. In detail, if the stopped pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "red 7" pattern, the stopped pattern on the center reel 32M is a "red 7" pattern, and the stopped pattern on the right reel 32R is a "BAR" pattern, a first CB winning occurs. If the stopped pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "white 7" pattern, the stopped pattern on the center reel 32M is a "white 7" pattern, and the stopped pattern on the right reel 32R is a "BAR" pattern, a second CB winning occurs. When the first CB winning occurs, the game state transitions to the first CB state, and when the second CB winning occurs, the game state transitions to the second CB state.

The first CB state and the second CB state are game states in which, when a combination of symbols corresponding to a minor winning combination stops on the main line ML, a winning combination is achieved and medals are paid out regardless of whether or not a winning combination is achieved. For example, even if the winning flag corresponding to the first bell winning combination is not set to "1," gaming media is awarded to the player when the combination of symbols corresponding to the first bell winning combination stops on the main line ML. On the other hand, a replay winning combination is achieved on the condition that the corresponding combination has been won in a lottery.

In the first CB state and the second CB state, reel control different from that in the non-CB state is performed. In the non-CB state, reel control that allows the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to slide up to four symbols after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated is performed for each reel. In other words, in the non-CB state, reel control that stops the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R within a specified time (190 msec) after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated is performed for each reel. On the other hand, in the first CB state and the second CB state, the above reel control is performed for the center reel 32M and the right reel 32R, that is, the same reel control as in the normal game, but the above reel control is not performed for the left reel 32L. For the left reel 32L, reel control that allows the reels to slide up to one symbol after the left stop button 42 is operated is performed. In other words, in the first and second CB states, reel control is performed on the left reel 32L to stop it within a specified time (75 msec) that is shorter than the specified time after the left stop button 42 is operated.

In the first CB state and the second CB state, the reel control that causes the reel to slide only a maximum of one symbol is not limited to the left reel 32L, but may cause the reel corresponding to the first operated stop button to slide only a maximum of one symbol, or may cause a predetermined reel to slide only a maximum of one symbol. Furthermore, reel control that causes the reel corresponding to the second or last operated stop button to slide only a maximum of one symbol may be performed, such that the reel corresponding to the stop button operated in a certain order only slides a maximum of one symbol.

In the first CB state and the second CB state, if a combination corresponding to a replay win is won, the replay win takes priority, and if a replay win is not possible, the first bell win may occur. Also, the first bell win may occur even if a combination corresponding to a replay win is not won.

The first CB state and the second CB state are both game states that do not increase the number of game media owned by the player. Moreover, the first CB state and the second CB state are both game states that reduce the number of game media owned by the player at the end of the game state compared to the number of game media owned by the player at the start of the game state. Details of the first CB state and the second CB state will be explained later.

Next, we will explain the devices used to make various announcements and perform various effects.

As shown in FIG. 1, an upper lamp 61 and a speaker 62 are provided on the upper part of the front door 12, and an image display device 63 is also provided. When an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, the upper lamp 61 is controlled to emit light in a manner corresponding to the abnormality, and is also controlled to emit light in a manner corresponding to the winning result. Furthermore, the upper lamp 61 is controlled to emit light so that a light-emitting effect corresponding to the display effect on the image display device 63 is performed. The speakers 62 are provided as a pair on the left and right, and are controlled to output sound or audio corresponding to the abnormality when an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, and are also controlled to output sound or audio corresponding to the winning result. Furthermore, the speakers 62 are controlled to output sound so that a sound output effect corresponding to the display effect on the image display device 63 is performed.

The image display device 63 has a display surface and is configured as a liquid crystal display device equipped with a liquid crystal display, but is not limited to a liquid crystal display device and may be another display device having a display surface such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device or a CRT, or may be a dot matrix display device. When an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, the display is controlled so that an image corresponding to the abnormality is displayed on the display surface. The image display device 63 is also controlled so that an image corresponding to the winning combination in the internal lottery and the winning result in each game is displayed on the display surface. In other words, the image display device 63 executes a display performance.

The gaming panel 20 of the front door 12 is provided with, below the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R, a credit display section 65 that displays the number of virtual medals stored, a dual-purpose display section 66 that displays the number of gaming media that are awarded when a small win is won, and also displays the content of the notification when the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified on the image display device 63, and also displays the results of the management of the gaming history, and a section display section 67 that displays information indicating that the gaming section is the second section. The credit display section 65 is made up of a 7-segment display, and each segment uses a single-color LED that emits light in green or other color.

Figure 7(a) is a front view of a common display area 68 in which a combined display unit 66 and a section display unit 67 are provided. In the common display area 68, as shown in Figure 7(a), a combined display unit 66 in which two seven-segment displays 66a, 66b are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction, and a section display unit 67 consisting of one light-emitting element are integrated.

When any of the small prize winnings (1st to 9th compensation winnings, 1st bell winning, 2nd bell winning, special bell winning, 1st watermelon winning, 2nd watermelon winning, or cherry winning) corresponding to the award of game media is achieved, the number of game media awarded corresponding to the small prize winning is displayed on the dual-purpose display unit 66 at the end of the game in which the small prize winning is achieved. Specifically, when any of the 1st to 9th compensation winnings is achieved in a non-CB state, the left 7-segment display 66a is not displayed and the right 7-segment display 66b displays "1", thereby notifying that "1" game media has been awarded. When any of the 1st bell winning, 2nd bell winning, or special bell winning is achieved in a non-CB state, the left 7-segment display 66a displays "1" and the right 7-segment display 66b displays "5", thereby notifying that "15" game media have been awarded. In addition, when either the first watermelon winning or the second watermelon winning occurs in the non-CB state, the left 7-segment display 66a becomes non-displayable and the right 7-segment display 66b displays "5", thereby notifying that "5" gaming media have been awarded. In addition, when a cherry winning occurs in the non-CB state, the left 7-segment display 66a becomes non-displayable and the right 7-segment display 66b displays "2", thereby notifying that "2" gaming media have been awarded.

In the first CB state and the second CB state, the number of game media awarded by winning a small prize is "1", as described in detail below. Therefore, when a small prize is won in the first CB state or the second CB state, the left 7-segment display 66a is hidden and the right 7-segment display 66b displays "1", thereby notifying that "1" game media has been awarded.

On the other hand, even if a winning event that does not award gaming media, such as any of the replay winnings or any of the CB winnings, occurs, no display corresponding to that winning event is made on the dual-purpose display unit 66, and in this case the seven-segment displays 66a, 66b remain in a hidden state. The display of the number of awarded gaming media on the dual-purpose display unit 66 ends when gaming media is bet on to start the game following the game for which the display was made, and at the time this bet is made the seven-segment displays 66a, 66b go into a hidden state.

When the image display device 63 notifies the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, information corresponding to the notified stop order is displayed on the combined display unit 66. FIG. 7(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the information corresponding to the stop order displayed on the combined display unit 66. As shown in FIG. 7(b), in this slot machine 10, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R notified on the image display device 63 includes a stop order in which the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the center reel 32M, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, a stop order in which the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the center reel 32M, a stop order in which the first stop is the center reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, and a stop order in which the first stop is the center reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. There are stopping sequences where the second stop is on the right reel 32R and the third stop is on the left reel 32L, where the first stop is on the right reel 32R, the second stop is on the left reel 32L and the third stop is on the center reel 32M, where the first stop is on the right reel 32R, the second stop is on the center reel 32M and the third stop is on the left reel 32L, where the first stop is on the left reel 32L and the rest is optional, where the first stop is on the center reel 32M and the rest is optional, and where the first stop is on the right reel 32R and the rest is optional.

The notification of the stop order on the image display device 63 may be executed in the case where, in the lottery process of the role in the non-CB state, a role that includes the first bell winning data and any one of the first to sixth compensation winning data is won, a role that includes the second bell winning data and any one of the seventh to ninth compensation winning data is won, or a role that includes the first bell winning data and any one of the special bell winning data is won. Specifically, when a role that includes the first bell winning data and any one of the first to sixth compensation winning data is won, the first bell winning is established if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the stopping order corresponding to the current winning role among the above-mentioned respective stopping orders, and any one of the first to sixth compensation winnings may be established if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not stopped in the stopping order corresponding to the current winning role. If the first bell wins, the player will be awarded "15" gaming media as already explained, and if any of the first through sixth compensation wins are achieved, the player will be awarded "1" gaming media as already explained.

When a player wins a combination that includes the second bell winning data and any one of the seventh to ninth compensation winning data, the second bell win occurs if reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop in the stopping order that corresponds to the current winning combination, and any one of the seventh to ninth compensation wins may occur if reels 32L, 32M, and 32R do not stop in the stopping order that corresponds to the current winning combination. If the second bell win occurs, the player is awarded "15" gaming media as already explained, and if any of the seventh to ninth compensation wins occurs, the player is awarded "1" gaming media as already explained.

When a winning combination that includes both the first bell winning data and the special bell winning data is won, if reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in a stopping sequence in which the left reel 32L is stopped first among the above stopping sequences, a first bell winning occurs, and if reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in a stopping sequence in which the center reel 32M or right reel 32R is stopped first, a first bell winning or special bell winning occurs. As already explained, if a first bell winning or special bell winning occurs, the game media "15" is awarded to the player.

When any of the above stop orders is notified by the image display device 63, the left 7-segment display 66a of the combined display unit 66 remains in a non-display state, while the right 7-segment display 66b displays the stop order of the order to be notified. This display content is as shown in FIG. 7(b), and the display content of the stop order of the combined display unit 66 is set in a one-to-one correspondence with the notification content of the stop order of the image display device 63. However, this is not limited to this, and a configuration in which multiple types of display content of the combined display unit 66 are set in correspondence with some or all of the notification content of the stop order of the image display device 63 may be used.

The display content of the stop order on the combined display unit 66 is different from the display content that is displayed when the combined display unit 66 displays a message corresponding to the awarding of game media. This makes it easier to distinguish whether the content displayed on the combined display unit 66 corresponds to the number of game media awarded or the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Figures 8(a) and 8(b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the relationship between the notification content of the stop order on the image display device 63 and the display content of the stop order on the combined display unit 66.

When the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is announced on the image display device 63, as shown in Fig. 8(a), the image display device 63 displays the same number of unit display images G1 to G3 as the number of stopping operations required to end the game, and each unit display image G1 to G3 displays an image corresponding to the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Specifically, a left unit display image G1 corresponding to the left reel 32L, a middle unit display image G2 corresponding to the middle reel 32M, and a right unit display image G3 corresponding to the right reel 32R are displayed. FIG. 8(a) shows the stop order being notified when the first stop is the center reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, so the left unit display image G1 displays an image of "2" corresponding to the stop order of the left reel 32L, the middle unit display image G2 displays an image of "1" corresponding to the stop order of the middle reel 32M, and the right unit display image G3 displays an image of "3" corresponding to the stop order of the right reel 32R.

In the image display device 63, an image is displayed that notifies the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R as described above, whereas in the combined display unit 66, as shown in FIG. 8(b), an "L" corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is displayed. In other words, in the image display device 63, unit display images G1 to G3 corresponding to the number of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are displayed, and an image corresponding to the stop order of the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is displayed in each unit display image G1 to G3, whereas in the combined display unit 66, a display unrelated to the number of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is displayed. As a result, even if the combined display unit 66 displays a display corresponding to the notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the display content on the image display device 63.

The display range of the combined display unit 66 is narrower than that of the image display unit 63. This also makes it possible to reduce the player's attention to the combined display unit 66 compared to the image display unit 63. The combined display unit 66 is also located on the opposite side to the image display unit 63, across the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R that allow the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be viewed. This means that the combined display unit 66 is positioned away from the image display unit 63, which also makes it possible to reduce the player's attention to the combined display unit 66.

When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified, the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the combined display unit 66 and the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the image display unit 63 are started after the lottery process for the winning combination is performed and before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is enabled. In this case, the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the combined display unit 66 is started before the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the image display unit 63, but these displays may be configured to start simultaneously or approximately simultaneously, or the display start order may be reversed. In addition, the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the combined display unit 66 and the image display unit 63 is ended when a stop command is issued for all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game in which the display is executed.

The dual-use display unit 66 is disposed in the center of the common display area 68, whereas the section display unit 67 is disposed in a corner of the common display area 68. The section display unit 67 is a display unit for notifying that the game section is the second section out of the first and second sections. The second section is a section in which an advantageous game state (specifically, a pseudo bonus state) in which the expected value of game media in one game (the value obtained by subtracting the "number of game media bet in one game" from the "expected number of game media to be awarded in one game") can be 1 or more can be started by notifying the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, which allows the player to win advantageously when different winning combinations are won according to the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and the advantageous game state can continue. On the other hand, the first section is a section in which the advantageous game state does not start and does not continue.

The section display unit 67 is turned on when the player is in a favorable gaming state in which the expected value of the game medium is 1 or more due to the notification of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, which allows the player to win a winning combination that is favorable to the player when the player wins a winning combination that is favorable to the player depending on the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the winning combination that is favorable to the player depending on the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In this case, the pseudo bonus state corresponds to the favorable gaming state, while the second section that is not a pseudo bonus state does not correspond to the favorable gaming state. Therefore, when the first section moves to the second section, the section display unit 67 may or may not switch from the off state to the on state. If the section display unit 67 is kept off when the player moves to the second section, the section display unit 67 will switch from the off state to the on state when the pseudo bonus state starts in the second section.

When the interval display unit 67 is turned on, it will remain on until the second interval ends, and will be turned off when the second interval ends and the first interval begins. Therefore, even if the pseudo bonus state ends and the normal game state is restored, the second interval may be maintained. In this case, the interval display unit 67 will remain on even if the pseudo bonus state ends, and will be turned off when the second interval ends.

As described above, in a configuration in which the section display unit 67 is turned on once in the second section and the turned on state is maintained until the end of the second section, the dual-purpose display unit 66, which is provided in a concentrated manner in the common display area 68, is turned on when a game medium is awarded and turned off when the next game starts, and is turned on when the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is displayed on the image display device 63 and turned off when the game ends. Therefore, in a configuration in which the section display unit 67 is arranged in the common display area 68 so as not to be too noticeable to the player, it is possible to actively create a situation in which only the section display unit 67 is turned on in the common display area 68 during the second section, making it easier for the manager of the game parlor to check the section display unit 67.

In addition, instead of maintaining the section display unit 67 in a lit state during the second section, the section display unit 67 may be configured to flash at a predetermined cycle during the second section. Also, other displays such as a liquid crystal display device may be used as the combined display unit 66 and the section display unit 67.

The slot machine 10 is provided with various control devices. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, a main control device 70 is provided above the reel unit 31. The main control device 70 is attached to the back plate 11b that forms the back surface of the housing 11. The main control device 70 is configured by housing a main control board 71 in a board box 81. An MPU 72 is mounted on one of the board surfaces of the main control board 71, which is the element mounting surface. The board box 81 is formed transparent so that the MPU 72 housed in the board box 81 can be seen from the outside of the board box 81. Note that the board box 81 is formed colorless and transparent, but it may be formed colored and transparent as long as the MPU 72 housed in the board box 81 can be seen from the outside of the board box 81. The main control device 70 is mounted on the back plate 11b of the housing 11 so that the opposing wall portion 82 facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 71 in the board box 81 faces the front of the slot machine 10. Therefore, by opening the front door 12 toward the front of the slot machine 10 relative to the cabinet 11 and exposing the internal space of the cabinet 11, it becomes possible to visually observe the opposing wall portion 82 of the board box 81 and the MPU 72 through the opposing wall portion 82.

The board box 81 is formed by combining a number of case bodies in front and behind, and these case bodies are provided with joints 83 that prevent the separation of these case bodies and leave a trace when the case bodies are separated. The joints 83 are arranged in a row on one side of the board box 81, which is approximately a rectangular parallelepiped. As a result, even if some of the joints 83 are used to prevent the separation of the case bodies and the case bodies are separated by destroying the part of the joints 83, it is possible to prevent the separation of the case bodies again by connecting another joint 83 thereafter. In addition, since the joints 83 are destroyed when the case bodies are separated and a trace is left, it is possible to know whether the separation of the case bodies is being performed illegally by visually checking the joints 83. In addition, a seal seal 84 is attached to another side of the board box 81 other than the side on which the joints 83 are arranged in a row so as to straddle the boundary between the case bodies. When the seal seal 84 is peeled off, an adhesive layer remains on the case body. As a result, if the seal seal 84 is peeled off when the case bodies are separated, a trace can be left.

As shown in FIG. 2, the slot machine 10 is provided with a performance control device 90 in addition to the main control device 70. The performance control device 90 is arranged behind the image display device 63 and stacked on the front door 12. The performance control device 90 controls the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 based on commands received from the main control device 70. Note that the performance control device 90 is configured with a control board housed in a board box, similar to the main control device 70.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be explained based on the block diagram in FIG. 9.

As already explained, the main control board 71 of the main control device 70 is equipped with an MPU 72. The MPU 72 is provided with a ROM 73 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 72, a RAM 74 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 73, a random number circuit 75 that sequentially updates random numbers within a predetermined numerical range based on a clock signal output from a clock circuit, and a clock circuit that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency. In addition to this, the MPU 72 also has an interrupt circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like built in. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 73 and RAM 74 are integrated into a single chip for the MPU 72, and each may be integrated into a separate chip.

The MPU 72 is provided with an input port and an output port. On the input side of the MPU 72, various sensors are connected, such as the reel unit 31, the start detection sensor 41a that detects the operation of the start lever 41, the stop detection sensors 42a, 43a, 44a that individually detect the operation of each stop button 42, 43, 44, the inserted medal detection sensor 45a that detects medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45, the credit insertion detection sensors 47a, 48a that individually detect the operation of each credit insertion button 47, 48, the settlement detection sensor 51a that detects the operation of the settlement button 51, the payout detection sensor of the hopper device 53, the reset detection sensor that detects the operation of the reset button 56 provided on the power supply device 54, and the setting key detection sensor that detects the insertion of the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 57, and the like, and the signals from each of these sensors are input to the MPU 72.

The output side of the MPU 72 is connected to the reel unit 31, the selector drive unit 52a provided on the selector 52, the payout motor of the hopper device 53, the combined display unit 66, the section display unit 67, the performance control device 90, etc. In each game, the rotation drive control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R of the reel unit 31 is performed by the MPU 72. The selector 52 has a function of guiding a medal inserted from the medal insertion port 45 to the hopper device 53 after detecting it with the inserted medal detection sensor 45a when acceptance is permitted, and discharging it to the medal receiving tray 59 without detecting it with the inserted medal detection sensor 45a when acceptance is prohibited. The selector drive unit 52a has a function to switch the state of the selector 52 between an acceptance permitted state and an acceptance prohibited state, and specifically, it operates the path switching piece provided on the selector 52 between an acceptance permitted position and an acceptance prohibited position. The MPU 72 switches the state of the selector 52 between an acceptance permission state and an acceptance prohibition state by switching between the output state and the stop state of the drive signal to the selector drive unit 52a.

When a small winning combination is achieved and a medal is paid out, the MPU 72 executes drive control of the hopper device 53. When a game medium is awarded, the MPU 72 controls the display of the combined display unit 66 so that the number of game media to be awarded is displayed. When a notification start trigger occurs in the second section, the MPU 72 controls the display of the section display unit 67 so that a notification is given that the section is the second section. The MPU 72 also controls the display of the combined display unit 66 so that a display corresponding to the game management result is given. The MPU 72 also transmits a command to the performance control device 90 at each timing of each game, and when a command for notifying the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is transmitted to the performance control device 90 on the image display device 63, the MPU 72 executes display control of the combined display unit 66 so that a display corresponding to the content to be notified is given. In this case, the direct display control of the image display device 63 is performed by the performance control device 90, whereas the direct display control of the combined display unit 66 is performed by the MPU 72. In other words, for the image display device 63, which is the subject of relatively complex display control, direct display control is performed by the performance control device 90, and for the dual-purpose display unit 66, which is the subject of relatively simple display control, direct display control is performed by the MPU 72. This makes it possible to perform both displays that emphasize increasing attention to the performance and displays that emphasize reliability, while reducing the processing load on the MPU 72.

A power failure monitoring circuit provided in the power supply 54 is connected to the input side of the MPU 72 (not shown). The power supply 54 is equipped with a power supply unit and a power failure monitoring circuit that supply drive power to the main control unit 70 and other electronic devices of the slot machine 10. The power failure monitoring circuit monitors the voltage applied to the power supply unit from an external power source, and outputs a power failure signal to the MPU 72 when the voltage falls below a reference voltage. The MPU 72 executes power failure processing by receiving the power failure signal, and enables the processing state before the power failure to be restored after power is restored. The power supply 54 is also provided with a power failure power supply unit for supplying backup power to the RAM 74 as power failure power when the supply of operating power from the external power source is cut off. As a result, even when the supply of operating power from the external power source is cut off, data is stored and retained in the RAM 74 when the power failure power supply unit can supply backup power (for example, for one or two days).

The performance control device 90 is equipped with a performance control board 91 for controlling the execution of various notifications and various performances. The performance control board 91 is equipped with an MPU 92. The MPU 92 has a built-in ROM 93 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 92, and a RAM 94 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when the control programs stored in the ROM 93 are executed. It also has built-in a clock circuit that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an interrupt circuit, a data input/output circuit, a random number generating circuit, etc.

It is not essential that the ROM 93 and RAM 94 are integrated into a single chip for the MPU 92, and each may be integrated into a separate chip. In addition, while backup power is not supplied to the RAM 94 from the power-off power supply unit of the power supply device 54 when the supply of operating power from the external power source is cut off, backup power may be supplied to the RAM 94.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. As already explained, the MPU 72 of the main control device 70 is connected to the input side of the MPU 92, and various commands are received from the MPU 72. The upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92. Based on the commands received from the MPU 72 of the main control device 70, the MPU 92 controls the light emission of the upper lamp 61, the sound output of the speaker 62, and the display of the image display device 63, thereby enabling various notifications and various performances to be performed.

Although not shown, the performance control board 91 is equipped with a video display processor (VDP), a character ROM, a video RAM, etc. in addition to the MPU 92. The VDP is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver built into the image display device 63. The VDP is involved in reading and writing data from the video RAM, and reads image data to be stored in the video RAM from the character ROM at a predetermined timing and displays it on the image display device 63. The character ROM serves as an image data library for storing character data such as patterns to be displayed on the image display device 63. This character ROM holds bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table to be referenced when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, etc. The video RAM is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the image display device 63. When the MPU 92 determines the execution content of the performance based on a command received from the MPU 72 of the main control device 70, it outputs a drawing list to the VDP that indicates the content of the image corresponding to each update timing according to the execution content of the determined performance. The VDP reads image data from the character ROM according to the drawing list, and creates display data in the video RAM using the read image data. The VDP then outputs an image signal corresponding to the created display data to the image display device 63, causing the image display device 63 to display an image corresponding to the display data.

For ease of explanation, in the following explanation, the MPU 72, ROM 73, and RAM 74 of the main control device 70 are referred to as the main MPU 72, main ROM 73, and main RAM 74, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the performance control device 90 are referred to as the performance MPU 92, performance ROM 93, and performance RAM 94, respectively.

Next, the processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described. First, the main processing executed by the main MPU 72 when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 10.

In the main process, the initialization process is first performed (step S101). In the initialization process, an interrupt by the timer interrupt process is permitted, and various initial settings are made to the registers and I/O devices in the main MPU 72. Then, it is determined whether the power is turned on with the setting key inserted into the setting key insertion hole 57 and turned on (step S102). If the power is turned on with the setting key turned on (step S102: YES), and if the reset button 56 is not pressed when the power is turned on (step S103: NO), a partial clear process is performed (step S104), and then a setting value update process is performed (step S106). On the other hand, if the reset button 56 is pressed when the power is turned on (step S103: YES), then a full clear process is performed (step S105), and then a setting value update process is performed (step S106). In the partial clear process (step S104) and the full clear process (step S105), some or all of the areas of the main RAM 74 are initialized. The details of the partial clear process (step S104) and the full clear process (step S105) will be explained later.

In the setting value update process, the current setting value is read under the condition that the setting key is inserted and turned ON, and the current setting value is displayed on the credit display unit 65. When the setting value update process is executed, either the partial clear process (step S104) or the full clear process (step S105) has been executed before, so when the setting value update process starts, the credit display unit 65 displays the setting value as "1". In the setting value update process, the setting value is updated by 1 every time the reset button 56 is operated, and the updated setting value is displayed on the credit display unit 65. Note that if the reset button 56 is operated when the setting value is "6", the setting value is updated to "1". If the ON operation of the setting key is released after the start lever 41 is operated, the setting value selected at that time becomes the setting value set in the current setting value update process, and the setting value update process ends. In this case, the display of the setting value on the credit display unit 65 ends. After that, the process moves to normal processing (step S107). The normal processing will be described in detail later.

If the setting key is not turned on in the main process (step S102: NO), the power recovery process from step S108 onwards is executed. The power recovery process is a process for returning the state of the slot machine 10 to the state before the power was cut off. In the power recovery process, the main RAM 74 is checked to determine whether the setting value of the slot machine 10 is normal or not (step S108). Specifically, if the setting value is any of "1" to "6", it is determined to be normal, and if it is "0" or "7" or more, it is determined to be abnormal. If the setting value is normal, it is determined whether the power outage flag is set to "1" (step S109). The power outage flag is provided in the main RAM 74, and if the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is stopped and a predetermined power outage process is normally executed, the power outage flag is set to "1". If the power outage flag is set to "1", it is confirmed whether the RAM determination value is normal or not (step S110). Specifically, the checksum value of the main RAM 74 is checked to determine whether the value is normal or not.

If the answer is yes in all of steps S108 to S110, it means that the power outage processing at the time of the previous power outage was executed normally. In this case, the value of the stack pointer saved in the main RAM 74 is written to the stack pointer of the main MPU 72, and the data saved in the main RAM 74 is restored to the register of the main MPU 72, thereby restoring the state of the register of the main MPU 72 to the state before the power was cut off (step S111). In addition, the power outage flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S112). After that, a power recovery command is sent to the production MPU 92 to make it recognize that the power recovery processing has been executed (step S113), and then the address before the power was cut off is returned to (step S114).

In the return command, information indicating whether or not either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data described later is stored in the main RAM 74 is set. That is, in step S113, it is determined whether or not the first CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, and if the first CB winning data is stored, a return command in a state in which information indicating that the first CB winning data is stored is set is sent to the production side MPU 92. Also, in step S113, it is determined whether or not the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, and if the second CB winning data is stored, a return command in a state in which information indicating that the second CB winning data is stored is set is sent to the production side MPU 92. Also, in step S113, if it is determined that neither the first CB winning data nor the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, a return command in a state in which information indicating that neither the first CB winning data nor the second CB winning data is stored is sent to the production side MPU 92.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in any of steps S108 to S110, an operation prohibition process is executed. In the operation prohibition process, the execution of the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is prohibited (step S115), all output ports of the main MPU 72 are cleared to "0" to turn off all actuators connected to those output ports (step S116), and an error notification process is executed to notify the hall manager or the like of the occurrence of an error (step S117). This then becomes an infinite loop. The operation prohibition process is released by executing a partial clear process (step S104) or a full clear process (step S105).

Next, the timer interrupt process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 11. Note that the timer interrupt process is initiated, for example, every 1.49 milliseconds.

In the register save process (step S201), the values of all registers in the main MPU 72 that are used in the normal process described below are saved to the main RAM 74. In step S202, it is confirmed whether the power outage flag is set to "1", and if the power outage flag is set to "1", the process proceeds to step S203 and power outage processing is executed.

The power outage flag is set when a power outage signal from the power outage monitoring circuit of the power supply unit 54 is input to the main MPU 72. In the power outage processing, first it is determined whether the command transmission has been completed, and if the transmission has not been completed, this processing is terminated and the timer interrupt processing is returned to, and the command transmission is terminated. If the command transmission has been completed, the value of the stack pointer of the main MPU 72 is saved in the main RAM 74. Then, the output state of the output port of the main MPU 72 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, when the power outage is resolved, a judgment value for judging whether the data in the main RAM 74 is normal or not is calculated and saved in the main RAM 74, and further access to the RAM is prohibited. After the above processing is performed, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the power being completely cut off and processing being unable to be executed.

If the power outage flag is not set to "1" in step S202, various processes from step S204 onwards are carried out. In step S204, a watchdog timer clear process is carried out to initialize the value of a watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of a malfunction. In step S205, an interrupt end declaration process is carried out to enable the main MPU 72 itself to set the next timer interrupt. In step S206, a stepping motor control process is carried out to drive the stepping motors provided on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in order to spin these reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In step S207, the state of various sensors connected to the input port is read, and a sensor monitoring process is performed to monitor whether the read result is normal. Here, the slot machine 10 is provided with a detection sensor for detecting fraud against the hopper device 53. As already explained, the hopper device 53 has a function of paying out medals stored in the storage tank to the medal tray 59 when a winning event corresponding to the provision of game media is established on the main line ML. The hopper device 53 is provided with a payout device for paying out medals stored in the storage tank toward the medal discharge port 58, and a payout detection sensor for detecting medals paid out from the payout device. When it becomes necessary to pay out medals, the payout device is driven and controlled to pay out medals, and the paid out medals are detected by the payout detection sensor. Then, when the number of medals detected by the payout detection sensor reaches the number of medals to be paid out, the payout of medals from the payout device is stopped. In this case, a fraudulent act is assumed in which a fraudulent tool is inserted from the front of the slot machine 10 through the medal ejection port 58, and the fraudulent tool prevents the payout detection sensor from detecting medals, thereby dispensing more medals than should actually be dispensed. In this slot machine 10, even if the payout device is controlled to dispense medals, if the payout detection sensor does not detect medals for a predetermined period (e.g., 10 seconds), a payout abnormality occurs and the drive control of the payout device is stopped. If a fraudulent act as described above is committed, a large number of medals will be paid out during the predetermined period. Note that if a payout abnormality occurs, an abnormality notification is issued, but the abnormality notification is released by performing an abnormality release operation on the key cylinder 14 after medals are replenished.

In order to prevent the above-mentioned fraudulent acts, the slot machine 10 is provided with an object detection sensor for detecting an object moving from the medal discharge port 58 toward the payout detection sensor. A plurality of object detection sensors are provided along the path from the medal discharge port 58 toward the payout detection sensor. In the sensor monitoring process of step S207, if the object detection sensors are in a detection state in the order of the object detection sensor on the payout detection sensor side → the object detection sensor on the medal discharge port 58 side within the abnormality detection period (for example, 5 seconds), it is determined to be normal, but if the object detection sensors are in a detection state in the order of the object detection sensor on the medal discharge port 58 side → the object detection sensor on the payout detection sensor side within the abnormality detection period, it is determined to be an intrusion abnormality. If it is determined to be an intrusion abnormality, the intrusion abnormality flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" and an intrusion abnormality command corresponding to the intrusion abnormality is sent to the performance side MPU 92. As a result, the performance side MPU 92 controls the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 so that an intrusion abnormality notification is executed. The intrusion abnormality notification is temporarily stopped by stopping the supply of operating power to the slot machine 10, but if the intrusion abnormality flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" after the supply of operating power is resumed, an intrusion abnormality command is sent again to the performance side MPU 92, and the intrusion abnormality notification is resumed. In order to release the state in which the intrusion abnormality flag is set to "1", it is necessary to execute a partial clear process (step S104) or a full clear process (step S105).

In step S208, a timer subtraction process is performed to subtract the values of each counter and timer. In step S209, a counter process is performed to output the results of counting the number of medals bet and the number of medals paid out to the outside. In step S210, a command output process is performed to send various commands to the performance side MPU 92. In step S211, a port output process is performed to output data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port. In step S212, the values of each register that were saved to the main side RAM 74 in the previous step S201 are restored to the corresponding register in the main side MPU 72.

In step S213, a management process is executed to manage the game history and to display the contents corresponding to the management results on the combined display unit 66. Specifically, the ratio of the total number of games in the second section to the total number of games is calculated, and the calculated ratio is displayed on the combined display unit 66. In this case, the calculation of the ratio of the total number of games in the second section to the total number of games may be configured to be performed for each set value. In this configuration, even if the set value is changed, the calculation may continue without initializing the information on the ratio performed for each set value. Thereafter, in step S214, an interrupt permission process is performed to permit the next timer interrupt, and this series of timer interrupt processes is terminated.

Next, the normal processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be explained based on the flowchart in Figure 12.

First, an interrupt permission process is performed to permit the next timer interrupt (step S301). Then, a start waiting process is performed (step S302). Figure 13 is a flowchart showing the start waiting process.

First, it is determined whether the replay bet setting flag provided in the master RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S401). The replay bet setting flag is a flag for the master MPU 72 to determine whether the same number of bets as the previous bet number have already been set when any replay winning has been established in the previous game. If the determination is negative in step S401, the value of the bet number history counter provided in the master RAM 74 is set to the bet number setting counter 74a (see FIG. 9) provided in the master RAM 74, provided that any replay winning has been established in the previous game (step S402: YES) (step S403). The bet number setting counter 74a is a counter for the master MPU 72 to specify the number of bets for the game to be executed, and the bet number history counter is a counter for the master MPU 72 to specify the number of bets for the previous game. After that, the replay bet setting flag is set to "1" (step S404).

If a positive determination is made in step S401, if a negative determination is made in step S402, or if the processing of step S404 is executed, a bet handling process is executed (step S405). Figure 14 is a flowchart showing the bet handling process.

If the current gaming state is not the second CB state (step S501: NO), the bet upper limit, which is the upper limit of gaming media that can be bet on in the current game, is set to "3" (step S502). If the current gaming state is the second CB state (step S501: YES), the bet upper limit, which is the upper limit of gaming media that can be bet on in the current game, is set to "2" (step S503). In other words, in this slot machine 10, when the state is the second CB state, the bet upper limit is set to "2", and when the state is not the second CB state, the bet upper limit is set to "3".

When the process of step S502 or step S503 is executed, on the condition that the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main RAM 74 is not the current bet upper limit number (step S504: NO), it is determined whether the number of virtual medals stored is one or more and a valid bet operation has been performed (step S505). The main RAM 74 is provided with a credit counter 74b (see FIG. 9) as an area for storing the number of virtual medals stored. In step S505, it is determined whether the number of virtual medals stored is one or more by determining whether the value of the credit counter 74b is 1 or more. In addition, if the first credit insertion button 47 is operated, it is determined that a valid bet operation has been performed, and if the second credit insertion button 48 is operated, it is determined that a valid bet operation has been performed on the condition that the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is 1 or less.

If the determination in step S505 is affirmative, a bet setting process is executed (step S506). In the bet setting process, when the first credit insertion button 47 is operated, if the sum of the value of the bet number setting counter 74a and the value of the credit counter 74b is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of bets, the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is set to the upper limit number of bets, and the value of the number of virtual medals used in the setting is subtracted from the credit counter 74b. If the sum of the value of the bet number setting counter 74a and the value of the credit counter 74b is less than the upper limit number of bets, the value of the credit counter 74b is added to the bet number setting counter 74a, and then the value of the credit counter 74b is cleared to "0". Furthermore, in the bet number setting process, when the second credit insertion button 48 is operated, if the sum of the value of the bet number setting counter 74a and the value of the credit counter 74b is 2 or more, the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is set to "2" and the value of the number of virtual medals used in the setting is subtracted from the credit counter 74b, and if the sum of the value of the bet number setting counter 74a and the value of the credit counter 74b is less than 2, the value of the credit counter 74b is added to the bet number setting counter 74a and then the value of the credit counter 74b is cleared to "0."

If a positive judgment is made in step S504, if a negative judgment is made in step S505, or if the processing of step S506 is performed, it is judged whether or not one medal is detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a due to the medal being inserted into the medal insertion port 45 (step S507). If a positive judgment is made in step S507, if the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main RAM 74 is less than the bet upper limit number (step S508: NO), the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is incremented by 1 (step S509), and if the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is equal to or greater than the bet upper limit number (step S508: YES), the value of the credit counter 74b of the main RAM 74 is incremented by 1 (step S510). If the processing of step S509 or step S510 is performed, the acceptance prohibition processing is performed (step S512) on the condition that the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is equal to or greater than the bet upper limit number and the value of the credit counter 74b is equal to or greater than the upper limit storage number (specifically, "50") (step S511: YES). By executing the reception prohibition process, even if a medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 45, the medal is discharged into the medal tray 59 without being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a.

If a negative judgment is made in step S507, if a negative judgment is made in step S511, or if the processing of step S512 is executed, it is judged whether or not the current gaming state is the first CB state (step S513). If the current gaming state is the first CB state (step S513: YES), the bet setting completion flag at the time of acceptance provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S515) on the condition that the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is "3" (step S514: YES). On the other hand, if the current gaming state is not the first CB state (step S513: NO), the bet setting completion flag at the time of acceptance is set to "1" (step S515) on the condition that the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is 2 or more (step S516: YES).

The bet set flag at the time of acceptance is a flag for the main MPU 72 to determine whether or not a sufficient number of gaming media have been bet to start one game. If the gaming state is the first CB state, one game cannot be started unless "3" gaming media have been bet, and one game can be started only when "3" gaming media have been bet. Also, if the gaming state is not the first CB state, one game cannot be started unless two or more gaming media have been bet, and one game can be started only when two or more gaming media have been bet.

Returning to the explanation of the start waiting process (FIG. 13), after the bet corresponding process is executed in step S405, it is determined whether the settlement button 51 has been operated (step S406). If the settlement button 51 has been operated (step S406: YES), the settlement process is executed (step S407), and the bet setting completion flag at the time of acceptance in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S408). In the settlement process in step S407, if the bet setting completion flag at the time of replay in the main RAM 74 is not set to "1", the hopper device 53 is driven and controlled so that the number of medals corresponding to the sum of the value of the bet number setting counter 74a and the value of the credit counter 74b are discharged to the medal tray 59. In this case, the bet number setting counter 74a is cleared to "0" and the credit counter 74b is cleared to "0". On the other hand, if the replay bet setting flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1", the hopper device 53 is controlled and driven so that the number of medals corresponding to the value of the credit counter 74b is discharged into the medal tray 59. In this case, the credit counter 74b is cleared to "0".

Returning to the explanation of the normal processing (FIG. 12), after executing the start waiting processing in step S302, it is determined whether or not either the replay bet set flag or the acceptance bet set flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S303). If a negative determination is made in step S303, the process returns to step S302. If a positive determination is made in step S303, it is determined whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated (step S304). If the start lever 41 has not been operated, the process returns to step S302.

When the start lever 41 is operated (step S304: YES), the main line ML is activated and then the reception prohibition process is executed (step S305). By executing the reception prohibition process, even if a medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 45, the medal is discharged into the medal tray 59 without being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a.

Then, in step S306, a start setting process is executed to set various settings when the game is started, in step S307, a role selection process is executed to select roles for the current game, and in step S308, a reel control process is executed to drive and control each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in a manner corresponding to the result of the current role selection process.

Then, the medium granting process is executed (step S309). In the medium granting process, if a small win has been achieved in the current game, a process is executed to grant the player a number of game media corresponding to the small win. Specifically, when granting virtual medals, a value corresponding to the current small win is added to the credit counter 74b of the main RAM 74, and if the value of the credit counter 74b has reached the upper limit of the number of stored memories, the hopper device 53 is driven and controlled so that the number of medals exceeding the upper limit of the number of stored memories is paid out to the medal tray 59. In addition, in the medium granting process, the display of the dual-purpose display unit 66 is controlled so that a display corresponding to the number of game media to be granted this time is displayed. The display corresponding to the number of game media on the dual-purpose display unit 66 continues until a new bet of game media is made.

After that, a response process is executed at the end of the game to enable the setting of the game state and game zone corresponding to the result of this game (step S310). In addition, an external output setting process is executed to output the state of the slot machine 10 to the management computer of the game hall (step S311). After that, an acceptance permission process is executed (step S312). As a result of the acceptance permission process being executed, the medal inserted from the medal insertion port 45 is detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a and then collected by the hopper device 53.

Next, the start-up setting process executed in step S306 of the normal process (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 15.

First, both the replay bet set flag and the acceptance bet set flag in the master RAM 74 are cleared to "0" (step S601). Then, if the value of the bet number setting counter 74a in the master RAM 74 is "3" (step S602: NO), a first bet number command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S603), and if the value of the bet number setting counter 74a in the master RAM 74 is "2" (step S602: YES), a second bet number command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S604). The first bet number command is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize that the number of bets on the currently started game is "3", and the second bet number command is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize that the number of bets on the currently started game is "2".

When the processing of step S603 or step S604 is executed, the value of the bet number setting counter 74a in the master RAM 74 is set to the bet number history counter in the master RAM 74 (step S605). Note that the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is cleared to "0" when the current game ends.

Next, the role selection process executed in step S307 of the normal process (FIG. 12) will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 16.

In step S701, a random number used to determine whether a winning combination has been achieved is obtained. In this slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the random number at that time is latched from the random number circuit 75. The random number circuit 75 generates random numbers between "0" and "65535", and when the main MPU 72 confirms the operation of the start lever 41, it stores the value latched in the random number circuit 75 in the main RAM 74. With this configuration, it is possible to quickly obtain a random number when the start lever 41 is operated, making it possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The random number circuit 75 is configured to latch the value of the free-running counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After obtaining the random number, the lottery table for determining whether the winning combination is a winning combination is read from the main ROM 73 (step S702). In this slot machine 10, six setting values from "1" to "6" are prepared in advance, and by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 57 and turning it ON and performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to set which setting value corresponds to the winning probability for the lottery process of the winning combination. The winning probability is more advantageous for the player when the setting value is "n+1" than when it is "n". Specifically, the winning probability of a predetermined combination is higher when the setting value is "n+1" than when it is "n", so that the setting value is more advantageous for the player than when it is "n". In addition, even if the setting value is the same level, it is more advantageous for the player when the number of gaming media bet is "3" than when it is "2". In addition, there are a first CB state and a second CB state as game states. In step S702, a lottery table corresponding to the combination of the current setting value, the current number of bets, and the current game state is selected.

The lottery table in the non-CB state will be explained using the example where the setting value is "3". Figure 17 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the role lottery table when three coins are bet and selected when the bet number is "3", and Figure 18 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the role lottery table when two coins are bet and selected when the bet number is "2". In the following explanation, the explanatory diagram in Figure 19 will be referred to as appropriate.

As shown in Figures 17 and 18, index values IV are set in the winning combination table for both three and two bets. Each index value IV is associated with winning data (i.e., winning combination) that will result in a win, and a point value PV is set. The point value PV determines the winning probability of the corresponding index value IV in relation to the maximum value ("65535") of the random number circuit 75. The number of index values IV is the same for three bets and two bets, and the type of winning data set for each index value IV is the same for three bets and two bets, except for index value IV = 17.

Specifically, the first bell winning data is set to the index values IV = 1 to 6, and one of the first to sixth compensation winning data is set. When the index value IV = 1 is a winning, as shown in FIG. 19, if the first stop (the reel on which the stop command was first issued) is the left reel 32L, the second stop (the reel on which the stop command was second issued) is the center reel 32M, and the third stop (the reel on which the stop command was last issued) is the right reel 32R, the first bell winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and the first compensation winning may be established in other cases. When the index value IV = 2 is a winning, if the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the center reel 32M, the first bell winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and the fourth compensation winning may be established in other cases. In the case where the winning is made with an index value IV=3, if the first stop is the center reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, the first bell winning is surely made regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, and in other cases, the third supplementary winning may be made. In the case where the winning is made with an index value IV=4, if the first stop is the center reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, the first bell winning is surely made regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, and in other cases, the sixth supplementary winning may be made. In the case where the winning is made with an index value IV=5, if the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the center reel 32M, the first bell winning is surely made regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, and in other cases, the second supplementary winning may be made. When an index value IV=6 is reached and a win occurs, if the first stop is on the right reel 32R, the second stop is on the center reel 32M, and the third stop is on the left reel 32L, the first bell win will occur regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, and in all other cases the fifth supplementary win may occur.

As already explained, in the slot machine 10, when in the non-CB state, reel control is performed on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, which allows the reels to slide up to four symbols after the stop buttons 42-44 are operated. In other words, reel control is performed on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, which stops the reels within a specified time (190 milliseconds) after the stop buttons 42-44 are operated. By performing such reel control, it becomes easier to achieve a winning combination that corresponds to a winning role, and it becomes possible to prevent a winning combination that corresponds to a non-winning role from being achieved. However, because the amount of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that can be slid is limited as described above, if there are five or more symbols among the constituent symbols that make up the combination of symbols for establishing a win on one reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, the constituent symbols may not stop on the main line ML depending on the timing of the operation of the corresponding stop buttons 42 to 44 (this phenomenon is also called a "missed win"). The first bell win, the second bell win, and the various replay wins are winning modes that do not cause a miss if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the corresponding order, while the first to ninth compensation wins, the first watermelon win, the second watermelon win, the cherry win, the first CB win, and the second CB win are winning modes that may cause a miss depending on the timing of the stop operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 relative to the rotation position of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

The index values IV = 7 to 9 are set with the second bell winning data and with any of the seventh to ninth compensation winning data. When the index value IV = 7 is a winning combination, as shown in FIG. 19, if the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second bell winning combination is surely achieved regardless of the type of the second and third stop targets reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and otherwise the seventh compensation winning combination may be achieved. When the index value IV = 8 is a winning combination, if the first stop is the center reel 32M, the second bell winning combination is surely achieved regardless of the type of the second and third stop targets reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and otherwise the ninth compensation winning combination may be achieved. If the index value IV=9 is a win, and the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second bell win will be achieved regardless of the type of the second and third stop targets, reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and the operation timing of each stop button 42-44; otherwise, the eighth supplementary win may be achieved.

As shown in FIG. 17 and FIG. 18, the first bell winning data and the special bell winning data are set for the index value IV=10. When the index value IV=10 is won, as shown in FIG. 19, if the first stop is the left reel 32L, the first bell winning is surely achieved regardless of the type of the second and third stop targets reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. On the other hand, if the first stop is either the center reel 32M or the right reel 32R, the special bell winning can be achieved regardless of the type of the second and third stop targets reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, the special bell winning is not achieved depending on the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 relative to the rotation position of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. In this case, the first bell winning is achieved regardless of the type of the second and third stop targets reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. In other words, if a win occurs with index value IV=10 and the center reel 32M or right reel 32R stops as the first stop, the special bell win takes priority, and if the special bell win cannot be achieved in relation to the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, the first bell win will definitely be achieved.

As shown in Figs. 17 and 18, only the first watermelon winning data is set for index value IV=11. When a win occurs with index value IV=11, as shown in Fig. 19, the first watermelon winning can be achieved regardless of the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, the first watermelon winning may not be achieved. As shown in Figs. 17 and 18, only the second watermelon winning data is set for index value IV=12. When a win occurs with index value IV=12, as shown in Fig. 19, the second watermelon winning may be achieved regardless of the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, the second watermelon winning may not be achieved.

As shown in Figures 17 and 18, only cherry winning data is set for index value IV = 13. If a win occurs with index value IV = 13, a cherry winning can be achieved regardless of the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, as shown in Figure 19. However, depending on the operation timing of the left stop button 42 in relation to the spinning position of left reel 32L, a cherry winning may not be achieved.

As shown in FIG. 17 and FIG. 18, only the first chance replay winning data is set for index value IV=14. When a win occurs with index value IV=14, as shown in FIG. 19, the first chance replay winning is surely established regardless of the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. Also, as shown in FIG. 17 and FIG. 18, only the second chance replay winning data is set for index value IV=15. When a win occurs with index value IV=15, as shown in FIG. 19, the second chance replay winning is surely established regardless of the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. Also, as shown in FIG. 17 and FIG. 18, only the normal replay winning data is set for index value IV=16. If a win occurs with index value IV = 16, as shown in Figure 19, a normal replay win is guaranteed regardless of the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44.

For the index value IV=17, only the first CB winning data is set as shown in FIG. 17 in the role selection table when three coins are bet, and only the second CB winning data is set as shown in FIG. 18 in the role selection table when two coins are bet. In other words, the first CB winning data is set as a winning role only when the number of bets on the game medium is "3", and the first CB winning can only be achieved when the number of bets on the game medium is "3". Also, the second CB winning data is set as a winning role only when the number of bets on the game medium is "2", and the second CB winning can only be achieved when the number of bets on the game medium is "2". When the first CB winning data is set, if the number of bets on the game medium is "3", the first CB winning can be achieved regardless of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, as shown in FIG. 19. However, there is a possibility that the first CB winning will not be achieved depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. When the second CB winning data is set, if the number of game media bets is "2", the second CB winning can be achieved regardless of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, as shown in FIG. 19. However, the second CB winning may not be achieved depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44.

Here, winning data other than the first CB winning data and the second CB winning data is erased in the game in which the winning was made, regardless of whether or not the corresponding winning was made, and is not carried over to subsequent games following the game in which the winning was made. In contrast, the first CB winning data and the second CB winning data are stored and held in memory until the corresponding winning is made, even in subsequent games following the game in which the winning was made, except when the clearing process of the main RAM 74 is performed (partial clearing process (step S104) or full clearing process (step S105) for the first CB winning data, and full clearing process (step S105) for the second CB winning data). In this case, in a game in which either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is carried over, the index value IV corresponding to the first CB winning data and the second CB winning data is excluded from the lottery.

In other words, if the first CB winning data is set in the main RAM 74 as a result of a game being played with the number of bets being "3", and the first CB winning data is carried over because the first CB winning data is not established, the index value IV corresponding to the first CB winning data is excluded from the lottery even if the game is played with the number of bets being "3", and the index value IV corresponding to the second CB winning data is excluded from the lottery even if the game is played with the number of bets being "2". Also, if the second CB winning data is set in the main RAM 74 as a result of a game being played with the number of bets being "2", and the second CB winning data is carried over because the second CB winning data is not established, the index value IV corresponding to the first CB winning data is excluded from the lottery even if the game is played with the number of bets being "3", and the index value IV corresponding to the second CB winning data is excluded from the lottery even if the game is played with the number of bets being "2". This makes it possible to prevent either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data from being newly stored even if either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data has already been stored, and makes it possible to prevent multiple CB winning data from being accumulated and stored.

When the role selection table for 3 bets in FIG. 17 is selected, the probability of winning when the index value IV=1, the probability of winning when the index value IV=2, the probability of winning when the index value IV=3, the probability of winning when the index value IV=4, the probability of winning when the index value IV=5, and the probability of winning when the index value IV=6 are each about 1/21.8. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=7, the probability of winning when the index value IV=8, and the probability of winning when the index value IV=9 are each about 1/21.8. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=10 is about 1/9.4. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=11 is about 1/164. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=12 is about 1/146. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=13 is about 1/423. Furthermore, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 14 is approximately 1/328. The probability of winning when the index value IV = 15 is approximately 1/164. The probability of winning when the index value IV = 16 is approximately 1/7.3. The probability of winning when the index value IV = 17 is approximately 1/3.3.

On the other hand, when the role selection table for two bets in FIG. 18 is selected, the probability of winning at each of the index values IV = 1 to 16 is lower than when the role selection table for three bets is selected. Specifically, when the role selection table for two bets is selected, the probability of winning at each of the index values IV = 1 to 16 is 2/3 or less than when the role selection table for three bets is selected. This makes it possible to increase the probability of a small role win accompanied by a gaming medium and a replay win that grants a replay in a game played when "3" gaming media is bet, compared to a game played when "2" gaming media is bet.

However, when the role selection table for betting two coins is selected, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 17 is approximately 1/2.2. In contrast, when the role selection table for betting three coins is selected as described above, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 17 is approximately 1/3.3. This makes it possible to make the probability that the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 in a game executed when "2" gaming media is bet higher than the probability that the first CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 in a game executed when "3" gaming media is bet.

In addition to the role selection table when 3 coins are bet and the role selection table when 2 coins are bet, the main ROM 73 also stores a CB selection table that is referenced in the role selection process (FIG. 16) in each of the first and second CB states. Only one index value IV is set in the CB selection table, and normal replay winning data is set for that one index value IV. The probability of winning with that index value IV is 3/10, and if the index value IV is won, a normal replay win is established regardless of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R if the left stop button 42 is operated at a specified timing. If the left stop button 42 is not operated at a specified timing, a normal replay win is not established even if normal replay winning data is stored. On the other hand, if the index value IV is won but the left stop button 42 is not operated at a specified timing, or if the index value IV is not won, a first bell win may be established.

Here, the winning probability is the same for index values IV of "1" to "6" other than index values IV=12 and 15. This applies whether the number of bets on gaming media is "3" or "2". In contrast, the winning probability of index values IV=12 and 15 differs between the setting values of "1" to "6". Specifically, the winning probability of an index value IV=12 is lowest when the setting value is "1", the winning probability increases as the setting value increases, and is highest when the setting value is "6". Also, the winning probability of an index value IV=15 is lowest when the setting value is "1", the winning probability increases as the setting value increases, and is highest when the setting value is "6". This makes it possible to set differences in the degree of advantage between the setting values of "1" to "6".

Returning to the explanation of the role selection process (FIG. 16), after the lottery table is selected in step S702, the index value IV is set to 1 (step S703), and then the judgment value DV used when determining whether the role is a hit or a miss is set (step S704). In this judgment value setting process, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the current judgment value DV to set a new judgment value DV. Note that in the initial judgment value setting process, the value of the random number acquired in step S701 is set as the current judgment value DV, and the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV (index value IV=1) is added to this random number value to set the new judgment value DV.

After that, a win/loss determination is made for the combination that corresponds to the index value IV (step S705). In determining whether the combination is a win/loss determination, it is determined whether the determination value DV exceeds "65535". If it exceeds "65535" (step S705: YES), a winning data acquisition process is executed to set the winning data that corresponds to the index value IV at that time in the main RAM 74 (step S706).

If the judgment value DV does not exceed "65535" (step S705: NO), it means that the hand corresponding to the index value IV has not been obtained. In such a case, the index value IV is incremented by 1 (step S707), and then it is determined whether or not there is a hand corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a target for which judgment is to be made (step S708). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the index value IV incremented by 1 exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a target for which judgment is to be made, the process returns to step S704, and judgment of the hand continues. At this time, in step S704, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the judgment value DV used for judging the previous hand (i.e., the current judgment value DV) to obtain a new judgment value DV, and in step S705, judgment of the hand is made based on the judgment value DV.

When the processing of step S706 is executed, or when a negative judgment is made in step S708, it means that the judgment of the winning or losing role has been completed. In this case, a first stop information setting process is executed to set stop information for reel stop control (step S709). After that, an advantageous lottery process at the start of the game is executed in step S710, a first control process for the play area is executed in step S711, and a stop order notification control process is executed in step S712. The processing contents of steps S710 to S712 will be explained in detail later.

Then, a process for transmitting a game start command is executed (step S713). In this transmission process, if any role is won in the current role lottery process (FIG. 16), information corresponding to the winning role, information corresponding to the current game state, and information corresponding to the processing results of steps S710 and S711 are set in the game start command, and the game start command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92. The game start command is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize that a new game has started, and is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize various information determined by the main side MPU 72.

When the production side MPU 92 receives a game start command, it grasps various information about the current game from the game start command. The production side MPU 92 then determines the content of the presentation in a manner that corresponds to the various information that it has grasped. It then reads a data table corresponding to the determined content of the presentation from the production side ROM 93 to the production side RAM 94, and executes light emission control of the upper lamp 61, sound output control of the speaker 62, and display control of the image display device 63 according to the read data table.

Next, the reel control process executed in step S308 of the normal process (FIG. 12) will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 20.

In the reel control process, first, a rotation start process is performed to start the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R (step S801). In the rotation start process, it is confirmed whether a predetermined wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R was started in the previous game, and if not, the process waits until the wait time has elapsed. If the wait time has elapsed, the process resets the wait time for the next game and sets the rotation start information in the motor control storage area provided in the main RAM 74. By performing this process, the stepping motor acceleration process is started in the stepping motor control process of step S206 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), and each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R starts to rotate. After that, the process waits until each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotates at a constant speed at a predetermined rotation speed, and the rotation start process ends. In addition, when the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R reaches a constant speed, the main MPU 72 lights up the lamps (not shown) of each stop button 42-44 to notify the player that it is possible to issue a stop command.

Then, it is determined whether any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated (step S802). If none of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated, the process of step S802 is repeated until any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated. If it is determined that any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated, it is determined whether or not the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that are spinning have been operated, that is, whether or not a stop command has been generated (step S803). If a stop command has not been generated, the process returns to step S802, and the process of step S802 is repeated until any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated. If a stop command has been generated, the stop command command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S804). The stop command command is a command for causing the production side MPU 92 to recognize which of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated to generate the stop command. If a stop command command has been transmitted, the stop control process shown in steps S805 to S811 is performed to stop the reels that are spinning.

In the stop control process, the symbol number of the reaching symbol that has reached the base position (specifically, the lower row) at the time the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated is confirmed (step S805). Specifically, the symbol number of the reaching symbol that has reached the base position is confirmed based on the number of excitation pulses output from the time the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. After that, the number of slips of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that should be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the main RAM 74 (step S806).

In this slot machine 10, five stop patterns are prepared for stopping each reel 32L, 32M, 32R when the stop buttons 42-44 are operated: a stop pattern in which the reaching symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as is, a stop pattern in which the corresponding reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped after sliding for one symbol, a stop pattern in which the reel is stopped after sliding for two symbols, a stop pattern in which the reel is stopped after sliding for three symbols, and a stop pattern in which the reel is stopped after sliding for four symbols. Therefore, in step S806, one of the values "0" to "4" is calculated as the number of slips based on the stop information stored in the main RAM 74.

Then, the calculated slip count is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol to determine the symbol number of the stopped symbol that will actually stop at the base position (step S807). Then, it is determined whether the symbol number of the reached symbol of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that should be stopped this time is equal to the symbol number of the stopped symbol (step S808), and if so, a reel stop process is performed to stop the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R (step S809). Then, it is determined whether all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped (step S810). If all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have not stopped, a second stop information setting process is performed (step S811), and the process returns to step S802.

The stop information here refers to information for making the stop mode of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R correspond to the result of the lottery process for winning combinations (FIG. 16). By using this stop information, it is possible to calculate the number of slips (specifically, "0" to "4") for the reaching symbol that reaches the base position when each stop button 42 to 44 is stopped. As the stop information, slip number data showing the correspondence between each symbol and the number of slips is stored in advance in the main ROM 73 in correspondence with each lottery result and the stopping order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. However, this is not limited to this, and the slip number data corresponding to each lottery result and the stopping order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R may be derived during the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, etc.

The processes for setting the above stop information include a first stop information setting process executed in step S709 of the role selection process (FIG. 16) and a second stop information setting process executed in step S811 of the reel control process (FIG. 20). In the first stop information setting process, the stop information is set according to the result of the role selection process. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information stored in the main RAM 74 in the first stop information setting process or the previous second stop information setting process is changed after the reels have stopped. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed based on the set winning data, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and the stop results of the stopped reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

If it is determined in step S810 that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, a winning determination process is executed in step S812. In the winning determination process, the type of symbols stopped on the main line ML on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is identified. Then, based on the contents of the winning data stored in the main RAM 74, it is determined whether or not the combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the main line ML on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is a combination of symbols corresponding to a winning combination in the combination lottery process, and if it is a combination of symbols corresponding to a winning combination, a winning combination is established and a winning corresponding process is executed.

In the winning response process, if the winning is a small winning, information on the number of gaming media to be awarded is set in the main RAM 74 so that gaming media can be awarded in the media awarding process. On the other hand, if the winning is a replay winning, a flag setting process is executed so that the replay setting process is executed in the next start waiting process (Figure 13).

After executing the winning determination process, a winning result command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S813). The winning result command contains data indicating whether or not a win has been achieved this time, and if a win has been achieved, contains data indicating the type of win.

Next, the response process at the end of play, which is executed in step S310 of the normal process (FIG. 12), will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 21. Note that since the process of step S310 in the normal process (FIG. 12) is executed after the reel control process (step S308), the response process at the end of play is executed after all of the rotations of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped in one game.

First, CB processing is executed to control the transition and progress of the first or second CB state (step S901). The CB processing will be described in detail later. After that, if the state is neither the first CB state nor the second CB state (step S902: NO), the process jumps to the process corresponding to the current game state (step S904). Specifically, if the game state is the normal game state, normal processing is executed (step S905), if the game state is the pseudo bonus state, pseudo bonus processing is executed (step S906), and if the game state is the end preparation state, the second control processing of the game section is executed (step S906). In addition, if either the normal processing of step S904 or the pseudo bonus processing of step S905 is executed, the second control processing of the game section (step S906) is executed. The processing contents of steps S904 to S906 will be described in detail later.

If the current game state is the first CB state or the second CB state, a positive judgment is made in step S902, and the normal processing in step S904 and the pseudo bonus processing in step S905 are not executed. Therefore, if it is the first CB state or the second CB state, the processing for progressing to the normal game state and the processing for progressing to the pseudo bonus state are not executed. On the other hand, even if the current game state is the first CB state or the second CB state, the second control processing of the game section in step S906 is executed. Therefore, even if it is the first CB state or the second CB state, the processing for progressing to the second section is executed.

<About game status and game area>
Next, the game states and game intervals will be described. FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the game states and game intervals existing in the slot machine 10.

The slot machine 10 has four game states: a normal game state ST1, a first CB state ST2, a second CB state ST3, a pseudo bonus state ST4, and a preparation-to-end state ST5. These game states ST1 to ST5 do not overlap with each other.

The normal game state ST1 is a game state in which the player remains by executing a partial clear process (step S104) or a full clear process (step S105) of the main RAM 74. In addition, when the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 that occurs in the normal game state ST1 ends, or when the end preparation state ST5 ends, the game state becomes the normal game state ST1. In the normal game state ST1, it is possible to play one game regardless of whether the number of bets on the gaming medium is "3" or "2".

In the normal game state ST1, whether three coins or two coins are bet, the expected net increase in game media in one game (the value obtained by subtracting the "number of game media bet in one game" from the "expected number of game media to be awarded in one game") is less than 1. In addition, in the normal game state ST1, there are a non-internal state in which neither the first CB winning data nor the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, and an internal state in which either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74.

The first CB state ST2 is a game state to which the player enters when a first CB win occurs while the first CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74. In the first CB state ST2, one game can be played when the number of bets on gaming media is "3", but one game cannot be played when the number of bets on gaming media is "2". The second CB state ST3 is a game state to which the player enters when a second CB win occurs while the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74. In the second CB state ST3, one game can be played when the number of bets on gaming media is "2", but because the bet limit is set to "2", it is not possible to bet "3" gaming media.

The first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are game states that do not increase the number of game media owned by the player. Furthermore, both the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are game states that reduce the number of game media owned by the player at the end of the game state compared to the number of game media owned by the player at the start of the game state. Details of the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 will be explained later.

The pseudo bonus state ST4 is a game state to which the game is transitioned when the transition condition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 is satisfied in the normal game state ST1. The pseudo bonus state ST4 ends when the remaining number of continued games in the pseudo bonus state ST4 becomes "0" or when the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied. If the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends without the ending condition of the second section SC2 being satisfied, which will be described later, and the second section SC2 ends when transitioning to the normal game state ST1, the game transitions to the end preparation state ST5. If the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends without the ending condition of the second section SC2 being satisfied, which will be described later, and the second section SC2 does not end when transitioning to the normal game state ST1, the game transitions to the normal game state ST1 without transitioning to the end preparation state ST5. Also, if the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends when the ending condition of the second section SC2 being satisfied, which will be described later, the game transitions to the normal game state ST1.

In the pseudo bonus state ST4, it is possible to play one game regardless of whether the number of bets on the gaming medium is "3" or "2." In the pseudo bonus state ST4, there exist a non-internal state in which neither the first CB winning data nor the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, and an internal state in which either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74.

In the pseudo bonus state ST4, if an index value IV of 1 to 6 is won, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first bell to be won is announced. Also, in the pseudo bonus state ST4, if an index value IV of 7 to 9 is won, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the second bell to be won is announced. If the first bell or the second bell is won, "15" game media is awarded. This makes it possible to increase the expected number of game media awarded in one game in the pseudo bonus state ST4. In the pseudo bonus state ST4, if three coins are bet, the expected net increase in game media in one game is 1 or more, and in the pseudo bonus state ST4, if two coins are bet, the expected net increase in game media in one game is less than 1.

The end preparation state ST5 is a game state to which the game is transitioned when the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends without the ending condition of the second section SC2 described later being satisfied, and the second section SC2 ends when transitioning to the normal game state ST1 thereafter. The end preparation state ST5 ends when one game is played. When the end preparation state ST5 ends, transition is made to the normal game state ST1. The end preparation state ST5 can be played one game regardless of whether the number of game media bets is "3" or "2". The end preparation state ST5 is a game state in which the net increase expected value of game media in one game is less than 1 regardless of whether three coins are bet or two coins are bet. In addition, the end preparation state ST5 has a non-internal state in which neither the first CB winning data nor the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, and an internal state in which either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74.

In a configuration in which various game states ST1 to ST5 exist as described above, a game zone is set in addition to these game states ST1 to ST5. A first zone SC1 and a second zone SC2 are set as game zones. In other words, in this slot machine 10, the factors that determine the game situation are the number of game media bets of "2" and "3", the setting values of "1" to "6", various game states ST1 to ST5, and the game zones of the first zone SC1 and the second zone SC2.

The first section SC1 is a section in which an advantageous gaming state (pseudo bonus state ST4) is not started and the advantageous gaming state is not continued, in which the expected net increase in gaming media in one game (the value obtained by subtracting the "number of gaming media bet in one game" from the "expected number of gaming media to be awarded in one game") can be 1 or more when the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the player to win different winning combinations depending on the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified. When the partial clearing process (step S104) or the full clearing process (step S105) of the main RAM 74 is executed, the normal gaming state ST1 is entered as the first section SC1. In addition, when the initialization process of the second section SC2 is executed in the second section SC2, the first section SC1 is also entered. The second section SC2 is a section in which the advantageous gaming state can be started and the advantageous gaming state can be continued.

23(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first section SC1 and the second section SC2. As described above, when the partial clear process (step S104) or the full clear process (step S105) of the main RAM 74 is executed, the section becomes the first section SC1, and when the initialization process of the second section SC2 is executed, the section becomes the first section SC1. On the other hand, the second section SC2 is shifted from the first section SC1 when a transition trigger to the second section SC2 occurs based on the lottery process of the hand (FIG. 16) in the first section SC1. In this case, when a game with the number of bets "3" is executed in the first section SC1, a transition trigger to the second section SC2 may occur, while even if a game with the number of bets "2" is executed in the first section SC1, a transition trigger to the second section SC2 does not occur. Therefore, a player who expects a transition to the second section SC2 in the first section SC1 needs to execute a game with the number of bets "3" instead of executing a game with the number of bets "2".

In the first section SC1, the expected net increase in gaming media in one game is always less than 1, whereas in the second section SC2, the expected net increase in gaming media in one game is not only less than 1, but may also be 1 or greater. Therefore, the second section SC2 is a more advantageous situation than the first section SC1. Therefore, players will expect to move to the second section SC2 in the first section SC1.

The first section SC1 ends when a transition trigger to the second section SC2 occurs, and transition occurs to the second section SC2. In contrast, the second section SC2 may end when the pseudo bonus state ST4 or the end preparation state ST5 ends and transitions to the normal gaming state ST1. When the second section SC2 ends, transition occurs to the first section SC1. In addition, an ending condition is set for the second section SC2 such that either the total number of games played reaches the upper limit number of games (specifically, 1500 games) as the second section SC2 continues without transitioning to the first section SC1, or the limited total net increase in the number of game media reaches the upper limit net increase in the number of game media (specifically, 2400) as the second section SC2 continues without transitioning to the first section SC1. The limited total net increase in game media refers to the increase in the predetermined difference from the predetermined reference value, where the minimum value of the predetermined difference is the predetermined reference value, and the difference is calculated by subtracting the total number of game media consumed to play games while the second section SC2 is continuing (0 when no game media is being played) from the total number of game media awarded by games played while the second section SC2 is continuing (0 when no game media is being awarded).

In other words, if the limited total net increase in the number of game media since the start of the second section SC2 reaches the upper limit net increase as a result of the continuation of the second section SC2, the second section SC2 ends and transitions to the first section SC1. Also, if the number of games played since the start of the second section SC2 reaches the upper limit game number as a result of the continuation of the second section SC2, the second section SC2 ends and transitions to the first section SC1. Then, if either of these ending conditions is met, even if the pseudo bonus state ST4 is in the middle of the game in which the ending condition is met, the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends, the second section SC2 ends, and a transition is made to the first section SC1 and the normal game state ST1. This makes it possible to prevent the second section SC2 from continuing excessively.

As shown in FIG. 22, the normal game state ST1, the first CB state ST2, and the second CB state ST3 can occur in either the first section SC1 or the second section SC2. On the other hand, the pseudo bonus state ST4 and the end preparation state ST5 are never occurred in the first section SC1, but only in the second section SC2.

Figure 23 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of each game state ST1 to ST5 in the second section SC2. As already explained, in the normal game state ST1, pseudo bonus state ST4 and end preparation state ST5, it is possible to execute a game in either a situation where the number of bets on game media is "3" or a situation where it is "2", and further, in the first CB state ST2, it is possible to execute a game only when the number of bets on game media is "3", and in the second CB state ST3, it is possible to execute a game only when the number of bets on game media is "2". This is also true when the game section is the second section SC2.

In the normal game state ST1 in the second section SC2, the expected net increase in the game media is less than 1 whether a game with a bet number of "3" is executed or a game with a bet number of "2" is executed. In this case, in the normal game state ST1 in the second section SC2, as described later, a lottery process for transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 can be executed based on the result of the lottery process (FIG. 16) for each game, but the lottery process for transition is executed in a game with a bet number of "3", but is not executed in a game with a bet number of "2". In addition, in the normal game state ST1 in the second section SC2, as described later, the value of the release game number counter 74e provided in the main RAM 74 is decremented by 1 each time one game is executed, and if the value of the release game number counter 74e after the decrement is "0", the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 is confirmed, but the decrement of the release game number counter 74e is executed in a game with a bet number of "3", but is not executed in a game with a bet number of "2". Therefore, in the normal game state ST1 in the second section SC2, it is more advantageous for the player to have a game with a bet number of "3" executed than to have a game with a bet number of "2" executed.

When in the pseudo bonus state ST4 in the second section SC2, if a game with a bet number of "3" is executed, the expected net increase in gaming media can be 1 or more, whereas when a game with a bet number of "2" is executed, the expected net increase in gaming media is less than 1. Therefore, when in the pseudo bonus state ST4 in the second section SC2, it is more advantageous for the player to have a game with a bet number of "3" executed than to have a game with a bet number of "2" executed.

As described above, even if it is advantageous to execute a game with a bet number of "3" in the normal game state ST1 and the pseudo bonus state ST4 in the second section SC2, the number of game media awarded in a game with a bet number of "2" in either the normal game state ST1 or the pseudo bonus state ST4 in the second section SC2 is added as the limited total net increase in game media in the second section SC2, and a game with a bet number of "2" in either the normal game state ST1 or the pseudo bonus state ST4 in the second section SC2 is added as the total number of games executed by continuing the second section SC2. In other words, even though a game with a bet number of "2" in either the normal game state ST1 or the pseudo bonus state ST4 in the second section SC2 is disadvantageous to the player, the game contributes to the establishment of the ending condition of the second section SC2. From this perspective, when in either the normal game state ST1 or the pseudo bonus state ST4 in the second section SC2, it is more advantageous for the player to have a game with a bet of "3" played than to have a game with a bet of "2" played.

In the second section SC2, the first CB winning may occur and the second CB winning may occur, similar to the first section SC1. If the first CB winning occurs in the second section SC2, the first CB state ST2 occurs in the second section SC2, and the second section SC2 is maintained even when the first CB state ST2 occurs and after the first CB state ST2 ends. Also, if the second CB winning occurs in the second section SC2, the second CB state ST3 occurs in the second section SC2, and the second section SC2 is maintained even when the second CB state ST3 occurs and after the second CB state ST3 ends. As already explained, the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are both game states in which the number of game media owned by the player at the end of the game state is less than the number of game media owned by the player at the start of the game state. In other words, the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are game states that are disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, games played in either the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 in the second section SC2 are added to the total number of games played as the second section SC2 continues. In other words, even though the games played in the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are disadvantageous to the player, those games end up contributing to the establishment of the ending condition of the second section SC2. Therefore, if the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 occurs in the second section SC2, it will be even more disadvantageous to the player.

In the end preparation state ST5, the expected net increase in gaming media is less than 1 whether a game with a bet number of "3" is played in the second section SC2 or a game with a bet number of "2" is played, but the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends and the second section SC2 ends, resulting in only one game being played. Therefore, the game played in the end preparation state ST5 does not contribute to the limited total net increase in gaming media in the second section SC2, and does not contribute to the total number of games played in the second section SC2. However, this is not limited to this, and even a game played in the end preparation state ST5 may contribute to the limited total net increase in gaming media in the second section SC2 and also contribute to the total number of games played in the second section SC2.

<CB states ST2 and ST3>
Next, the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 will be described in detail. Figure 24 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first CB role (i.e., the index value IV by which the first CB winning data will be stored in the main RAM 74) and the second CB role (i.e., the index value IV by which the second CB winning data will be stored in the main RAM 74), and Figure 24 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3.

As shown in FIG. 24(a), the first CB role can be a winning combination in a game with a bet number of "3", but cannot be a winning combination in a game with a bet number of "2". In a game with a bet number of "3", the first CB role is won with a probability of approximately 1/3.3. However, when the first CB role is in a winning state (i.e., the first CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74), the second CB role is in a winning state (i.e., the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74), the first CB state ST2, or the second CB state ST3, the first CB role is excluded from the lottery targets in the role lottery process (FIG. 16).

The second CB role can be a winning combination in games with a bet of "2", but cannot be a winning combination in games with a bet of "3". In games with a bet of "2", the probability of winning the second CB role is approximately 1/2.2. However, when the first CB role is in a winning state (i.e., the first CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74), the second CB role is in a winning state (i.e., the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74), the first CB state ST2, or the second CB state ST3, the second CB role is excluded from the lottery targets in the role lottery process (Figure 16).

In the winning state of the 1st CB role, the 1st CB winning can be achieved in a game with a bet number of "3", but the 1st CB winning cannot be achieved in a game with a bet number of "2". Therefore, even if a game with a bet number of "2" is played in the winning state of the 1st CB role and the lottery process for the role (FIG. 16) results in a loss result in which none of the index values IV are won, the 1st CB winning cannot be achieved regardless of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the timing of the stop operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Also, even if a game with a bet number of "2" is played in the winning state of the 1st CB role and the lottery process for the role (FIG. 16) results in an index value IV that may cause a so-called miss, the 1st CB winning cannot be achieved regardless of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the timing of the stop operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44. When a game with a bet number of "3" is played in the winning state of the first CB role and the first CB win is achieved, the first CB state ST2 is entered.

As shown in FIG. 24(b), in the first CB state ST2, it is possible to play a game with a bet number of "3", and it is impossible to play a game with a bet number of 2 or less. In the first CB state ST2, normal replay winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 with a probability of 3/10 in the lottery process for the winning combination in each game (FIG. 16), and when normal replay winning data is stored, if the left stop button 42 is operated at a specified timing, a normal replay win is achieved regardless of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. If the left stop button 42 is not operated at the specified timing, a normal replay win is not achieved even if normal replay winning data is stored.

In the first CB state ST2, if the winning data for the normal replay is not stored in the main RAM 74 in the lottery process for the winning combination (FIG. 16), or if the winning data for the normal replay is stored in the main RAM 74 but the operation timing of the left stop button 42 is not the specified timing and the normal replay cannot be won, the first bell may be won. In this case, the first bell is won regardless of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, but the first bell may not be won depending on the timing of the stop operation of the left stop button 42.

However, this is not limited to the above, and if normal replay winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 in the lottery process for winning combinations (FIG. 16) in the first CB state ST2, a normal replay winning may be achieved without fail regardless of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the timing of the stop operation of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Also, if normal replay winning data is not stored in the main RAM 74 in the lottery process for winning combinations (FIG. 16) in the first CB state ST2, a first bell winning may be achieved without fail regardless of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the timing of the stop operation of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44.

When the first bell wins in the first CB state ST2, "1" gaming medium is awarded. As already explained, in the first CB state ST2, a game can be played only when "3" gaming media are bet. In contrast, the number of gaming media awarded in the game in the first CB state ST2 is "1". The first CB state ST2 ends when "30" gaming media are awarded. Therefore, in the first CB state ST2, it is necessary to generate an event in which "1" gaming medium is awarded in a game played by betting "3" gaming media 30 times. In this case, the number of gaming media owned by the player will decrease by at least 60 from the start to the end of the first CB state ST2. Therefore, the first CB state ST2 is a disadvantageous gaming state for the player.

In addition, in the first CB state ST2, as described above, a normal replay win may occur, but it is also possible that neither a normal replay win nor a first bell win occurs. In this case, if the first CB state ST2 occurs in the second section SC2, the first CB state ST2, which is disadvantageous to the player, will continue for 30 games or more, and the number of games will be added to the total number of games played in the second section SC2.

In the winning state of the second CB role, the second CB winning can be achieved in a game with a bet number of "2", but the second CB winning cannot be achieved in a game with a bet number of "3". Therefore, even if a game with a bet number of "3" is played in the winning state of the second CB role and the lottery process for the role (FIG. 16) results in a loss result in which none of the index values IV are won, the second CB winning cannot be achieved regardless of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the timing of the stop operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Also, even if a game with a bet number of "3" is played in the winning state of the second CB role and the lottery process for the role (FIG. 16) results in an index value IV that may cause a so-called miss, the second CB winning cannot be achieved regardless of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the timing of the stop operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44. When a game with a bet of "2" is played in the winning state of the second CB role and the second CB win is achieved, the second CB state ST3 is entered.

As shown in FIG. 24(b), in the second CB state ST3, it is possible to play a game when the number of bets is "2", and the upper limit number of bets for the gaming medium is "2". In the second CB state ST3, normal replay winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 with a probability of 3/10 in the lottery process for the winning combination in each game (FIG. 16), and when normal replay winning data is stored, if the left stop button 42 is operated at a specified timing, a normal replay win is achieved regardless of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. If the left stop button 42 is not operated at the specified timing, a normal replay win is not achieved even if normal replay winning data is stored.

In the second CB state ST3, if the winning data for the normal replay is not stored in the main RAM 74 in the lottery process for the winning combination (FIG. 16), or if the winning data for the normal replay is stored in the main RAM 74 but the operation timing of the left stop button 42 is not the specified timing and the normal replay cannot be won, the first bell may be won. In this case, the first bell is won regardless of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, but the first bell may not be won depending on the timing of the stop operation of the left stop button 42.

However, this is not limited to the above, and if normal replay winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 in the lottery process for winning combinations (FIG. 16) in the second CB state ST3, a normal replay winning may be achieved without fail regardless of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the timing of the stop operation of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Also, if normal replay winning data is not stored in the main RAM 74 in the lottery process for winning combinations (FIG. 16) in the second CB state ST3, a first bell winning may be achieved without fail regardless of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the timing of the stop operation of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44.

When the first bell win occurs in the second CB state ST3, "1" gaming medium is awarded. As already explained, in the second CB state ST3, a game can be played only when "2" gaming media are bet. In contrast, the number of gaming media awarded in the game in the second CB state ST3 is "1". The second CB state ST3 ends when "30" gaming media are awarded. Therefore, in the second CB state ST3, it is necessary to generate an event in which "1" gaming medium is awarded in a game executed by betting "2" gaming media 30 times, and in this case, the number of gaming media owned by the player will decrease by at least 30 from the start to the end of the second CB state ST3. Therefore, the second CB state ST3 becomes a disadvantageous gaming state for the player. However, the disadvantageous degree of the second CB state ST3 is lower than that of the first CB state ST2.

In addition, in the second CB state ST3, as described above, a normal replay win may occur, but it is also possible that neither a normal replay win nor a first bell win occurs. In this case, if the second CB state ST3 occurs in the second section SC2, the second CB state ST3, which is disadvantageous to the player, will continue for 30 games or more, and the number of games will be added to the total number of games played in the second section SC2.

In the configuration in which the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are set as game states disadvantageous to the player as described above, a game with a bet number of "2" is executed to bring about a winning state of the second CB role and prevent the second CB winning from being established, and then a game with a bet number of "3" is executed, so that as a result of the lottery process (FIG. 16) for the roles in each game, it becomes possible to play without causing a transition to the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, regardless of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the timing of the stop operation of each stop button 42 to 44. In other words, if a winning state of the second CB role is reached by executing a game with a bet number of "2", the second CB winning will not be established even if the winning state of the second CB role is reached by subsequently executing a game with a bet number of "3". Furthermore, even if a game with the number of bets "3" is executed in the winning state of the second CB role, the first CB role is excluded from the lottery subjects in the role selection process (FIG. 16), so the first CB role is not entered into the winning state. Since the first CB role is not entered into the winning state, the first CB win is not established, and the game state does not transition to the first CB state ST2. This makes it possible to execute a game with the number of bets "3" while preventing transitions to the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 from occurring. By executing a game with the number of bets "3", a transition to the second section SC2 may occur as already explained, and a transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 may occur.

Here, it is assumed that the slot machine 10 executes the process of clearing all of the main RAM 74 (step S105) for the purpose of obtaining an illegal profit. For example, it is assumed that a fraudulent act occurs in which a fraudulent tool is used to make the payout detection sensor of the hopper device 53 unable to detect medals in a situation where medals are paid out, thereby dispensing more medals than should be paid out. In response to this, as already explained, the slot machine 10 is provided with an object detection sensor for detecting the intrusion of the fraudulent tool, and when the intrusion of the fraudulent tool is detected by the object detection sensor, an intrusion abnormality notification is executed. Therefore, even if the fraudulent tool is inserted in a way that is not detected by the object detection sensor, the intrusion of the fraudulent tool may be detected by the object detection sensor in the process of repeating the act of fraudulently dispensing many medals using the fraudulent tool, and an intrusion abnormality notification may be executed. In this case, it is assumed that the fraudulent will perform an act of forcibly terminating the intrusion abnormality notification by fraudulently executing the process of clearing all of the main RAM 74 (step S105). It is expected that the illegally obtained medals will then be used to play games on the slot machine 10 in a situation where the intrusion abnormality notification is not executed.

However, when such a fraudulent act is performed, the main RAM 74 is cleared completely (step S105), and the main RAM 74 is put into a state where the second CB winning data is not stored. In other words, the second CB role is not in a winning state. If a game with the number of bets "3" is played in a state where the second CB role is not in a winning state, the first CB role may be in a winning state, and if the first CB win is established, the first CB state ST2, which is a game state that is disadvantageous to the player, is entered. This makes it possible to give a disadvantage to those who have performed the above-mentioned fraudulent act. On the other hand, in the game hall, a game with the number of bets "2" is played before business hours are opened, and the second CB role is in a winning state, so that normal players who do not perform the above-mentioned fraudulent act can play a game with the number of bets "3" while preventing the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 from occurring.

As shown in FIG. 24(a), the probability of winning the second CB role in a game with a bet number of "2" is about 1/2.2, whereas the probability of winning the first CB role in a game with a bet number of "3" is about 1/3.3. In other words, the probability of winning the second CB role is set higher than the probability of winning the first CB role. This makes it possible to reduce the number of games required to win the second CB role when the winning state of the second CB role is reached by playing a game with a bet number of "2" in an amusement hall or the like. On the other hand, even if a game with a bet number of "3" is played before the winning state of the second CB role is reached by mistake, the probability of winning the first CB role is lower than the probability of winning the second CB role, making it difficult to win the first CB role.

Note that the configuration is not limited to one in which the probability of winning the second CB role is higher than the probability of winning the first CB role, and may be one in which the probability of winning the first CB role is higher than the probability of winning the second CB role, or one in which the probability of winning the first CB role and the probability of winning the second CB role are the same or approximately the same.

Figure 25 is a flow chart showing the CB processing executed by the main MPU 72. The CB processing is executed in step S901 of the response processing at the end of a game (Figure 21). As already explained, the response processing at the end of a game (Figure 21) is executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped in one game, so the CB processing is also executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped in one game.

Whether the current game state is either the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 is determined by determining whether "1" is set in either the first CB state flag or the second CB state flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1001). The first CB state flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to identify whether the game state is the first CB state ST2, and the second CB state flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to identify whether the game state is the second CB state ST3.

If the negative judgment is made in step S1001, it is judged whether or not the first CB winning has been achieved in this game (step S1002). In other words, it is judged whether or not the combination of symbols corresponding to the first CB winning has stopped on the main line ML in a situation where the first CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74. If the first CB winning has been achieved (step S1002: YES), the first CB state flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1003), and the first CB winning data in the main RAM 74 is cleared (step S1004). Then, a first CB winning command indicating a transition to the first CB state ST2 is sent to the performance side MPU 92 (step S1005). This changes the game state to the first CB state ST2. In the first CB state ST2, as already explained, the processing of steps S513 to S515 in the bet response processing (FIG. 14) is executed, so that the game is executed only when the gaming medium of "3" is bet.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1002, it is judged whether or not a second CB winning has been achieved in this game (step S1006). In other words, it is judged whether or not a combination of symbols corresponding to a second CB winning has stopped on the main line ML in a situation where the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74. If a second CB winning has been achieved (step S1006: YES), the second CB state flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1007), and the second CB winning data in the main RAM 74 is cleared (step S1008). Then, a second CB winning command indicating a transition to the second CB state ST3 is sent to the performance side MPU 92 (step S1009). As a result, the game state becomes the second CB state ST3. In the second CB state ST3, as already explained, the processes of steps S503, S508, S515, and S516 in the bet processing (FIG. 14) are executed, and the game is executed only when "2" gaming media has been bet.

If a positive judgment is made in step S1001, it is judged whether or not the first bell has been won in this game (step S1010). If the first bell has been won (step S1010: YES), the value of the total award counter provided in the main RAM 74 is incremented by 1 (step S1011). The total award counter is a counter that allows the main MPU 72 to determine the total number of game media awarded in the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, and is cleared to "0" when the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 is started.

When the value of the total award counter after adding 1 becomes "30", which is the reference number for ending the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 (step S1012: YES), the CB state flags corresponding to the current CB states ST2 and ST3 are cleared to "0" (step S1013). Then, a CB end command indicating that the current CB states ST2 and ST3 have ended is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S1014).

Next, the transition of the game state to CB states ST2 and ST3 and the restriction of the transition to CB states ST2 and ST3 will be described with reference to the time chart in FIG. 26. FIG. 26(a) shows the period during which the game is played when "3" game media are bet, FIG. 26(b) shows the period during which the game is played when "2" game media are bet, FIG. 26(c) shows the period during which the first CB role is in a winning state, FIG. 26(d) shows the period during which the second CB role is in a winning state, FIG. 26(e) shows the period during which the first CB winning or the second CB winning can be achieved, FIG. 26(f) shows the period during which either the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 is in effect, FIG. 26(g) shows the period during which the transition to the second section SC2 is possible in the first section SC1, and FIG. 26(h) shows the period during which the game is played in the second section SC2.

First, we will explain the cases where transition to CB states ST2 and ST3 is restricted.

At the timing t1 after the main RAM 74 is cleared (step S105), a game with the number of bets "2" is started as shown in FIG. 26(b). In this case, neither the first CB nor the second CB role has been won, the game section is the first section SC1, and the game is in the normal game state ST1. Then, the game with the number of bets "2" is repeatedly executed, and the second CB role is won at the timing t2 as shown in FIG. 26(d). In this case, the transition to the second CB state ST3 does not occur by preventing the second CB winning. In addition, when the second CB role is in the winning state, a game with the number of bets "2" is executed as shown in FIG. 26(b), and the period in which the second CB winning can be achieved is entered as shown in FIG. 26(e).

After that, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 26(a), a state is reached where a game with a bet number of "3" is repeatedly executed. Even if the second CB role is in a winning state, if a game with a bet number of "3" is executed, the second CB winning will not be achieved, and furthermore, if the second CB role is in a winning state, the first CB role will not be won. Therefore, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 26(e), a period in which a CB winning cannot be achieved is reached. Also, if a game with a bet number of "2" is executed, no opportunity to transition to the second section SC2 occurs, but if a game with a bet number of "3" is executed, an opportunity to transition to the second section SC2 may occur, so at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 26(g), a period in which transition to the second section SC2 is possible is reached.

After that, at timing t4, an opportunity to transition to the second section SC2 occurs, and the second section SC2 is entered as shown in FIG. 26(h), and then a game with a bet of "3" is played, and the game is played in the second section SC2.

After that, at the timing of t5, a game with the bet number of "2" is executed as shown in FIG. 26(b). In this case, since a game with the bet number of "2" is executed in the winning state of the second CB role, a situation occurs in which the second CB winning can be established as shown in FIG. 26(e). Even if a game with the bet number of "2" is executed in the second section SC2, it is treated as a game that has been completed in the second section SC2 as shown in FIG. 26(h). After that, the second CB winning is established at the timing of t6, and the second CB state ST3 is entered as shown in FIG. 26(f). Even if a game in the second CB state ST3 is executed in the second section SC2, it is treated as a game that has been completed in the second section SC2 as shown in FIG. 26(h).

Next, we will explain the case where a game with a bet of "3" is repeated from the timing after the process of clearing all of the main RAM 74 (step S105) is executed.

At the timing t7 after the main RAM 74 is completely cleared (step S105), a game with the number of bets "3" is started as shown in FIG. 26(a). In this case, neither the first CB nor the second CB has been won, the game zone is the first zone SC1, and the game is in the normal game state ST1. When a game with the number of bets "3" is played, an opportunity to transition to the second zone SC2 may occur, so at the timing t7, as shown in FIG. 26(g), a transition period to the second zone SC2 is possible. After that, an opportunity to transition to the second zone SC2 occurs at the timing t8, and the zone becomes the second zone SC2 as shown in FIG. 26(h), and then a game with the number of bets "3" is played, and the game is consumed in the second zone SC2.

After that, a game with a bet number of "3" is repeatedly executed, and at timing t9, the first CB role is won as shown in FIG. 26(c). Also, in a situation where the first CB role is won, a game with a bet number of "3" is executed as shown in FIG. 26(a), and a period in which the first CB winning can be achieved is entered as shown in FIG. 26(e). After that, the first CB winning is achieved at timing t10, and the first CB state ST2 is entered as shown in FIG. 26(f). Even if a game in the first CB state ST2 is executed in the second section SC2, it is treated as a game that has been played in the second section SC2 as shown in FIG. 26(h).

After that, at timing t11, the first CB state ST2 ends as shown in FIG. 26(f). Even after the first CB state ST2 ends, the second section SC2 continues as shown in FIG. 26(h), and if a game with a bet amount of "3" is played as shown in FIG. 26(a), it is treated as a game that has been played in the second section SC2 as shown in FIG. 26(h).

Next, we will explain the case where a game with a bet of "2" is repeated from the timing after the process of clearing all of the main RAM 74 (step S105) is executed.

At the timing of t12 after the main RAM 74 is cleared (step S105), a game with the number of bets "2" is started as shown in FIG. 26(b). In this case, neither the first CB role nor the second CB role is won, the game section is the first section SC1, and the game section is in the normal game state ST1. Then, the game with the number of bets "2" is repeatedly executed, and the second CB role is won at the timing of t13 as shown in FIG. 26(d). In this case, the transition to the second CB state ST3 does not occur by preventing the second CB winning from being established. In addition, by executing a game with the number of bets "2" as shown in FIG. 26(b) in a situation where the second CB role is won, a period in which the second CB winning can be established as shown in FIG. 26(e). Note that when a game with the number of bets "2" is executed, no opportunity to transition to the second section SC2 occurs, and therefore the period in which the second section SC2 can be transitioned to is not entered as shown in FIG. 26(g). After that, the second CB win occurs at time t14, and the second CB state ST3 occurs from time t14 to time t15, as shown in FIG. 26(f).

Next, we will explain the content of the various notifications that are executed in relation to the winning status of the CB role and the number of bets on the gaming medium.

As described above, the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are unfavorable game states for the player, but by first playing a game with a bet number of "2" to enter a winning state for the second CB role, and then playing a game with a bet number of "3", it is possible to aim for the occurrence of the pseudo bonus state ST4 while preventing transitions to the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3. In this case, the slot machine 10 is configured to notify the player that the second CB role is not in a winning state and to notify the player that the third CB role is in a winning state.

Figures 27(a) to 27(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of notifications related to the winning status of the first CB role and the second CB role executed by the image display device 63.

When the game can be played and when the game is being played, a video of a specified character image G11 is displayed on the image display device 63 as shown in Figures 27(a) to 27(c). In this case, when neither the first CB role nor the second CB role has been won, a non-internal notification image G12 is displayed in a partial area of the image display device 63 as shown in Figure 27(a). The non-internal notification image G12 is displayed in a corner of the image display device 63 so as not to overlap with the specified character image G11 in the front-to-back direction. The non-internal notification image G12 remains displayed as long as the situation continues in which neither the first CB role nor the second CB role has been won.

As the non-internal notification image G12, a non-internal explicit image G21 indicating that neither the first CB role nor the second CB role has been won, and a non-internal number of games played image G22 indicating the number of games played in a situation in which neither the first CB role nor the second CB role has been won are displayed. Specifically, a text image saying "Returning" is displayed as the non-internal explicit image G21. This clearly indicates that neither the first CB role nor the second CB role has been won.

Specifically, as the non-internal consumed game number image G22, a text image such as "010 games" is displayed indicating the number of games played in a situation where neither the first CB role nor the second CB role is won. In this case, "000 games" is displayed as the non-internal consumed game number image G22 until the first game in a situation where neither the first CB role nor the second CB role is won is completed after the partial clear process (step S104) or the full clear process (step S105) of the main RAM 74 is executed. Also, "000 games" is displayed as the non-internal consumed game number image G22 until the first game in a situation where neither the first CB role nor the second CB role is won is completed after the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 ends. After that, whether it is a game with a bet number of "3" or a game with a bet number of "2", the number of games displayed as the non-internal consumed game number image G22 is incremented by one each time one game is played.

When neither the first CB nor the second CB role has been won, the second CB role is won in a game with a bet number of "2", and the second CB role is entered into a winning state, and the display of the non-internal notification image G12 ends, as shown in FIG. 27(b). In this case, the display of the specified character image G11 continues, but an image clearly indicating that the second CB role has been won is not displayed on the image display device 63.

When neither the first CB nor the second CB role has been won, the first CB role is won in a game with a bet number of "3", and the first CB role is won, and the display of the non-internal notification image G12 ends as shown in FIG. 27(c). In this case, the first internal indication image G13 indicating that the first CB role has been won is displayed in a partial area of the image display device 63. The first internal indication image G13 is displayed in a corner of the image display device 63 so as not to overlap with the specified character image G11 in the front-to-back direction. The first internal indication image G13 remains displayed as long as the first CB role remains in the winning state. Then, the first CB win is established and the game state transitions to the first CB state ST2, and the display of the first internal indication image G13 ends.

In addition, in the first CB state ST2, a CB state display is performed on the image display device 63. Also, in the second CB state ST3, a CB state display is performed on the image display device 63. The specific content of the CB state display is arbitrary, but for example, the entire display surface of the image display device 63 may be dimmed when a specific character image G11 is displayed on the image display device 63. Also, an image may be displayed indicating the remaining number of game media required to be paid out until the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 ends.

In addition to the above notifications, various bet number notifications are executed as notifications related to the winning state of the first CB role and the second CB role. Specifically, as a bet number notification, in a situation where neither the first CB role nor the second CB role is won, if the second CB role is won in a game with a bet number of "2", a winning corresponding notification for the second CB role is executed by the time the stopping operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective in a situation where neither the first CB role nor the second CB role is won. The execution mode of the winning corresponding notification for the second CB role is arbitrary, but for example, a message such as "Winning the second CB role" is output from the speaker 62. The winning corresponding notification for the second CB role is generated when a game with a bet number of "2" is executed in the winning state of the second CB role even after the game in which the second CB role is won.

When the second CB role is in a winning state, if a game with a bet number of "2" is executed, a 2-bet compatible notification is executed. The execution manner of the 2-bet compatible notification is arbitrary, but for example, a message such as "2 bets" is output from the speaker 62. When a game with a bet number of "2" is repeated without a game with a bet number of "3" in between in the winning state of the second CB role, the 2-bet compatible notification is not generated from the second game onwards with the bet number of "2".

In a situation where neither the first CB nor the second CB role has been won, a 3 bet notification is issued when a game with a bet number of "3" is executed. The manner in which the 3 bet notification is executed is arbitrary, but for example, a message such as "3 bets" is output from the speaker 62. If a game with a bet number of "3" is repeated without a game with a bet number of "2" in between in a situation where neither the first CB nor the second CB role has been won, the 3 bet notification will not be issued in the second or subsequent games with a bet number of "3".

In a situation where neither the first CB role nor the second CB role has been won, if the first CB role is won in a game with a bet number of "3", a winning notification for the first CB role will be executed by the time the stopping operation of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective. The manner in which the winning notification for the first CB role is executed is arbitrary, but for example, a message such as "You have won the first CB role" is output from speaker 62. However, the winning notification for the first CB role will only be generated in a game in which the first CB role is won, and will not be executed in either a game with a bet number of "2" or a game with a bet number of "3" in the winning state of the first CB role thereafter.

When the first CB role is in a winning state, if a game with a bet number of "2" is executed, a 2-bet compatible notification is executed. The execution manner of the 2-bet compatible notification is arbitrary, but for example, a message such as "2 bets" is output from the speaker 62. When a game with a bet number of "2" is repeated without an intervening game with a bet number of "3" in the winning state of the first CB role, the 2-bet compatible notification does not occur in the second game onwards of the game with a bet number of "2".

Next, we will explain how various notifications are executed in relation to the winning status of the CB role and the number of gaming media bets, with reference to the time chart in Figure 28. FIG. 28(a) shows the execution period of a game with a bet number of "2", FIG. 28(b) shows the execution period of a game with a bet number of "3", FIG. 28(c) shows the period during which the notification sound for betting "2" that occurs when a game with a bet number of "2" is executed is output, FIG. 28(d) shows the period during which the notification sound for betting "3" that occurs when a game with a bet number of "3" is executed is output, FIG. 28(e) shows the period during which the non-internal notification image G12 is displayed on the image display device 63, FIG. 28(f) shows the period during which the first internal indication image G13 is displayed on the image display device 63, FIG. 28(g) shows the period during which the first CB role is in a winning state, FIG. 28(h) shows the period during which the second CB role is in a winning state, FIG. 28(i) shows the period during which the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 is executed, and FIG. 28(j) shows the period during which the CB state is displayed on the image display device 63.

When the supply of operating power to the slot machine 10 begins, the presentation execution control begins at timing t1 in the presentation side MPU 92. In this case, the full clear process (step S105) of the main RAM 74 has been executed, so neither the first CB role nor the second CB role has been won. Therefore, at timing t1, the display of the non-internal notification image G12 begins on the image display device 63, as shown in FIG. 28(e).

After that, at the timing of t2, a game with the bet number of "3" is executed as shown in FIG. 28(b). In this case, since a game with the bet number of "3" is executed when neither the first CB role nor the second CB role is won, an alarm sound corresponding to the 3 bets corresponding alarm is output as shown in FIG. 28(d). This allows the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that a game with the bet number of "3" is executed when neither the first CB role nor the second CB role is won. Also, at the timing of t2, the display content of the non-internal game count image G22 of the non-internal alarm image G12 on the image display device 63 is updated from "000 games" to "001 games".

At the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 28(b), a game with a bet number of "3" is executed again in a situation where neither the first CB role nor the second CB role has been won. However, since this game is a game with a bet number of "3" that has been executed from the second time onwards without an intervening game with a bet number of "2", a 3 bet notification is not executed. This makes it possible to prevent a 3 bet notification from being repeatedly executed in response to a game with a bet number of "3" being intentionally repeated in a situation where neither the first CB role nor the second CB role has been won. Also, at the timing of t3, the display content of the non-internal game count image G22 of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 is updated from "001 games" to "002 games".

After that, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 28(b), a game with the bet number of "3" is executed again in a situation where neither the first CB role nor the second CB role is won. In this game, the first CB role is won as shown in FIG. 28(g). Therefore, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 28(d), a notification sound corresponding to the winning corresponding notification of the first CB role is output. This makes it possible for the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that the first CB role has been won. In addition, the winning corresponding notification of the first CB role is started before the timing when the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective in the game in which the first CB role is won. This makes it possible for the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that the first CB role has been won before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed in the game in which the first CB role is won. Also, at timing t4, the display content of the non-internal game count image G22 of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 is updated from "002 games" to "003 games."

Then, at the timing of t5, the game in which the first CB role was won ends without the first CB winning occurring. In this case, at the timing of t5, the display of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 ends as shown in FIG. 28(e), and the display of the first internal indication image G13 on the image display device 63 begins as shown in FIG. 28(f). This makes it possible for the player and the manager of the amusement hall to recognize that the first CB role has been won.

After that, at the timing of t6, as shown in FIG. 28(b), a game is executed with the number of bets being "3" in the winning state of the first CB role. Then, at the timing of t7, when the game ends, as shown in FIG. 28(g) and FIG. 28(i), the first CB win is established, and the game transitions to the first CB state ST2. In this case, at the timing of t7, as shown in FIG. 28(f), the display of the first internally explicit image G13 on the image display device 63 ends, and as shown in FIG. 28(j), the display of the CB state on the image display device 63 begins.

After that, at the timing of t8, a game with the bet number of "3" is executed in the first CB state ST2. In this game, the CB state display continues on the image display device 63 as shown in FIG. 28(j). After that, the game with the bet number of "3" is repeated, and the first CB state ST2 ends at the timing of t9 as shown in FIG. 28(i). In this case, the CB state display on the image display device 63 ends at the timing of t9 as shown in FIG. 28(j). In addition, since neither the first CB role nor the second CB role has been won, the display of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 starts at the timing of t9 as shown in FIG. 28(e). In this case, the display content of the non-internal number of games played image G22 of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 becomes "000 games".

After that, at the timing of t10, as shown in FIG. 28(a), a game with the bet number of "2" is executed in a situation where neither the first CB nor the second CB role is won. At the timing of t10, the display content of the non-internal number of games played image G22 of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 is updated from "000 games" to "001 games."

After that, at the timing of t11, as shown in FIG. 28(a), a game with the bet number of "2" is executed again in a situation where neither the first CB role nor the second CB role is won. In this game, the second CB role is won as shown in FIG. 28(h). Therefore, at the timing of t11, as shown in FIG. 28(c), a notification sound corresponding to the winning corresponding notification of the second CB role is output. This makes it possible for the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that the second CB role has been won. In addition, the winning corresponding notification of the second CB role is started before the timing when the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective in the game in which the second CB role is won. This makes it possible for the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that the second CB role has been won before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed in the game in which the second CB role is won. Also, at timing t11, the display content of the non-internal game count image G22 of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 is updated from "001 games" to "002 games."

Then, at the timing t12, the game in which the second CB role was won ends without the second CB winning occurring. In this case, at the timing t12, the display of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 ends, as shown in FIG. 28(e). This makes it possible for the player and the manager of the amusement hall to recognize that the second CB role has been won.

After that, at the timing of t13, as shown in FIG. 28(a), a game with the number of bets being "2" is executed in the winning state of the second CB role. In this case, as shown in FIG. 28(c), an alarm sound corresponding to the 2 bets notification is output, and an alarm sound corresponding to the winning response notification of the second CB role is output again. This allows the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that a game with the number of bets being "2" has been executed in the winning state of the second CB role, and allows the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that the second CB role has been won. In addition, the winning response notification of the second CB role is started before the timing when the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective. This allows the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that the second CB role has been won before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed.

After that, at the timing of t14, as shown in FIG. 28(a), a game with the bet number of "2" is executed again in the winning state of the second CB role. However, since the game is a game with the bet number of "2" from the second time onwards executed without an intervening game with the bet number of "3", the 2-bet corresponding notification is not executed. This makes it possible to prevent the 2-bet corresponding notification from being repeatedly executed in response to the intentional repetition of the game with the bet number of "2" in the winning state of the second CB role. On the other hand, at the timing of t14, as shown in FIG. 28(c), a notification sound corresponding to the winning corresponding notification of the second CB role is output again. This makes it possible to make the player or the manager of the game hall recognize that the second CB role has been won. In addition, the winning corresponding notification of the second CB role is started before the timing when the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective. This allows the player and the arcade manager to recognize that the second CB role has been won before the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped.

After that, at timing t15 and timing t16, as shown in FIG. 28(b), a game with the number of bets being "3" is executed in the winning state of the second CB role. Since the execution of a game with the number of bets being "3" in the winning state of the second CB role is the originally expected game content, a 3 bet corresponding notification or a winning corresponding notification of the second CB role is not executed for that game.

After that, at the timing of t17, as shown in FIG. 28(a), a game with the number of bets being "2" is executed in the winning state of the second CB role. In this case, as shown in FIG. 28(c), an alarm sound corresponding to the 2 bets notification is output, and an alarm sound corresponding to the winning response notification of the second CB role is output again. This allows the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that a game with the number of bets being "2" has been executed in the winning state of the second CB role, and allows the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that the second CB role has been won. In addition, the winning response notification of the second CB role is started before the timing when the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective. This allows the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that the second CB role has been won before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed.

After that, at the timing of t18, as shown in FIG. 28(a), a game with the bet number of "2" is executed again in the winning state of the second CB role. However, since the game is a game with the bet number of "2" from the second time onwards executed without an intervening game with the bet number of "3", the 2-bet corresponding notification is not executed. This makes it possible to prevent the 2-bet corresponding notification from being repeatedly executed in response to the intentional repetition of the game with the bet number of "2" in the winning state of the second CB role. On the other hand, at the timing of t18, as shown in FIG. 28(c), a notification sound corresponding to the winning corresponding notification of the second CB role is output again. This makes it possible to make the player and the manager of the game hall recognize that the second CB role has been won. In addition, the winning corresponding notification of the second CB role is started before the timing when the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective. This allows the player and the arcade manager to recognize that the second CB role has been won before the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped.

Next, we will explain the processing configuration for carrying out various notifications in relation to the winning status of the CB role and the number of bets on the gaming medium as described above.

Figure 29 is a flowchart showing the internal notification control process executed by the production side MPU 92. The internal notification control process is repeatedly executed by the production side MPU 92 at relatively short intervals (e.g., every 4 milliseconds).

First, it is determined whether a command at the start of supply has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S1101). When the supply of operating power is started, if there is no abnormality in the storage state of the main RAM 74, the main MPU 72 transmits one of the power recovery command, the full initialization command, and the partial initialization command as the command at the start of supply in the main process (FIG. 10). As already explained, the power recovery command is a command transmitted when there is no abnormality in the storage state of the main RAM 74 and the address before the power cut is returned to without executing the partial clear process (step S104) and the full clear process (step S105). The full initialization command is a command transmitted when the full clear process (step S105) is executed as described later. The partial initialization command is a command transmitted when the partial clear process (step S104) is executed as described later.

If the determination in step S1101 is positive, control processing at the start of supply is executed (step S1102). Figure 30 is a flowchart showing the control processing at the start of supply.

When the all clear process (step S105) is being executed in the main process (FIG. 10) of the master MPU 72 and the all initialization command is received (step S1201: YES), the display of the non-internal notification image G12 is started on the image display device 63 (step S1202). When the all clear process (step S105) is executed, as described in detail below, all areas of the master RAM 74 are initialized, resulting in a situation where neither the first CB role nor the second CB role has been won. Therefore, when the all initialization command is received, the display of the non-internal notification image G12 is started on the image display device 63. In this case, the display content of the non-internal number of games played image G22 of the non-internal notification image G12 is "000 games".

When the main processing (FIG. 10) of the master MPU 72 is executing the partial clear process (step S104) and receiving a partial initialization command (step S1203: YES), it is determined whether the second CB role is in a winning state based on the information set in the partial initialization command (step S1204). When the partial clear process (step S104) is executed, as described in detail below, the area in the master RAM 74 where the second CB winning data will be stored is not initialized, but areas other than that area (including the area where the first CB winning data is stored) are initialized.

If the second CB winning data was stored in the main RAM 74 immediately before the supply of operating power was stopped, the state in which the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 is maintained even after the partial clear process (step S104) is executed after the supply of operating power is resumed. On the other hand, if the second CB winning data was not stored in the main RAM 74 immediately before the supply of operating power was stopped, the state in which the second CB winning data is not stored in the main RAM 74 is maintained even after the partial clear process (step S104) is executed after the supply of operating power is resumed. The partial initialization command contains information indicating whether or not the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, as described below. Therefore, in step S1204, it is determined whether or not information indicating that the second CB winning data is stored is included in the partial initialization command.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1204, the display of the non-internal notification image G12 is started on the image display device 63 (step S1205). In this case, the display content of the non-internal number of games played image G22 of the non-internal notification image G12 becomes "000 games." If a positive judgment is made in step S1204, the second CB internal flag provided in the presentation side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S1206). The second CB internal flag is a flag that allows the presentation side MPU 92 to identify that the second CB role is in a winning state.

If a power restoration command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S1207: YES), it is determined whether or not the second CB role is in a winning state based on the information set in the power restoration command (step S1208). As already explained, the power restoration command sets information indicating whether or not either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74. If the second CB role is in a winning state (step S1208: YES), the second CB internal flag in the performance RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S1209).

If the second CB role is not in a winning state (step S1208: NO), it is determined whether the first CB role is in a winning state based on the information set in the power recovery command (step S1210). If the first CB role is not in a winning state (step S1210: NO), the display of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 is started (step S1211). In this case, the display content of the non-internal number of games played image G22 of the non-internal notification image G12 becomes "000 games". If the first CB role is in a winning state (step S1210: YES), the display of the first internal indication image G13 on the image display device 63 is started (step S1212). After that, the first CB internal flag provided in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S1213). The first CB internal flag is a flag for the performance side MPU 92 to identify that the first CB role is in a winning state.

Returning to the explanation of the internal notification control process (FIG. 29), if a winning result command is received from the master MPU 72 (step S1103: YES), it is determined from the information set in the winning result command whether the first CB role was won in the current game and the first CB winning was not achieved (step S1104). The master MPU 72 sends a winning result command to the production MPU 92 in step S813, which is a process executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in one game have stopped in the reel control process (FIG. 20). The winning result command is set with information corresponding to the type of winning data to be stored in the master RAM 74 in the lottery process for the role in the current game (FIG. 16), information on whether or not a winning has been achieved in the current game, and, if a winning has been achieved in the current game, information on the type of winning that was the target of the winning. If a positive judgment is made in step S1104, the first CB internal flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S1105), the display of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 is terminated (step S1106), and the display of the first internal indication image G13 on the image display device 63 is started (step S1107).

In the internal notification control process, if a winning result command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S1103: YES), it is determined from the information set in the winning result command whether the second CB role has been won in this game and the second CB winning has not occurred (step S1108). If a positive determination is made in step S1108, the second CB internal flag in the presentation RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S1109), and the display of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 is terminated (step S1110).

In the internal notification control process, if a winning result command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S1103: YES), the main MPU 72 further determines whether a first CB winning command or a second CB winning command has been received from the main MPU 72, thereby determining whether a first CB winning or a second CB winning has occurred in the current game (step S1111). As already explained, if a first CB winning has occurred, the main MPU 72 sends a first CB winning command in step S1005 of the CB processing (Figure 25), and if a second CB winning has occurred, the main MPU 72 sends a second CB winning command in step S1009 of the CB processing (Figure 25).

If any of the CB wins is established (step S1111: YES), a process for clearing the CB internal flag is executed (step S1112). In the process for clearing the CB internal flag, if the first CB internal flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1", the first CB internal flag is cleared to "0", and if the second CB internal flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1", the second CB internal flag is cleared to "0". After that, a process for ending various displays is executed (step S1113). In the process for ending, if the non-internal notification image G12 is displayed on the image display device 63, the display of the non-internal notification image G12 is ended, and if the first internal indication image G13 is displayed on the image display device 63, the display of the first internal indication image G13 is ended. After that, the CB state display on the image display device 63 is started (step S1114).

In the internal notification control process, if a winning result command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S1103: YES), it further determines whether a CB end command has been received from the main MPU 72, thereby determining whether the CB states ST2 and ST3 that were to be executed have ended (step S1115). As already explained, when the CB states ST2 and ST3 that were to be executed have ended, the main MPU 72 sends a CB end command in step S1014 of the CB process (Figure 25).

When the CB state ST2 or ST3 to be executed is completed (step S1115: YES), the display of the CB state on the image display device 63 is terminated (step S1116). After that, the display of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 is started (step S1117).

In the internal notification control process, if a game start command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S1118: YES) and both the first CB internal flag and the second CB internal flag of the presentation side RAM 94 are not set to "1" (steps S1119 and S1120: NO), a non-internal notification process is executed (step S1121). Also, if a game start command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S1118: YES) and the first CB internal flag of the presentation side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S1119: YES), a first CB internal notification process is executed (step S1122). Also, if a game start command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S1118: YES) and the second CB internal flag of the presentation side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S1120: YES), a second CB internal notification process is executed (step S1123).

Figure 31 is a flowchart showing the non-internal notification process executed in step S1121 of the internal notification control process (Figure 29).

First, the value of the recovery counter provided in the presentation side RAM 94 is incremented by 1 (step S1301). The recovery counter is a counter for the presentation side MPU 92 to identify the number of games that have been played since the display of the non-internal notification image G12 began on the image display device 63, and a number corresponding to the value set in the recovery counter is displayed as the non-internal number of games played image G22 in the non-internal notification image G12. Note that when the display of the non-internal notification image G12 begins on the image display device 63, the value of the recovery counter is cleared to "0". After that, the display content of the non-internal notification image G12 is updated so that a number corresponding to the value set in the recovery counter after incrementing by 1 is displayed in the non-internal number of games played image G22 in the non-internal notification image G12 (step S1302).

Then, it is determined whether the number of bets for the current game is "3" (step S1303). As already explained, in the start-time setting process (FIG. 15) executed when a game is started, the master MPU 72 sends a first bet number command if the number of bets for that game is "3" (step S603), and sends a second bet number command if the number of bets for that game is "2" (step S604). In step S1303, it is determined whether the first bet number command has been received from the master MPU 72.

If a positive judgment is made in step S1303, the "3" bet notification flag in the production side RAM 94 is not set to "1" (step S1304: NO), and then the "3" bet notification process is executed (step S1305), and the "3" bet notification flag is set to "1" (step S1306). In the "3" bet notification process, a 3 bet notification is executed to notify that a game with a bet number of "3" has been executed in a situation where neither the first CB role nor the second CB role has been won. As a result, a message such as "3 coins" is output from the speaker 62. The "3" bet notification flag is a flag for the production side MPU 92 to specify whether or not a 3 bet notification has already been executed when a game with a bet number of "3" is repeated. By not executing the "3" bet notification process when the "3" bet notification flag is set to "1", it is possible to prevent the 3 bet notification from being repeated when a game with the bet number of "3" is repeated in a situation where neither the first CB role nor the second CB role is won.

If a positive judgment is made in step S1304, or if the processing of step S1306 is executed, it is judged from the information set in the currently received game start command whether or not the first CB role has been won in the current game (step S1307). If the first CB role has been won (step S1307: YES), a notification process for when the first CB role has been won is executed (step S1308). In the notification process for when the first CB role has been won, a notification corresponding to the winning of the first CB role is executed. As a result, a message such as "You have won the first CB role" is output from speaker 62.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1303, that is, if the number of bets for the current game is "2" and a second bet number command has been received from the master MPU 72, the "3" bet notification flag in the presentation RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S1309). The "3" bet notification flag is also cleared to "0" if neither the first CB nor the second CB role has been won.

Then, it is determined whether or not the second CB role has been won in the current game from the information set in the currently received game start command (step S1310). If the second CB role has been won (step S1310: YES), a notification process for when the second CB role has been won is executed (step S1311). In the notification process for when the second CB role has been won, a notification corresponding to the winning of the second CB role is executed. As a result, a message such as "You have won the second CB role" is output from the speaker 62.

Figure 32 is a flowchart showing the first CB internal notification process executed in step S1122 of the internal notification control process (Figure 29).

First, it is determined whether the number of bets for the current game is "2" (step S1401). As already explained, in the start-time setting process (FIG. 15) executed when a game is started, the master MPU 72 sends a first bet number command if the number of bets for the game is "3" (step S603), and sends a second bet number command if the number of bets for the game is "2" (step S604). In step S1401, it is determined whether the second bet number command has been received from the master MPU 72.

If a positive judgment is made in step S1401, the "2" bet notification flag in the production side RAM 94 is not set to "1" (step S1402: NO), and then the "2" bet notification process is executed (step S1403), and the "2" bet notification flag is set to "1" (step S1404). In the "2" bet notification process, a 2-bet notification is executed to notify that a game with a bet number of "2" has been executed in the winning state of the first CB role. As a result, a message such as "2 coins" is output from the speaker 62. The "2" bet notification flag is a flag for the production side MPU 92 to specify whether or not a 2-bet notification has already been executed when a game with a bet number of "2" is repeated. By not executing the "2" bet notification process when the "2" bet notification flag is set to "1", it is possible to prevent the 2 bet notification from being repeated when a game with the number of bets of "2" is repeated in the winning state of the first CB role.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1401, the "2" bet notified flag in the production side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S1405). The "2" bet notified flag is also cleared to "0" when the first CB role is won, and is also cleared to "0" when the second CB role is won.

Figure 33 is a flowchart showing the second CB internal notification process executed in step S1123 of the internal notification control process (Figure 29).

First, it is determined whether the number of bets for the current game is "2" (step S1501). As already explained, in the start-time setting process (FIG. 15) executed when a game is started, the master MPU 72 sends a first bet number command if the number of bets for the game is "3" (step S603), and sends a second bet number command if the number of bets for the game is "2" (step S604). In step S1501, it is determined whether the second bet number command has been received from the master MPU 72.

If a positive judgment is made in step S1501, the "2" bet notification flag in the production side RAM 94 is not set to "1" (step S1502: NO), and then the "2" bet notification process is executed (step S1503), and the "2" bet notification flag is set to "1" (step S1504). In the "2" bet notification process, a 2-bet notification is executed to notify that a game with a bet number of "2" has been executed in the winning state of the second CB role. As a result, a message such as "2 coins" is output from the speaker 62. The "2" bet notification flag is a flag for the production side MPU 92 to specify whether or not a 2-bet notification has already been executed when a game with a bet number of "2" is repeated. By not executing the "2" bet notification process when the "2" bet notification flag is set to "1", it is possible to prevent the 2 bet notification from being repeated when a game with the number of bets of "2" is repeated in a winning state of the second CB role.

If a positive judgment is made in step S1502, or if the processing of step S1504 is executed, a notification process for when the second CB is won is executed (step S1505). In the notification process for when the second CB is won, a notification corresponding to the winning of the second CB role is executed. As a result, a message such as "You have won the second CB role" is output from the speaker 62. By executing the notification process for when the second CB is won as described above, a notification corresponding to the winning of the second CB role is executed every time a game with the number of bets of "2" is executed in the winning state of the second CB role.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1501, the "2" bet notified flag in the production side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S1506). The "2" bet notified flag is also cleared to "0" when the first CB role is won, and is also cleared to "0" when the second CB role is won.

Next, we will explain the contents of the areas of the main RAM 74 that are to be initialized in the partial clear process (step S104) and the full clear process (step S105) in the main MPU 72.

Figure 34 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the memory areas of the main RAM 74. As shown in Figure 34, an address is set for each memory area of the main RAM 74. The addresses are set as consecutive number information. Specifically, the address "00FF" is set as the starting address, the address "01FF" is set as the next sequential address, the address "02FF" is set as the next sequential address, and so on so that the addresses are consecutive thereafter.

The second CB winning data area, which is an area for storing second CB winning data, is set as the memory area corresponding to the starting address "00FF". When the index value IV to which the second CB winning data is set in the role selection process (FIG. 16) is won, the second CB winning data is set in the second CB winning data area, and when a second CB win is achieved, the second CB winning data is cleared from the second CB winning data area.

The first CB winning data area, which is an area for storing the first CB winning data, is set as a memory area corresponding to the next sequential address "01FF" relative to the starting address "00FF". When the index value IV to which the first CB winning data is set in the role selection process (FIG. 16) is won, the first CB winning data is set in the first CB winning data area, and when a first CB win is achieved, the first CB winning data is cleared from the first CB winning data area.

A setting value storage area, which is an area for storing the setting value to be set, is set as the storage area corresponding to "02FF", which is the next setting value after "01FF". The setting value selected in the setting value update process (step S106) of the main process (Figure 10) is stored in the setting value storage area.

Figure 35 (a) is a flowchart showing the clear all process executed in step S105 of the main process (Figure 10).

First, the target address is set to "00FF", which is the starting address of the main RAM 74 (step S1601). Then, a clear execution process is executed to clear the memory area in the main RAM 74 corresponding to the current target address to "0" (step S1602).

After that, an address update process is executed to set the target address to the next sequential address in the addresses of the main RAM 74 (step S1603). As a result, if the previous target address was the start address "00FF", the target address becomes "01FF", and if the previous target address was "01FF", the target address becomes "02FF".

Then, it is determined whether the target address after being updated by the address update process corresponds to the end address (step S1604). The end address is the address that corresponds next in order to the final address set in the main RAM 74. If a negative determination is made in step S1604, the process returns to step S1602. By repeating the processes of steps S1602 to S1604 in this manner, all memory areas in the main RAM 74 are cleared to "0".

If a positive judgment is made in step S1604, the process proceeds to step S1605. In step S1605, initial settings are performed on the memory area that was the target of the clear execution process in step S1602 in this all clear process. After that, a full initialization command indicating that the all clear process has been executed on the main RAM 74 is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S1606).

Figure 35 (b) is a flowchart showing the partial clear process executed in step S104 of the main process (Figure 10).

First, the next sequential address "01FF" is set as the target address relative to the starting address of the main RAM 74 (step S1701). As a result, the second CB winning data area, which is the memory area corresponding to the starting address "00FF" of the main RAM 74, is excluded from the targets for the "0" clear and is also excluded from the targets for the initial setting process (step S1705). After that, a clear execution process is executed to clear the memory area corresponding to the current target address in the main RAM 74 to "0" (step S1702).

After that, an address update process is executed to set the target address to the next sequential address in the addresses of the master RAM 74 (step S1703). As a result, if the previous target address was "01FF", which is the next sequential address after the start address of the master RAM 74, the target address becomes "02FF", and if the previous target address was "02FF", the target address becomes "03FF".

Then, it is determined whether the target address after being updated by the address update process corresponds to the end address (step S1704). The end address is the address that corresponds next in order to the final address set in the main RAM 74. If a negative determination is made in step S1704, the process returns to step S1702. By repeating the processes of steps S1702 to S1704 in this manner, all of the memory areas of the main RAM 74 other than the second CB winning data area, which is the memory area corresponding to the start address of the main RAM 74, are cleared to "0".

If a positive judgment is made in step S1704, the process proceeds to step S1705. In step S1705, initial settings are performed on the memory area that was the target of the clear execution process in step S1702 in this partial clear process. After that, a partial initialization command indicating that the partial clear process has been executed on the main RAM 74 is sent to the performance side MPU 92 (step S1706). In this case, it is determined whether or not second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, and if second CB winning data is stored, a partial initialization command is sent with the corresponding information set.

Next, the manner in which the partial clear process (step S104) and the full clear process (step S105) are executed by the main MPU 72 will be explained with reference to the time chart in Figure 36. FIG. 36(a) shows a period during which operating power is supplied to the main MPU 72, FIG. 36(b) shows a period during which the main process (FIG. 10) is being executed by the main MPU 72, FIG. 36(c) shows the execution timing of the setting update start operation in which the power switch 55 is turned on when the setting key is turned on in the setting key insertion hole 57 and the reset button 56 is not pressed, FIG. 36(d) shows the execution timing of the RAM clear operation in which the power switch 55 is turned on when the setting key is turned on in the setting key insertion hole 57 and the reset button 56 is pressed, FIG. 36(e) shows a period during which the partial clear process (step S104) is being executed by the main MPU 72, FIG. 36(f) shows a period during which the full clear process (step S105) is being executed by the main MPU 72, FIG. 36(g) shows a period during which the first CB role is in a winning state, and FIG. 36(h) shows a period during which the second CB role is in a winning state.

First, we will explain the case where the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started while the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, and the main MPU 72 executes a partial clear process (Figure 35 (b)).

At the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 36(c), the setting key is turned on in the setting key insertion hole 57, and the power switch 55 is turned on without pressing the reset button 56. As a result, the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started at the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 36(a), and the main processing (FIG. 10) is started in the main MPU 72, as shown in FIG. 36(b). Then, from the timing of t2 to the timing of t3, the main MPU 72 executes a partial clear process (FIG. 35(b)) as shown in FIG. 36(e). In this case, the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started with the second CB winning data stored in the main RAM 74, as shown in FIG. 36(h), but the state in which the second CB winning data is stored is maintained even after the timing of t3. Note that the setting value update process (step S106) is executed after the timing of t3.

By executing a partial clear process (FIG. 35(b)) when a setting update start operation is performed as described above, even if the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is stopped while the second CB role is in a winning state and the setting value update process (step S106) is executed when the supply of operating power is subsequently resumed, it is possible to maintain the winning state of the second CB role even after the setting value update process (step S106) is executed. This makes it possible to prevent an incident from occurring in which the manager of the game hall must repeatedly execute a game with the number of bets at "2" before the game hall opens to bring the second CB role into a winning state every time the setting value is changed.

Next, we will explain the case where the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started while the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, and the main MPU 72 executes the all clear process (Figure 35 (a)).

At the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 36(d), the setting key is turned on in the setting key insertion hole 57, and the reset button 56 is pressed, and the power switch 55 is turned on to perform a RAM clear operation. As shown in FIG. 36(a), the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 36(a), and the main processing (FIG. 10) is started in the main MPU 72 as shown in FIG. 36(b). Then, from the timing of t5 to the timing of t6, the main MPU 72 executes the all clear processing (FIG. 35(a)) as shown in FIG. 36(f). In this case, as shown in FIG. 36(h), the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started with the second CB winning data stored in the main RAM 74, but the second CB winning data is erased at the timing of t6. Note that the setting value update processing (step S106) is executed after the timing of t6.

When the RAM clear operation is performed as described above, the all clear process (Fig. 35(a)) is executed and the second CB winning data is erased, so that if the all clear process (Fig. 35(a)) is executed fraudulently, it becomes possible to create a situation in which the first and second CB roles are not won. If a game with the bet number of "3" is executed in a situation in which the second CB role is not won, the first CB win will be established and the game may transition to the first CB state ST2, which is disadvantageous to the player. This makes it possible to limit the profits that can be obtained by fraudulently executing the all clear process (Fig. 35(a)).

Next, we will explain the case where the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started while the first CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, and the main MPU 72 executes a partial clear process (Figure 35 (b)).

At the timing of t7, as shown in FIG. 36(c), the setting key is turned on in the setting key insertion hole 57, and the power switch 55 is turned on without pressing the reset button 56. As a result, the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started at the timing of t7, as shown in FIG. 36(a), and the main processing (FIG. 10) is started in the main MPU 72, as shown in FIG. 36(b). Then, from the timing of t8 to the timing of t9, the main MPU 72 executes a partial clear process (FIG. 35(b)) as shown in FIG. 36(e). In this case, the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started with the first CB winning data stored in the main RAM 74, as shown in FIG. 36(g), but the first CB winning data is erased at the timing of t9. Note that the setting value update process (step S106) is executed after the timing of t9.

As described above, even if a partial clear process (Figure 35 (b)) is executed when a setting update start operation is performed, the first CB winning data is erased, so that the state in which the first CB winning data is stored, which is not normal in normal play, can be eliminated when changing the setting value.

<About the second section SC2>
Next, the second section SC2 will be described. First, the first control process of the game section executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 37. The first control process of the game section is executed in step S711, which is a process executed after the winning/losing judgment of the winning combination is completed in the winning combination lottery process (Fig. 16).

First, it is determined whether the second section flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1801). The second section flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to identify whether the gaming section is the second section SC2 or not; when the second section flag is set to "1", it is the second section SC2, and when the value of the second section flag is "0", it is the first section SC1. When the second section flag is set to "1" (step S1801: YES), the processing from step S1802 onwards is not executed. As a result, when it is the second section SC2, the direct hit lottery processing in step S1806 and the lottery processing for the number of games to be released in step S1810 are not executed.

If the second section flag is not set to "1" (step S1801: NO), it is determined whether the current game state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 (step S1802). If the current game state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 (step S1802: YES), the processing from step S1803 onwards is not executed. As a result, even if it is the first section SC1, if it is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the processing to set it to the second section SC2 in step S1805, the direct hit lottery processing in step S1806, and the lottery processing for the number of games to be released in step S1810 are not executed.

If the current game state is neither the first CB state ST2 nor the second CB state ST3 (step S1802: NO), the number of bets for the current game is determined to be "3" by determining whether the value of the bet number setting counter 74a in the main RAM 74 is "3" (step S1803). If the number of bets for the current game is "2" (step S1803: NO), the processing from step S1804 onwards is not executed. As a result, in a game in which the number of bets is "2" even if it is the first section SC1, the processing for setting the number of bets to the second section SC2 in step S1805, the direct hit lottery processing in step S1806, and the lottery processing for the number of games to be released in step S1810 are not executed.

If the number of bets for the current game is "3" (step S1803: YES), it is determined whether any index value IV has been won in the current role selection process (FIG. 16) (step S1804). If the current role selection process (FIG. 16) is a miss (step S1804: NO), the processes from step S1805 onwards are not executed. As a result, even if the first section is SC1, if the role selection process (FIG. 16) is a miss, the process for setting it to the second section SC2 in step S1805, the direct hit selection process in step S1806 and the selection process for the number of games to be released in step S1810 are not executed.

If any of the index values IV are selected in the current role selection process (FIG. 16) (step S1804: YES), the second section flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1", and the number of continued games counter 74c (see FIG. 9) and the total number of wins counter 74d (see FIG. 9) provided in the main RAM 74 are both cleared to "0" (step S1805). Setting the second section flag to "1" results in the second section SC2.

The continued game number counter 74c is a counter that allows the main MPU 72 to determine the number of games that have been played since the start of the second section SC2 when the second section SC2 is continued without the first section SC1 in between. When the value of the continued game number counter 74c reaches a value corresponding to the upper limit number of games (specifically, 1500 games) in the second section SC2, the second section SC2 ends at the game that has been reached, even if it is in the middle of the pseudo bonus state ST4, and a transition is made to the first section SC1, which is the normal game state ST1.

The total acquisition counter 74d is a counter for the master MPU 72 to determine the limited total net increase in game media from the start of the second section SC2 when the second section SC2 is continued without the first section SC1 in between. As already explained, the limited total net increase in game media is the increase in the predetermined difference from the predetermined reference value, where the minimum value of the predetermined difference is the predetermined reference value, and the difference is the amount obtained by subtracting the total number of game media consumed to execute games when the second section SC2 is continuing (0 when no game media is being executed) from the total number of game media awarded by games executed when the second section SC2 is continuing (0 when no game media is being awarded). If the value of the total winnings counter 74d reaches a value corresponding to the upper limit of the net increase in number of coins (specifically, 2,400 coins) in the second section SC2, even if the pseudo bonus state ST4 is in progress, the second section SC2 ends in the game in which the value is reached, and the game transitions to the first section SC1, which is the normal game state ST1.

Then, a direct hit lottery process is executed (step S1806). In the direct hit lottery process, a direct hit lottery table provided in the main ROM 73 and a lottery counter periodically updated in the main RAM 74 are used to determine whether or not a direct hit wins into the pseudo bonus state ST4. In the lottery process for the role in this game (FIG. 16), if the index value IV=11 is won, there is a 2% probability of a direct hit win into the pseudo bonus state ST4, if the index value IV=12 is won, there is a 1% probability of a direct hit win into the pseudo bonus state ST4, if the index value IV=13 is won, there is a 10% probability of a direct hit win into the pseudo bonus state ST4, if the index value IV=14 is won, there is a 5% probability of a direct hit win into the pseudo bonus state ST4, and if the index value IV=15 is won, there is a 2% probability of a direct hit win into the pseudo bonus state ST4. In this case, the lower the probability of winning in the role selection process (FIG. 16) for an index value IV, the higher the probability of a direct win in the pseudo bonus state ST4. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of winning an index value IV with a low winning probability in the role selection process (FIG. 16).

If the direct hit lottery process results in a direct hit win to pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S1807: YES), the first transition confirmation flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1808). The first transition confirmation flag is a flag that the main MPU 72 uses to identify that a win to transition to pseudo bonus state ST4 has occurred in the direct hit lottery process (step S1806) executed when transitioning to the second section SC2. If the first transition confirmation flag is set to "1", processing is executed to transition the game state to pseudo bonus state ST4 when the current game ends.

After that, the section display unit 67 is turned on (step S1809). In the section display unit 67 turning on process, the section display unit 67 is switched from an off state to an on state. This causes the section display unit 67 to start notifying that it is the second section SC2.

If the direct hit lottery process does not result in a direct hit win to the pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S1807: NO), a lottery process for the number of release games is executed (step S1810). The number of release games is a counter for the master MPU 72 to specify the number of games required until the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 occurs when the transition lottery process (step S2112) described later does not result in a win to transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4. In the lottery process for the number of release games, first, a lottery table for the number of release games stored in advance in the master ROM 73 is read out, and numerical information is obtained from a lottery counter that is periodically updated in the master RAM 74. Then, the number of release games is selected by comparing the numerical information obtained from the lottery counter with the lottery table for the number of release games. In this case, any one of 50 games, 100 games, 200 games, 300 games, 400 games, 500 games, 600 games, 700 games, and 800 games is selected as the number of release games. In addition, the probability of selecting each of these numbers of release games is the same. However, this is not limited to this, and the probability of selecting a larger number of release games may be set high, or the probability of selecting a smaller number of release games may be set high. After executing the lottery process for the number of release games, the number of release games selected in the lottery process for the number of release games is set in the release game number counter 74e (see FIG. 9) provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1811). The release game number counter 74e is a counter for identifying the remaining number of release games in the main MPU 72.

Then, a lighting lottery process for the section display unit 67 is executed (step S1812). In the lighting lottery process for the section display unit 67, a lighting lottery table provided in the main ROM 73 and a lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74 are used to determine by lottery whether the section display unit 67 should be turned on from the beginning when the second section SC2 is set this time (i.e., immediately turned on), or whether the section display unit 67 should be turned on when the pseudo bonus state ST4 is subsequently entered (i.e., waiting to be turned on). In the lottery process for the role in this game (FIG. 16), if the index value IV=1 to 10 is selected, there is a 50% probability that immediate lighting will be selected and a 50% probability that standby lighting will be selected; if the index value IV=11 is selected, there is a 65% probability that immediate lighting will be selected and a 35% probability that standby lighting will be selected; if the index value IV=12 is selected, there is a 62% probability that immediate lighting will be selected and a 38% probability that standby lighting will be selected; if the index value IV=13 is selected, there is an 80% probability that immediate lighting will be selected and a 20% probability that standby lighting will be selected; % probability of waiting for light to be selected, if an index value IV=14 is selected, there is a 75% probability of selecting instant light and a 25% probability of waiting for light to be selected, if an index value IV=15 is selected, there is a 70% probability of selecting instant light and a 30% probability of waiting for light to be selected, if an index value IV=16 is selected, there is a 40% probability of selecting instant light and a 60% probability of waiting for light to be selected, and if an index value IV=17 is selected, there is a 30% probability of selecting instant light and a 70% probability of waiting for light to be selected. In this case, the lower the probability of winning in the role selection process (FIG. 16) for an index value IV, the higher the probability of selecting instant light.

If immediate lighting is selected in the lighting lottery process (step S1812) for the section display unit 67 (step S1813: YES), lighting process for the section display unit 67 is executed (step S1814). In the lighting process for the section display unit 67, the section display unit 67 is switched from an off state to an on state. This causes the section display unit 67 to start announcing that it is in the second section SC2.

On the other hand, if standby is selected in the lighting lottery process (step S1812) for the section display unit 67 (step S1813: NO), the standby flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1815). The standby flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to identify that the section display unit 67 is waiting to be switched from an off state to a on state in the second section SC2.

Next, the second control process of the play area executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 38. The second control process of the play area is executed in step S906 of the response process at the end of play (FIG. 21). As described above, the response process at the end of play is executed after all of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped spinning in one game, and therefore the second control process of the play area is also executed after all of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped spinning in one game.

If the second section flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" and the current game section is the second section SC2 (step S1901: YES), the state of the flag in the main RAM 74 is checked to determine whether the current game state is the end preparation state ST5 (step S1902). The end preparation state ST5 is the game state entered when the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends without the ending condition of the second section SC2 described below being met, and the game state entered when the second section SC2 ends when entering the normal game state ST1 thereafter.

If the game is in the end preparation state ST5 (step S1902: YES), it is determined whether the end preparation complete flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1903). The end preparation complete flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to determine whether one game has been played in the end preparation state ST5. In the pseudo bonus process (step S905) in the response process at the end of play (FIG. 21), if it is determined that the number of remaining games to be continued in the pseudo bonus state ST4 is 0 and that the second section SC2 will end upon the subsequent transition to the normal game state ST1, a flag is set to put the game in the end preparation state ST5 and the end preparation complete flag is cleared to "0."

If the end preparation complete flag is not set to "1" (step S1903: NO), the end preparation complete flag is set to "1" (step S1904), and the processing from step S1905 onwards is executed. If the end preparation complete flag is set to "1" (step S1903: YES), this means that one game has been played in the end preparation state ST5. In this case, processing is executed to end the second section SC2.

Specifically, the initialization process for the second section SC2 is first executed (step S1914). In the initialization process for the second section SC2, the second section flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". As a result, the game section becomes the first section SC1. In the initialization process for the second section SC2, even if the player is in the pseudo bonus state ST4, the game state is shifted to the normal game state ST1 by clearing various data indicating that the game is in the pseudo bonus state ST4, including a counter for storing the remaining number of continued games in the pseudo bonus state ST4. In the initialization process for the second section SC2, the release game number counter 74e in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". Therefore, even if the current game state is the normal game state ST1, the first CB state ST2, or the second CB state ST3, the remaining number of release games at that time (i.e., the ceiling game number) is invalidated, and the remaining number of release games is reset when the game is subsequently shifted to the second section SC2. Even if the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are in the middle of the process, the initialization process for the second section SC2 is executed, and the second section SC2 is terminated, but the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 continue as they are without being terminated.

After that, if the section display unit 67 is in a lit state, the section display unit 67 is switched from a lit state to an off state (step S1915). This ends the notification on the section display unit 67 that it is the second section SC2. Then, a second section initialization command indicating that the second section SC2 has been initialized is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S1916). This causes the production side MPU 92 to execute a performance corresponding to the end of the second section SC2.

If the game is not in the end preparation state ST5 (step S1902: NO), or if the processing of step S1904 has been executed, the value of the continued game number counter 74c in the master RAM 74 is incremented by 1 (step S1905). As already explained, the continued game number counter 74c is a counter that allows the master MPU 72 to determine the number of games that have been played since the start of the second section SC2 when the second section SC2 is continued without the first section SC1 in between.

Then, it is determined whether the value of the continued game number counter 74c after adding 1 is equal to or greater than 1500, which is the upper limit number of games (step S1906). If the value of the continued game number counter 74c is equal to or greater than 1500, this means that the ending condition for the second section SC2 has been met. In this case, a positive determination is made in step S1906, and processing is executed in steps S1914 to S1916 to end the second section SC2. The processing contents of steps S1914 to S1916 have already been explained. As a result, the second section SC2 ends and the first section SC1 begins, and if the pseudo bonus state ST4 is in the middle of the state, the pseudo bonus state ST4 is forcibly ended and the state transitions to the normal game state ST1 begins.

If the value of the continued game number counter 74c is less than 1500 (step S1906: NO), it is determined whether any of the first chance replay win, second chance replay win, and normal replay win has been achieved in the current game (step S1907). In this case, whether the number of bets in the current game is "2" or "3", it is subject to the determination in step S1907, and also whether the current game is in any of the game states of normal game state ST1, first CB state ST2, second CB state ST3, and pseudo bonus state ST4.

If no replay win has been achieved (step S1907: NO), the number of bets for the current game (i.e., the value of the bet number setting counter 74a) is subtracted from the total win number counter 74d in the main RAM 74 (step S1908). In this case, even if a replay win was achieved in the previous game and the current game is a game that corresponds to a replay due to the achievement of the replay win, the number of bets for the current game (i.e., the value of the bet number setting counter 74a) is subtracted from the total win number counter 74d.

As already explained, the total acquisition counter 74d is a counter for the master MPU 72 to determine the limited total net increase in game media from the start of the second section SC2 when the second section SC2 is continued without the first section SC1 in between. As already explained, the limited total net increase in game media is the increase in the predetermined difference from the predetermined reference value, where the minimum value of the predetermined difference is the predetermined reference value, and the value obtained by subtracting the total number of game media consumed to execute games while the second section SC2 is continuing (0 when no game media is being executed) from the total number of game media awarded by games executed while the second section SC2 is continuing (0 when no game media is being awarded).

Then, it is determined whether any of the minor winnings that will result in the awarding of gaming media in the current game (1st to 9th compensation winnings, 1st bell winning, 2nd bell winning, special bell winning, 1st watermelon winning, 2nd watermelon winning, and cherry winning) has been achieved (step S1909). In this case, whether the number of bets in the current game is "2" or "3", it is subject to the determination in step S1909, and also whether the current game is in any of the normal gaming state ST1, 1st CB state ST2, 2nd CB state ST3, and pseudo bonus state ST4. If a positive determination is made in step S1909, the number of gaming media awarded in the current game is added to the total winning number counter 74d of the main RAM 74 (step S1910).

If a negative judgment is made in step S1909, or if the processing of step S1910 is executed, it is judged whether the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d in the main RAM 74 is equal to or greater than 0 (step S1911). If the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d is less than 0 (step S1911: NO), the total acquisition number counter 74d is cleared to "0" (step S1912).

As described above, in step S1908, the bet number for the current game is subtracted from the total winnings counter 74d. For example, if no small wins are achieved in the game in the normal game state ST1 immediately after the transition to the second section SC2, the value of the total winnings counter 74d will be less than 0. In this case, by making a negative judgment in step S1911, the total winnings counter 74d is cleared to "0" in step S1912. As a result, when the value obtained by subtracting the "total number of game media consumed to execute games in the situation in which the second section SC2 is continuing ("0" when games are not being executed)" from the "total number of game media awarded by games executed in the situation in which the second section SC2 is continuing ("0" when no game media is awarded)" is set as the predetermined difference number, the minimum value of the predetermined difference number is set as the predetermined reference value, and the limited total net increase in game media, which is the increase in the above-mentioned predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value, can be measured using the total winnings counter 74d.

If a positive judgment is made in step S1907, if a positive judgment is made in step S1911, or if the processing of step S1912 is executed, it is judged whether the value of the total winning number counter 74d exceeds the upper limit net increase number of "2400" (step S1913). If the value of the total winning number counter 74d exceeds "2400", it means that the ending condition of the second section SC2 is established. In this case, a positive judgment is made in step S1913, and the processing to end the second section SC2 in steps S1914 to S1916 is executed. The processing contents of steps S1914 to S1916 have already been explained. As a result, the second section SC2 ends and the first section SC1 is entered, and if the pseudo bonus state ST4 is in the middle of the pseudo bonus state ST4, the pseudo bonus state ST4 is forcibly ended and the normal game state ST1 is entered.

If any replay win is established, a positive determination is made in step S1907, and the processing of steps S1908 to S1912 is not executed. In a game in which a replay win is established, the gaming media owned by the player at the start of the game are used to set the bet, but as a benefit from the establishment of a replay win, the player can replay a new game with the same number of bets as the number of bets in the game in which the replay win was established. In other words, the number of gaming media owned by the player does not change in a game in which a replay win is established. In this case, by not executing the processing of steps S1908 to S1912 in a game in which a replay win is established, it is possible to omit the execution of the processing for changing the value of the total winnings counter 74d in a game in which the number of gaming media owned by the player does not change, and it is possible to avoid the execution of unnecessary processing.

On the other hand, even in a game in which a replay win has been achieved, in step S1913, it is determined whether the value of the total winnings counter 74d exceeds the upper limit net increase of "2400". As a result, even if the value of the total winnings counter 74d has already exceeded the upper limit net increase of "2400" in a game prior to the game in which a replay win has been achieved, but the initialization process for the second section SC2 has not been performed due to noise or other reasons, it is possible to determine that the value of the total winnings counter 74d exceeds the upper limit net increase of "2400" in the game in which a replay win has been achieved thereafter, and it is possible to perform the initialization process for the second section SC2.

If a negative determination is made in step S1913, the ending handling process is executed (step S1917). Figure 39 is a flowchart showing the ending handling process.

First, it is determined whether the ending flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2001). The ending flag is a flag that the main MPU 72 uses to determine whether the number of games played in the second section SC2, measured using the continued game counter 74c, is likely to reach the upper limit of the number of games, or whether the limited total net increase in the number of game media, measured using the total acquisition counter 74d, is likely to reach the upper limit of the net increase.

If the ending flag is not set to "1" (step S2001: NO), it is determined whether the sum of the value of the continued game counter 74c and the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter provided in the main RAM 74 is equal to or greater than the first reference number of games (step S2002). The pseudo bonus continuation counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to determine the remaining number of continued games in the pseudo bonus state ST4. The first reference number of games is set to 1400 games, which is a number of games that is less than the upper limit number of games in the second section SC2. In addition, it is determined whether the result of multiplying the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter by the expected value of the game media in the pseudo bonus state ST4 and adding the value of the total acquisition counter 74d is equal to or greater than the first reference number of acquisitions (step S2003). The expected value of the game media to be acquired in one game in the pseudo bonus state ST4 is about 5 pieces. The first reference number of acquisitions is set to 2100 pieces, which is a number less than the upper limit net increase number in the second section SC2.

If a positive judgment is made in step S2002 or step S2003, the ending flag is set to "1" (step S2004). When the ending flag is set to "1", the pseudo bonus state ST4 is put into a state in which no additional addition to the remaining number of continued games occurs, as will be described in detail later, and when the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends and a transition to the normal game state ST1 occurs, the second section SC2 ends and the first section SC1 occurs without fail. This makes it possible to make it difficult for the ending condition of the second section SC2 to be met, and also makes it possible to prevent the remaining number of continued games in the pseudo bonus state ST4 from being further added to in a situation in which it has already been determined that the ending condition is met in relation to the remaining number of continued games in the pseudo bonus state ST4.

After that, on condition that the current game state is the pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S2005: YES), an ending command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S2006). By receiving the ending command, the production side MPU 92 changes the execution mode of the performance on the upper lamp 61, speaker 62 and image display device 63 to an execution mode corresponding to the ending period. Note that the situation in which the ending flag is set to "1" basically occurs in the pseudo bonus state ST4, but can also occur in the normal game state ST1, the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3. In this case, although the ending flag is set to "1", the game content is not changed and the execution mode of the performance is not changed either.

<Regarding normal gaming state ST1>
Next, the processing contents in the normal game state ST1 will be described. Fig. 40 is a flow chart showing the advantageous lottery processing at the start of the game executed by the main MPU 72. The advantageous lottery processing at the start of the game is executed in step S710, which is a process executed after the winning/losing judgment of the winning combination is completed in the winning combination lottery processing (Fig. 16) and before the first control processing (step S711) of the game section.

First, it is determined whether the second section flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2101). As already explained, the second section flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to determine whether the gaming section is the second section SC2 or not; when the second section flag is set to "1", it is the second section SC2, and when the value of the second section flag is "0", it is the first section SC1. If the second section flag is not set to "1" (step S2101: NO), the processing from step S2102 onwards is not executed. As a result, if it is the first section SC1, the processing from step S2106 onwards to transition the gaming state to the pseudo bonus state ST4 is not executed.

If the second section flag is set to "1" (step S2101: YES), and if the current game state is the pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S2102: YES), the pseudo bonus processing at the start of the game is executed (step S2103). The pseudo bonus processing at the start of the game will be explained later. Note that even if the pseudo bonus state flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1", if the game state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, a negative judgment is made in step S2102 without a positive judgment.

If the second section flag is set to "1" (step S2101: YES) and the game state is not the pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S2102: NO), it is determined whether the current game state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 (step S2104). If the current game state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 (step S2104: YES), the processing from step S2105 onwards is not executed. As a result, even if it is in the second section SC2, if it is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the processing from step S2106 onwards to transition the game state to the pseudo bonus state ST4 is not executed.

If the current game state is neither the first CB state ST2 nor the second CB state ST3 (step S2104: NO), the value of the bet number setting counter 74a in the main RAM 74 is determined to be "3" to determine whether the number of bets for the current game is "3" (step S2105). If the number of bets for the current game is "2" (step S2105: NO), the processing from step S2106 onwards is not executed. As a result, in a game where the number of bets is "2" even if it is in the second section SC2, the processing from step S2106 onwards to transition the game state to the pseudo bonus state ST4 is not executed.

If the number of bets in the current game is "3" (step S2105: YES), it is determined whether the value of the continued game counter 74c is equal to or greater than the second reference number of games (step S2106), and whether the value of the total winnings counter 74d is equal to or greater than the second reference number of winnings (step S2107). As already explained, the continued game counter 74c is a counter for the master MPU 72 to specify the number of games played from the start of the second section SC2 when the second section SC2 is continued without the first section SC1 in between. When the value of the continued game counter 74c in the second section SC2 reaches a value corresponding to the upper limit number of games (specifically, 1500 games), the second section SC2 ends at the game that has been reached, even if it is in the middle of the pseudo bonus state ST4, and the state becomes the first section SC1 and the normal game state ST1. As already explained, the total acquisition counter 74d is a counter for specifying the limited total net increase in the number of game media from the start of the second section SC2 when the second section SC2 is continued without the first section SC1 in between, in the master MPU 72. As already explained, the limited total net increase in the number of game media is the increase in the predetermined difference from the predetermined reference value, where the minimum value of the predetermined difference is the predetermined reference value, and the difference is the amount obtained by subtracting the total number of game media consumed to execute the game when the second section SC2 is continuing (when the game is not being executed, the total number of game media awarded by the game executed when the second section SC2 is continuing (when the award of game media is not occurring, the total number is "0") from the predetermined difference. If the value of the total winnings counter 74d reaches a value corresponding to the upper limit of the net increase in number of coins (specifically, 2,400 coins) in the second section SC2, even if the pseudo bonus state ST4 is in the middle of the game, the second section SC2 ends in the game in which the value is reached, and the game enters the first section SC1 and the normal game state ST1.

The second reference number of games is set to a number less than 1500 games, which is the upper limit number of games in the second section SC2, and a number greater than the first reference number of games, which is 1400 games, specifically 1450 games. The second reference number of winnings is set to a number less than 2400 coins, which is the upper limit net increase number in the second section SC2, and a number greater than the first reference number of winnings, which is 2100 coins, specifically 2150 coins.

If the value of the continued game number counter 74c is equal to or greater than the second reference number of games (step S2106: YES), or if the value of the total winnings counter 74d is equal to or greater than the second reference number of winnings (step S2107: YES), the third transition confirmation flag provided in the master RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2108). The third transition confirmation flag is a flag for the master MPU 72 to determine whether or not a transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 has been confirmed due to the upper limit number of games in the second section SC2 being equal to or greater than the second reference number of games or the limited total net increase in the number of game media in the second section SC2 being equal to or greater than the second reference number of winnings.

When the third transition confirmation flag is set to "1", a process is executed to transition the game state to the pseudo bonus state ST4 when the current game ends. In other words, when the normal game state ST1 reaches a pre-end period in which the ending condition of the second section SC2 is close to being met, the pseudo bonus state ST4 is forcibly entered. This makes it possible to award the benefit of the occurrence of the pseudo bonus state ST4 for reaching the pre-end period in the normal game state ST1. The pseudo bonus state ST4, which is initiated when the third transition confirmation flag is set to "1", has 50 games set as the number of continued games at the start of the state. The number of continued games set at the start of the state is the difference between 1500 games, which is the upper limit number of games for the second section SC2, and 1450 games, which is the second reference number of games. In addition, since the expected value of the game media to be acquired in one game in the pseudo bonus state ST4 is about 5 pieces as already explained, the product of the number of continued games set at the start and the expected value of acquisition is the same or approximately the same as the difference between the upper limit net increase of the second section SC2, 2400 pieces, and the second reference number of acquisition, 2150 pieces. In addition, since the second reference number of games is set to a number of games greater than the first reference number of games and the second reference number of acquisition is set to a number greater than the first reference number of acquisition, the ending flag of the main RAM 74 is already set to "1" at the start of the pseudo bonus state ST4 triggered by the setting of the third transition confirmation flag to "1". When the ending flag is set to "1", as already explained, the pseudo bonus state ST4 is in a state in which the remaining number of continued games is not added, and when the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends and the normal game state ST1 is entered, the second section SC2 ends and the first section SC1 is entered without fail. Therefore, the pseudo bonus state ST4, which is initiated when the third transition confirmation flag is set to "1", basically has the ending condition of the second section SC2 met when the number of continuing games set at the time of the start is exhausted, and when the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends, the state transitions to the first section SC1, which is the normal game state ST1.

After executing the process of step S2108, various clearing processes are executed (step S2109). In the various clearing processes, the values of the second transition confirmation flag and the transition waiting counter provided in the main RAM 74 are each cleared to "0". The second transition confirmation flag is a flag that is set to "1" when a transition is won in the transition lottery process (step S2112) described later, and the transition waiting counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify that the number of transition waiting games (specifically, 5 games) has been consumed since the second transition confirmation flag was set to "1". Not only is the second transition confirmation flag set to "1" when a transition is won in the transition lottery process (step S2112), but a value corresponding to the number of transition waiting games is set to the transition waiting counter, and the value of the transition waiting counter is decremented by 1 each time one game is consumed in a situation where the second transition confirmation flag is set to "1". Then, when the second transition confirmation flag is set to "1", the value of the transition waiting counter becomes "0", and the game state transitions to the pseudo bonus state ST4. Therefore, a transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 occurs when the number of transition waiting games is consumed after a transition win is determined in the transition lottery process (step S2112). In this case, if the third transition confirmation flag is set to "1" as described above, the second transition confirmation flag is cleared to "0" even if the second transition confirmation flag is set to "1" at that time. This makes it possible to prioritize the occurrence of the pseudo bonus state ST4 triggered by the third transition confirmation flag being set to "1" over the occurrence of the pseudo bonus state ST4 triggered by the second transition confirmation flag being set to "1".

If the value of the continued game counter 74c is less than the second reference number of games and the value of the total winnings counter 74d is less than the second reference number of winnings (steps S2106 and S2107: NO), the second transition confirmation flag in the master RAM 74 is not set to "1" (step S2110: NO), and it is determined whether or not the index value IV = 11 to 15 has been won in the lottery process for the current role (FIG. 16) (step S2111). If a positive determination is made in step S2111, a transition lottery process is executed (step S2112). In the transition lottery process, a transition lottery table provided in the master ROM 73 and a lottery counter that is periodically updated in the master RAM 74 are used to determine by lottery whether or not to transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4. In the lottery process for the role in this game (FIG. 16), if the index value IV=11 is selected, there is a 20% probability of transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4, if the index value IV=12 is selected, there is a 10% probability of transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4, if the index value IV=13 is selected, there is a 40% probability of transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4, if the index value IV=14 is selected, there is a 30% probability of transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4, and if the index value IV=15 is selected, there is a 20% probability of transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4. In this case, the lower the probability of winning in the lottery process for the role (FIG. 16), the higher the probability of transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of winning an index value IV with a low probability of winning in the lottery process for the role (FIG. 16).

If the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 is selected in the transition lottery process (step S2113: YES), the second transition confirmation flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2114), and the transition waiting counter provided in the main RAM 74 is set to a value corresponding to the number of transition waiting games (specifically, 5 games) (step S2115). The second transition confirmation flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to determine whether or not the transition has been selected in the transition lottery process (step S2112), and the transition waiting counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to determine whether the number of transition waiting games (specifically, 5 games) has been played since the second transition confirmation flag was set to "1". By selecting the transition in the transition lottery process (step S2112), not only is the second transition confirmation flag set to "1", but a value corresponding to the number of transition waiting games is set to the transition waiting counter, and the value of the transition waiting counter is decremented by 1 each time one game is played in a situation where the second transition confirmation flag is set to "1". Then, when the second transition confirmation flag is set to "1", the value of the transition waiting counter becomes "0", and the game state transitions to the pseudo bonus state ST4. Therefore, a transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 occurs when the transition waiting number of games is consumed after a transition is won in the transition lottery process (step S2112).

Next, the normal processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 41. The normal processing is executed in step S904 of the response processing at the end of play (FIG. 21). As described above, the response processing at the end of play is executed after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped spinning in one game, so the normal processing is also executed after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped spinning in one game.

If the second section flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" and the current play section is the second section SC2 (step S2201: YES), it is determined whether the first transition confirmation flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2202). If a transition to the second section SC2 has occurred at the start of the current game and a direct hit has been won in the direct hit lottery process (step S1806) executed to determine the transition, the first transition confirmation flag is set to "1".

If the first transition confirmation flag is set to "1" (step S2202: YES), the first start setting process is executed (step S2203). In the first start setting process, the pseudo bonus state flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1", and the pseudo bonus continuation counter provided in the main RAM 74 is set to a value corresponding to 40 games, which is the initial number of continued games in the pseudo bonus state ST4. The pseudo bonus state flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to determine whether the game state is in the pseudo bonus state ST4, and the pseudo bonus continuation counter is a counter that allows the main MPU 72 to determine the remaining number of continued games in the pseudo bonus state ST4.

Then, a first start command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S2204). The first start command is a command indicating that the pseudo bonus state ST4 has started anew in a situation where the ending flag in the main RAM 74 is not set to "1". The first start command also includes information indicating that the initial number of continuing games in the pseudo bonus state ST4 is 40 games. As already explained, in a situation where the ending flag is set to "1", no addition of the remaining number of continuing games occurs in the pseudo bonus state ST4. Therefore, when the pseudo bonus state ST4 starts in a situation where the ending flag is not set to "1", it is possible that the remaining number of continuing games may be added in the pseudo bonus state ST4.

When the first start command is received, the presentation side MPU 92 causes the presentation corresponding to the pseudo bonus state ST4 to be executed on the upper lamp 61, speaker 62 and image display device 63. In this case, the image display device 63 displays a video corresponding to the pseudo bonus state ST4, as well as a display indicating the number of remaining games to be played in the pseudo bonus state ST4 and a display indicating the number of gaming media acquired in the pseudo bonus state ST4. Figure 42 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the image display device 63 when the first start command is received.

As shown in FIG. 42(a), the image display device 63 displays a first effect image G31 in which a video corresponding to the pseudo bonus state ST4 in a situation where the ending flag is not set to "1", a game number image G32 indicating the number of remaining continued games in the pseudo bonus state ST4, and an acquisition number image G33 indicating the number of game media acquired by the player in the pseudo bonus state ST4. In the first effect image G31, a video display is performed in which a predetermined character image is displayed in front of a predetermined background image and the display mode of the predetermined background image and the predetermined character image changes. In the game number image G32, when the pseudo bonus state ST4 is started, the initial number of continued games is displayed, and then, each time one game is consumed and the remaining number of continued games in the pseudo bonus state ST4 is decremented by one, the number displayed in the game number image G32 is decremented by one. In addition, when an addition to the remaining number of continued games occurs in the pseudo bonus state ST4, the number corresponding to the number of games to be added is added to the number displayed in the game number image G32. When pseudo bonus state ST4 is started, the acquired number image G33 displays "0 acquired", and if the game is subsequently played in pseudo bonus state ST4 and the number of gaming media owned by the player increases, the increased number of gaming media is added to the number displayed in the acquired number image G33.

Returning to the explanation of the normal processing (FIG. 41), if the first transition confirmation flag is not set to "1" (step S2202: NO), it is determined whether or not the third transition confirmation flag in the master RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2205). As already explained, the third transition confirmation flag is a flag that the master MPU 72 uses to determine whether or not a transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 has been confirmed due to the number of continued games in the second section SC2 being equal to or greater than the second reference number of games or the limited total net increase in the number of game media in the second section SC2 being equal to or greater than the second reference number of acquisitions.

If the third transition confirmation flag is set to "1" (step S2205: YES), the second start setting process is executed (step S2206). In the second start setting process, the pseudo bonus state flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1", and the pseudo bonus continuation counter in the main RAM 74 is set to a value corresponding to 50 games as the initial number of continued games in the pseudo bonus state ST4. As already explained, when the first start setting process (steps S2203 and S2213) is executed, 40 games are set as the initial number of continued games in the pseudo bonus state ST4, whereas when the second start setting process (step S2206) is executed, 50 games are set as the initial number of continued games in the pseudo bonus state ST4. This makes it possible to set the initial number of continued games in the pseudo bonus state ST4, which is executed in response to the setting of the third transition confirmation flag to "1", to a number greater than the initial number of continued games in the pseudo bonus state ST4, which is executed in response to the occurrence of another start trigger. However, this is not limited to the above, and the initial number of continuing games in the pseudo bonus state ST4 set by the first start setting process may be the same as the initial number of continuing games in the pseudo bonus state ST4 set by the second start setting process, or the initial number of continuing games in the pseudo bonus state ST4 set by the first start setting process may be greater than the initial number of continuing games in the pseudo bonus state ST4 set by the second start setting process.

Then, a second start command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S2207). The second start command is a command indicating that a new pseudo bonus state ST4 has started in a situation where the ending flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1". The second start command also includes information indicating that the current initial number of continued games in the pseudo bonus state ST4 is 50 games. As already explained, in a situation where the ending flag is set to "1", no addition to the remaining number of continued games occurs in the pseudo bonus state ST4. Therefore, when the pseudo bonus state ST4 starts in a situation where the ending flag is set to "1", no addition to the remaining number of continued games occurs in the pseudo bonus state ST4.

When the second start command is received, the presentation side MPU 92 causes the presentation corresponding to the pseudo bonus state ST4 to be executed on the upper lamp 61, speaker 62 and image display device 63. In this case, the image display device 63 displays a video corresponding to the pseudo bonus state ST4, and displays the number of game media acquired in the pseudo bonus state ST4. However, unlike when the first start command is received, no display is made indicating the remaining number of continued games in the pseudo bonus state ST4. In a situation where the ending flag is set to "1", the pseudo bonus state ST4 may end with the end of the second section SC2 by the number of continued games in the second section SC2 reaching the number of added games or the limited total net increase in the number of game media in the second section SC2 reaching the upper limit net increase before the remaining number of continued games in the pseudo bonus state ST4 becomes "0". In this case, by not displaying the remaining number of games to be played in pseudo bonus state ST4 as described above, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable about the fact that pseudo bonus state ST4 has ended due to the ending condition of the second section SC2 being met.

Figure 42 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the image display device 63 when the second start command is received. As shown in Figure 42 (b), the image display device 63 displays the second performance image G41, which displays a video corresponding to the pseudo bonus state ST4 in a situation where the ending flag is set to "1", and the acquisition number image G33, which indicates the number of game media acquired by the player in the pseudo bonus state ST4. In the second performance image G41, a video is displayed in which a specific character image is displayed in front of a specific background image, and the display mode of the specific background image and the specific character image changes. In the acquisition number image G33, when the pseudo bonus state ST4 is started, "0 acquired" is displayed, and if the game is subsequently executed in the pseudo bonus state ST4 and the number of game media owned by the player increases, the number of game media by that increase is added to the number displayed in the acquisition number image G33.

Returning to the explanation of the normal processing (FIG. 41), if the third transition confirmation flag is not set to "1" (step S2205: NO), it is determined whether the current game state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 (step S2208). If the current game state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 (step S2208: YES), the processing from step S2209 onwards is not executed. In the processing from step S2209 onwards, the number of games required to transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 is subtracted as one game is played, and if the transition condition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 is established as the game is played, the processing for transitioning to the pseudo bonus state ST4 is executed. In this case, by not executing the processing from step S2209 onwards when the state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, it is possible to prevent the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 from being brought closer even if a game is played in the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3.

If the current game state is neither the first CB state ST2 nor the second CB state ST3 (step S2208: NO), the process determines whether the number of bets for the current game is "3" by determining whether the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main RAM 74 is "3" (step S2209). If the number of bets for the current game is "2" (step S2209: NO), the process from step S2210 onwards is not executed. As already explained, in the process from step S2210 onwards, the process of subtracting the number of games required to transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 with the completion of one game is executed, and if the transition condition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 is established with the completion of the game, the process of transitioning to the pseudo bonus state ST4 is executed. In this case, if a game with the number of bets "2" is executed, the process from step S2210 onwards is not executed, so that even if a game with the number of bets "2" is completed, it is possible to prevent this from being a factor in approaching the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4.

If the number of bets on the current game is "3" (step S2209: YES), it is determined whether the second transition confirmation flag in the master RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2210). As already explained, the second transition confirmation flag is a flag that allows the master MPU 72 to determine whether or not a transition has been won in the transition lottery process (step S2112).

If the second transition confirmation flag is set to "1" (step S2210: YES), the value of the transition waiting counter in the master RAM 74 is decremented by 1 (step S2211). As already explained, the transition waiting counter is a counter for the master MPU 72 to determine how many transition waiting games (specifically, 5 games) have been played since the second transition confirmation flag was set to "1". If the value of the transition waiting counter after decrementing by 1 is "0" (step S2212: YES), the first start setting process is executed (step S2213). The processing content of the first start setting process is the same as step S2203 of the normal process (FIG. 41). As a result, the pseudo bonus state flag in the master RAM 74 is set to "1", and the pseudo bonus continuation counter in the master RAM 74 is set to a value corresponding to 40 games, which is the initial number of continuation games in the pseudo bonus state ST4.

Then, it is determined whether the ending flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2214). If the ending flag is not set to "1" (step S2214: NO), a first start command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S2215), and if the ending flag is set to "1" (step S2214: YES), a second start command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S2216). The first start command sent in step S2215 and the second start command sent in step S2216 contain information indicating that the current initial number of continued games in the pseudo bonus state ST4 is 40 games.

When the first start command is received, the production side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 to execute a presentation corresponding to the pseudo bonus state ST4, in the same manner as when the production side MPU 92 receives the first start command transmitted in step S2204. In this case, the first presentation image G31, game count image G32, and acquisition number image G33 are displayed on the image display device 63 as shown in FIG. 42(a). On the other hand, when the second start command is received, the production side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 to execute a presentation corresponding to the pseudo bonus state ST4, in the same manner as when the production side MPU 92 receives the second start command transmitted in step S2207. In this case, the image display device 63 displays the second presentation image G41 and acquisition number image G33 so that the display shown in FIG. 42(b) is performed.

If the second transition confirmation flag is not set to "1" (step S2210: NO), the value of the release game number counter 74e in the main RAM 74 is decremented by 1 (step S2217). The release game number counter 74e is a counter for the main MPU 72 to determine the remaining release game number, which is the number of games required to transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 when none of the first to third transition confirmation flags in the main RAM 74 are set to "1". If the game zone transitions from the first zone SC1 to the second zone SC2 and there is no direct hit win in the direct hit lottery process (step S1806), the release game number is set in the release game number counter 74e, and also if the second zone SC2 is maintained after the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends, the release game number counter 74e is set.

If the value of the release game number counter 74e after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S2218: YES), the first start setting process is executed (step S2213). The processing content of the first start setting process is the same as step S2203 of the normal process (FIG. 41). As a result, the pseudo bonus state flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1", and the pseudo bonus continuation counter in the main RAM 74 is set to a value corresponding to 40 games, which is the initial continuation game number of the pseudo bonus state ST4.

Then, it is determined whether the ending flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2214). If the ending flag is not set to "1" (step S2214: NO), a first start command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S2215), and if the ending flag is set to "1" (step S2214: YES), a second start command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S2216). When the first start command is received, the production side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 to execute the performance corresponding to the pseudo bonus state ST4, in the same manner as when the production side MPU 92 receives the first start command transmitted in step S2204. In this case, the first performance image G31, the number of games image G32, and the number of acquisitions image G33 are displayed on the image display device 63 so that the display shown in FIG. 42 (a) is performed. On the other hand, when the second start command is received, the production side MPU 92 causes the production corresponding to the pseudo bonus state ST4 to be executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63, in the same manner as when the production side MPU 92 receives the second start command sent in step S2207. In this case, the second production image G41 and the acquisition number image G33 are displayed on the image display device 63 so as to produce the display shown in FIG. 42(b).

When the process of step S2207, step S2215, or step S2216 is executed, it is determined whether the standby flag for lighting in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2219). As already explained, the standby flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to identify that the section display unit 67 is waiting to be switched from the off state to the on state in the second section SC2. When the standby flag for lighting is set to "1" (step S2219: YES), lighting processing of the section display unit 67 is executed (step S2220). In the lighting processing of the section display unit 67, the section display unit 67 is switched from the off state to the on state. This causes the section display unit 67 to start announcing that it is the second section SC2. When the process of step S2220 is executed, the standby flag for lighting is cleared to "0".

When a transition to pseudo bonus state ST4 occurs while the lighting standby flag is set to "1" as described above, the section display unit 67 is switched from an unlit state to a lit state. The pseudo bonus state ST4 is a gaming state in which the expected net increase in gaming media in one game (the value obtained by subtracting the "number of gaming media bet in one game" from the "expected number of gaming media to be awarded in one game") can be 1 or more. In other words, the section display unit 67 can be maintained in an unlit state even when the second section SC2 is entered, but is reliably switched to a lit state when the gaming state transitions to a gaming state in which the expected net increase in gaming media can be 1 or more. This makes it possible to notify the manager of the gaming hall that a gaming state in which the expected net increase in gaming media can be 1 or more is in question.

Next, we will explain how the transition to pseudo bonus state ST4 occurs, with reference to the time chart in Figure 43. FIG. 43(a) shows a period in which the game section is the second section SC2, FIG. 43(b) shows a period in which one game is being played, FIG. 43(c) shows a transition waiting period in which either the second transition confirmation flag is set to "1" and the transition waiting counter value is 1 or more, or none of the first to third transition confirmation flags are set to "1" and the release game number counter 74e value is 5 or less, FIG. 43(d) shows a period in the pseudo bonus state ST4, FIG. 43(e) shows a period in which the ending flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1", FIG. 43(f) shows a period in which the remaining number of continued games can be added in the pseudo bonus state ST4, and FIG. 43(g) shows a pre-termination period in which either the number of continued games in the second section SC2 is equal to or greater than the second reference number of games or the limited total net increase in the number of game media in the second section SC2 is equal to or greater than the second reference number of acquisitions.

In a situation where the game zone is the first zone SC1, a new game is started at the timing of t1 as shown in FIG. 43(b). In this case, by winning any of the roles in the role selection process (FIG. 16), the game zone changes from the first zone SC1 to the second zone SC2 as shown in FIG. 43(a). In addition, a direct hit is won in the direct hit selection process (step S1806) executed at the time of the transition to the second zone SC2 this time. Therefore, at the timing of t2, which is the timing at which the current game ends, the game state transitions from the normal game state ST1 to the pseudo bonus state ST4 as shown in FIG. 43(d). In addition, since the pseudo bonus state ST4 was started with the start of the second zone SC2 this time, the ending flag of the main RAM 74 is not set to "1" as shown in FIG. 43(e), so the period in which the bonus can be added is entered as shown in FIG. 43(f). In other words, if the bonus condition described later is established in the current pseudo bonus state ST4, the remaining number of continued games in the pseudo bonus state ST4 will be added.

Then, as shown in FIG. 43(b), the game is repeatedly played in pseudo bonus state ST4, including at time t3. Then, as the game is played from time t4 to time t5, the remaining number of continued games in pseudo bonus state ST4 becomes "0". Therefore, at time t5, pseudo bonus state ST4 ends, as shown in FIG. 43(d). However, even if pseudo bonus state ST4 ends and the normal game state ST1 is restored, the second section SC2 continues, as shown in FIG. 43(a).

After that, as shown in FIG. 43(b), the game is repeatedly played in the second section SC2 including the timing of t6, in the normal game state ST1. Then, in the game started at the timing of t7, if a transition lottery process (step S2112) is won and the remaining number of release games counted by the release game number counter 74e reaches 5 games, the transition standby period will start as shown in FIG. 43(c).

The game is played repeatedly during the transition waiting period, and the fifth game is played during the transition waiting period in the game played from timing t8 to timing t9. As a result, the transition waiting period ends at timing t9 as shown in FIG. 43(c), and pseudo bonus state ST4 begins as shown in FIG. 43(d). Also, as shown in FIG. 43(e), the ending flag in the main RAM 74 has not been set to "1", so a period in which bonuses can be added begins as shown in FIG. 43(f).

After that, the game is repeatedly played in the pseudo bonus state ST4, and the game is executed from the timing t10 to the timing t11, so that the sum of the value of the continued game number counter 74c in the master RAM 74 and the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter in the master RAM 74 becomes equal to or greater than the first reference number of games, or the result of multiplying the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter by the expected acquisition value of the gaming media in the pseudo bonus state ST4 and adding the result of adding the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d becomes equal to or greater than the first reference number of acquisitions. Therefore, at the timing t11, the ending flag in the master RAM 74 is set to "1" as shown in FIG. 43(e). By setting the ending flag to "1", the remaining number of continued games in the pseudo bonus state ST4 is not added. In other words, the period during which the addition is possible ends at the timing t11 as shown in FIG. 43(f).

After that, the game is repeatedly played in the pseudo bonus state ST4 when the ending flag is set to "1", and the game is executed from timing t12 to timing t13, so that the number of remaining games to be continued in the pseudo bonus state ST4 becomes "0". Therefore, the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends at timing t13, as shown in FIG. 43(d). Also, since the pseudo bonus state ST4 has ended when the ending flag is set to "1", the second section SC2 ends with the end of the pseudo bonus state ST4, as shown in FIG. 43(a). In this case, the situation becomes one in the first section SC1, which is the normal game state ST1.

Next, we will explain the cases in which a transition to pseudo bonus state ST4 occurs due to the pre-end period.

When the pseudo bonus state ST4 occurs in the second section SC2 and the second section SC2 is maintained at the end of the pseudo bonus state ST4, the game is repeated and is executed from timing t14 to timing t15, so that the number of continued games in the second section SC2 reaches the first reference number of games. Therefore, at timing t15, the ending flag in the master RAM 74 is set to "1" as shown in FIG. 43(e).

After that, when the game is repeatedly executed and the number of continuing games in the second section SC2 becomes equal to or greater than the second reference number of games, a new game starts at timing t16 as shown in FIG. 43(b). In this case, at timing t16, the pre-end period starts as shown in FIG. 43(g), and at timing t17 when the game ends, pseudo bonus state ST4 starts as shown in FIG. 43(d). At the timing when the pseudo bonus state ST4 starts, the ending flag in the main RAM 74 has already been set to "1" as shown in FIG. 43(e), so it does not enter a period in which bonuses can be added as shown in FIG. 43(f).

After that, the game is repeatedly played in the pseudo bonus state ST4, and as shown in FIG. 43(b), the game is executed from timing t18 to timing t19, causing the number of remaining games to be continued in the pseudo bonus state ST4 to become "0". Therefore, the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends at timing t19, as shown in FIG. 43(d). Also, since the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends with the ending flag set to "1", the second section SC2 ends with the end of the pseudo bonus state ST4, as shown in FIG. 43(a). In this case, the situation becomes one in the first section SC1, which is the normal game state ST1.

During the pre-termination period, before the remaining number of games to be continued in the pseudo bonus state ST4 becomes "0", the ending condition of the second section SC2 may be met by the number of games to be continued in the second section SC2 reaching the upper limit number of games or the limited total net increase in the number of game media in the second section SC2 reaching the upper limit net increase, and the pseudo bonus state ST4 may be forcibly terminated. In this case, as already explained, if the pseudo bonus state ST4 is initiated during the pre-termination period, the second start command is sent to the production side MPU 92, and the remaining number of games to be continued in the pseudo bonus state ST4 is not displayed on the image display device 63. This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable even if the pseudo bonus state ST4 is forcibly terminated due to the ending condition of the second section SC2 being established.

Next, we will explain the presentation that indicates that a transition to pseudo bonus state ST4 will occur during the transition waiting period for pseudo bonus state ST4.

As already explained, the transition waiting period is either a period in which the second transition confirmation flag is set to "1" and the value of the transition waiting counter is 1 or greater, or a period in which none of the first to third transition confirmation flags are set to "1" and the value of the release game count counter 74e is 5 or less. A transition to pseudo bonus state ST4 will occur when five games have been played during the transition waiting period, and during this transition waiting period, a presentation can be executed that allows the player to recognize that a transition to pseudo bonus state ST4 has occurred, using the stop result after the rotation of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Figures 44(a) and 44(b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the content of the presentation that allows the player to recognize that a transition to pseudo bonus state ST4 is occurring.

As already explained, the first bell winning data and the special bell winning data are set for the index value IV=10, which can be a winning combination in the lottery process (FIG. 16) in a game state other than the CB state (first CB state ST2 and second CB state ST3). When the index value IV=10 is a winning combination, if the left reel 32L is stopped for the first time, the first bell winning combination is achieved regardless of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R thereafter and the timing of the stop operation of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. On the other hand, when the index value IV=10 is a winning combination, if the center reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped for the first time, the first bell winning combination or the special bell winning combination is achieved regardless of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R thereafter. In this case, the special bell winning combination is prioritized, and the first bell winning combination is reliably achieved when the special bell winning combination cannot be achieved in relation to the timing of the stop operation of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44.

In the configuration in which the first bell winning data and the special bell winning data are set for the index value IV=10 as described above, when the index value IV=10 is won in the normal game state ST1, not in the transition waiting period, and in the pseudo bonus state ST4, a display is made indicating that the left reel 32L will be stopped for the first time, as shown in FIG. 44(a). Specifically, the image display device 63 makes a display corresponding to a stop order in which the first stop is the left reel 32L and the rest are optional, as shown in FIG. 44(a1), and the dual-purpose display unit 66 makes a display corresponding to a stop order in which the first stop is the left reel 32L and the rest are optional, as shown in FIG. 44(a2). Then, by stopping the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the order according to the notification, the first bell winning is reliably established on the main line ML, as shown in FIG. 44(a3).

On the other hand, when the index value IV=10 is hit during the transition waiting period in the normal gaming state ST1, a display is made indicating that the right reel 32R will be the first stop, as shown in FIG. 44(b). Specifically, the image display device 63 displays a display corresponding to a stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the rest are optional, as shown in FIG. 44(b1), and displays a display indicating that the player should aim for the "white 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white 7" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red 7" symbol on the right reel 32R. In addition, the dual-purpose display unit 66 displays a display corresponding to a stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the rest are optional, as shown in FIG. 44(b2). Then, the rotation of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped in the order indicated by the notification, and the stop buttons 42-44 are operated to stop the "white 7" symbol, the "white 7" symbol, and the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML, resulting in a special bell win on the main line ML, as shown in FIG. 44(b3).

Even if the center reel 32M is stopped as the first stop, the special bell win is achieved on the main line ML as shown in FIG. 44(b3) by stopping the stop buttons 42-44 so that the "white 7" symbol, "white 7" symbol, and "red 7" symbol stop on the main line ML. Also, even if the center reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped as the first stop, the first bell win is achieved if the stop buttons 42-44 are not stopped at the timing when the "white 7" symbol, "white 7" symbol, and "red 7" symbol stop on the in-line ML.

With the above configuration, if index value IV=10 is won in the lottery process (FIG. 16) during the 5 games of the transition waiting period in normal game state ST1, the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that will allow the special bell to be won is announced, along with the symbol combination that will allow the special bell to be won. Then, reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the order according to the announcement, and the stop buttons 42-44 are stopped at the timing according to the announcement, thereby allowing the player to recognize that they are transitioning to pseudo bonus state ST4.

The number of game media awarded is "15" whether the first bell wins or the special bell wins. Therefore, even if the manner in which the notification of the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is executed differs depending on whether or not it is in the transition waiting period when index value IV=10 is won, it is possible to prevent this from affecting the player's advantage. In addition, since the notification of the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is not directly linked to the player's advantage, it is optional whether or not the section display unit 67 is lit when the above-mentioned notification of the stopping order is made.

The specific process configuration for executing the above-mentioned notification will be described below. Figure 45 (a) is a flowchart showing the stop order notification control process executed by the main MPU 72. The stop order notification control process is executed in step S712, which is executed after the role selection process (Figure 16) has completed the role win/loss determination and after the first control process (step S711) of the game area.

If the current game state is the pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S2301: YES), the notification control process for the pseudo bonus state is executed (step S2302). In the notification control process for the pseudo bonus state, if the index value IV = 1 to 6 is won in the role selection process (Figure 16), a display corresponding to the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first bell to be won is performed on the dual-purpose display unit 66, provided that the number of bets in the current game is "3", and a command is sent to the production side MPU 92 to cause the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first bell to be won to be announced on the image display device 63. Note that if the number of bets on the current game is "2", even if one of index values IV = 1 to 6 is won in the role selection process (Figure 16) in pseudo bonus state ST4, the image display device 63 and the combined display unit 66 will not notify the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, but the configuration may be such that the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified in the same way as when the number of bets is "3".

In the notification control process for the pseudo bonus state, if the index value IV = 7 to 9 is won in the lottery process for the role (FIG. 16), the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the second bell to be won is performed on the dual display unit 66, provided that the number of bets in the current game is "3", and a command is sent to the production side MPU 92 to notify the image display unit 63 of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the second bell to be won. Note that if the number of bets in the current game is "2", even if the index value IV = 7 to 9 is won in the lottery process for the role (FIG. 16) in the pseudo bonus state ST4, the notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is not executed on the image display unit 63 and the dual display unit 66, but the notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R may be executed as in the case where the number of bets is "3".

In the notification control process for the pseudo bonus state, if the index value IV = 10 is won in the role selection process (Figure 16), regardless of the number of bets on the current game, a display corresponding to the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first bell to be won is displayed on the dual-purpose display unit 66, and a command is sent to the production side MPU 92 to cause the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first bell to be won to be announced on the image display device 63.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2301, it is judged whether or not the index value IV = 10 has been won in the current game (step S2303). Note that since the index value IV = 10 is not won in the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, a negative judgment in step S2301 and a positive judgment in step S2303 result in the normal game state ST1.

If a positive determination is made in step S2303, it is determined whether or not the notified flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2304). The notified flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to determine whether or not a special bell has already been won during the transition waiting period. If the notified flag is not set to "1" (step S2304: NO), it is determined whether or not the transition waiting period is in progress by determining whether or not the value of the transition waiting counter in the main RAM 74 is 1 or more, or whether the value of the release game number counter 74e in the main RAM 74 is 5 or less (steps S2305 and S2306).

If it is in the transition waiting period (step S2305 or step S2306: YES), the process of setting display data for the right first stop is executed (step S2307). As a result, a display corresponding to a stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the remaining reels are arbitrary is started on the dual-purpose display unit 66. The display is started before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is enabled, and is ended when a stop command is issued for all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game for which the display is executed. Then, a command for the right first stop is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S2308). When the production side MPU 92 receives the command for the right first stop, it causes the image display device 63 to start a display corresponding to a stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the remaining reels are arbitrary. This display begins before the stopping operation of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective, and ends when a stop command is issued to all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game for which this display is executed.

If the notification flag is set to "1" (step S2304: YES), or if the transition waiting period is not in progress (steps S2305 and S2306: NO), the display data setting process for the left first stop is executed (step S2309). As a result, a display corresponding to a stop order in which the first stop is the left reel 32L and the remaining reels are optional is started on the dual-purpose display unit 66. This display is started before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is enabled, and is ended when a stop command is issued for all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game for which the display is executed. After that, a command for the left first stop is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S2310). When the production side MPU 92 receives the command for the left first stop, it causes the image display device 63 to start a display corresponding to a stop order in which the first stop is the left reel 32L and the remaining reels are optional. This display begins before the stop operation of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective, and ends when a stop command is issued to all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game for which this display is executed.

Figure 45 (b) is a flowchart showing the winning determination process executed by the main MPU 72. The winning determination process is executed in step S812, which is the process executed after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped spinning in the reel control process (Figure 20).

If a special bell win has been achieved in the current game (step S2401: YES), the transition waiting counter in the main RAM 74 is checked to determine whether the value is 1 or more, or whether the value of the release game number counter 74e in the main RAM 74 is 5 or less (steps S2402 and S2403), thereby determining whether or not the transition waiting period is in progress. If the transition waiting period is in progress (step S2402 or S2403: YES), the notification flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2404), and then a notification command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S2405). The notification command is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize that a special bell win has been achieved during the transition waiting period. When the production side MPU 92 receives the notification command, it causes the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 to execute a performance indicating that the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 has been confirmed.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2401, if a negative judgment is made in step S2403, or if the processing of step S2405 is executed, other processing is executed (step S2406). In other processing, the type of the symbols stopped on the main line ML on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is grasped. Then, based on the contents of the winning data stored in the main RAM 74, it is determined whether or not the combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the main line ML on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning role in the lottery processing of the winning role (FIG. 16), and if it is a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning role, the winning role is established and the winning corresponding processing is executed. In the winning corresponding processing, if the winning is a small role winning, information on the number of game media to be awarded is set in the main RAM 74 so that the game media can be awarded in the medium awarding processing. On the other hand, if the winning is a replay winning, a flag setting process is executed so that the replay setting process is executed in the next start waiting process (step S302).

Figure 46 is a flowchart showing the normal performance control process executed by the performance side MPU 92. The normal performance control process is repeatedly executed by the performance side MPU 92 at a relatively short cycle (e.g., every 4 milliseconds).

If a command for the left first stop has been received (step S2501: YES), a process for setting the effect for the left first stop is executed (step S2502). In the process for setting the effect for the left first stop, a process is executed to cause the image display device 63 to start displaying a display corresponding to a stop order in which the first stop is the left reel 32L and the rest are arbitrary.

If a command for the right first stop has been received (step S2503: YES), a process for setting the effect for the right first stop is executed (step S2504). In the process for setting the effect for the right first stop, a process is executed to cause the image display device 63 to start displaying a reel corresponding to a stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the rest are arbitrary.

If a notification command has been received (step S2505: YES), processing is performed to set the confirmation effect when a prize is won (step S2506). In the processing to set the confirmation effect when a prize is won, processing is performed so that a presentation indicating that the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 has been confirmed is executed by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63. After that, the confirmation effect flag provided in the presentation side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2507). The confirmation effect flag is a flag that allows the presentation side MPU 92 to determine whether or not a presentation indicating that the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 has been confirmed has been executed.

If the first start command or the second start command has been received (step S2508: YES), it is determined whether the confirmed effect flag in the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2509). As already explained, the first start command and the second start command are transmitted from the main side MPU 72 when the pseudo bonus state ST4 has started. In other words, in step S2509, it is determined whether the pseudo bonus state ST4 has started after an effect indicating that the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 has been confirmed has been executed.

If the confirmation effect flag is not set to "1" (step S2509: NO), the process for setting the confirmation effect when no prize is won is executed (step S2510). In the process for setting the confirmation effect when no prize is won, a process is executed so that the effect indicating that the pseudo bonus state ST4 will start is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. Here, when the process for setting the confirmation effect when a prize is won is executed, an effect indicating that the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 has been confirmed is executed, whereas when the process for setting the confirmation effect when no prize is won is executed, an effect indicating that the pseudo bonus state ST4 will start is executed. The contents of these effects are different. The method for making the contents of the effects different is arbitrary, but examples include a method of making the contents of the video display displayed on the image display device 63 different, or a method of making the contents of the text image displayed on the image display device 63 different.

If a positive judgment is made in step S2509, or if the processing of step S2510 is executed, if a first start command has been received (step S2511: YES), a first setting process for the bonus start effect is executed (step S2512). On the other hand, if a second start command has been received (step S2511: NO), a second setting process for the bonus start effect is executed (step S2513).

In the first setting process for the bonus start effect (step S2512), the initial number of continued games (specifically, information on 40 games) included in the currently received first start command is set to the continued game number counter for grasping and the continued game number counter for display, both of which are provided in the presentation side RAM 94. The continued game number counter for grasping is a counter for the presentation side MPU 92 to identify the remaining number of continued games in the pseudo bonus state ST4 measured by the main MPU 72, and the continued game number counter for display is a counter for the presentation side MPU 92 to identify the remaining number of continued games to be displayed in the game number image G32 on the image display device 63. In addition, in the first setting process for the bonus start effect (step S2512), the data table for the first pseudo bonus is read from the presentation side ROM 93 to the presentation side RAM 94. By controlling the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 according to the first pseudo bonus data table, the effect corresponding to the pseudo bonus state ST4 in a situation where the ending flag is not set to "1" is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. In this case, the first effect image G31, the game number image G32, and the acquisition number image G33 are displayed on the image display device 63 as shown in FIG. 42 (a). The first pseudo bonus data table is set with data that enables the execution of an effect corresponding to a predetermined number of games (for example, 20 games), and when the predetermined number of games is played and the pseudo bonus state ST4 continues, the first data in the first pseudo bonus data table is referenced again. In addition, in the first setting process (step S2512) of the bonus start effect, the effect ending flag provided in the effect RAM 94 is cleared to "0". The effect ending flag is a flag for the effect MPU 92 to identify whether or not the ending flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1".

In the second setting process of the bonus start effect (step S2513), the initial number of continued games (specifically 40 games or 50 games) included in the currently received second start command is set to the continued game number counter for grasping and the continued game number counter for display in the effect side RAM 94. In addition, in the second setting process of the bonus start effect (step S2513), the second pseudo bonus data table is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94. The upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 are controlled according to the second pseudo bonus data table, and the effect corresponding to the pseudo bonus state ST4 in a situation where the ending flag is set to "1" is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. In this case, the second effect image G41 and the acquisition number image G33 are displayed on the image display device 63 as shown in FIG. 42 (b). The second pseudo bonus data table is set with data that allows the execution of effects corresponding to a predetermined number of games (e.g., 20 games), and if the predetermined number of games has been played and the pseudo bonus state ST4 continues, the first data in the second pseudo bonus data table is referenced again. Also, in the second setting process for the bonus start effect (step S2513), the effect ending flag in the effect RAM 94 is set to "1". As already explained, the effect ending flag is a flag that allows the effect MPU 92 to determine whether or not the ending flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1".

When the first setting process for the bonus start effect (step S2512) or the second setting process for the bonus start effect (step S2513) is executed after the setting process for the confirmation effect when no winning is performed (step S2510), first, a presentation indicating that the pseudo bonus state ST4 is starting is executed for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 5 seconds), and then the presentation corresponding to the pseudo bonus state ST4 is started.

In the normal effect control process, other processes are executed in addition to the various processes described above (step S2514). In the other processes, processes are executed to execute effects different from the above effects in the normal game state ST1.

Next, the manner in which various effects are executed during the transition waiting period will be described with reference to the time chart in FIG. 47. FIG. 47(a) shows the state in the transition waiting period, FIG. 47(b) shows the period during which one game is being executed, FIG. 47(c) shows the period during which the pseudo bonus state ST4 is in effect, FIG. 47(d) shows the timing when a win occurs with index value IV=10, FIG. 47(e) shows the period during which a left first stop notification is being executed, indicating that the left reel 32L will make its first stop, FIG. 47(f) shows the period during which a right first stop notification is being executed, indicating that the right reel 32R will make its first stop, FIG. 47(g) shows the timing when a special bell win is established, FIG. 47(h) shows the period during which a fixed effect is executed when no win occurs, and FIG. 47(i) shows the period during which a fixed effect is executed when a win occurs.

First, we will explain what happens when a special bell wins during the transition waiting period.

At timing t1, when the game is not in the transition waiting period, a new game is started as shown in FIG. 47(b), and in that game, index value IV=10 is won as shown in FIG. 47(d). In this case, since the game is not in the transition waiting period, a left first stop notification is executed, indicating that the left reel 32L will make its first stop, as shown in FIG. 47(e). Having confirmed this left first stop notification, the player performs a stop operation on reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to make the left reel 32L make its first stop. This results in the first bell winning.

After that, at timing t2, a new game starts as shown in FIG. 47(b). If a transition lottery process (step S2112) for that game results in a transition win or the number of remaining release games falls to 5 or less, the transition waiting period will begin as shown in FIG. 47(a).

After that, at the timing of t3, a new game is started as shown in FIG. 47(b), and in this game, as shown in FIG. 47(d), an index value IV=10 is won. In this case, since it is a transition waiting period, a right first stop notification is executed, indicating that the right reel 32R will be stopped for the first time, as shown in FIG. 47(f). The player who confirmed the right first stop notification performs the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R so as to make the right reel 32R make the first stop, and performs the stop operation of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 at the stop operation timing that allows the special bell win to be achieved. However, because the stop operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is not accurate, the first bell win is achieved instead of the special bell win, even though the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed so as to make the right reel 32R make the first stop.

After that, at the timing of t4, a new game is started as shown in FIG. 47(b), and in this game, the index value IV=10 is won as shown in FIG. 47(d). In this case, since it is a transition waiting period, a right first stop notification is executed as shown in FIG. 47(f), which indicates that the right reel 32R will be stopped for the first time. The player who confirmed the right first stop notification performs the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R so as to make the right reel 32R stop for the first time, and performs the stop operation of each stop button 42 to 44 at the stop operation timing that allows the special bell winning to be established. This time, the stop operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44 is accurate, so that the special bell winning is established at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 47(g). Furthermore, as the special bell winning is established, a performance is started at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 47(i), which indicates that the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 has been confirmed.

After that, at timing t6, a new game is started as shown in FIG. 47(b), and in this game, index value IV=10 is won as shown in FIG. 47(d). In this case, although it is a transition waiting period, since the special bell winning has already been achieved during this transition waiting period, a left first stop notification is executed, indicating that the left reel 32L will make its first stop, as shown in FIG. 47(e). Having confirmed this left first stop notification, the player performs a stop operation on reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to bring the left reel 32L to its first stop. Therefore, the first bell winning is achieved.

After that, a new game starts between timing t7 and timing t8 as shown in FIG. 47(b). In this case, this game is the final game of the transition waiting period. Therefore, at timing t8 when this game ends, the transition waiting period ends as shown in FIG. 47(a) and pseudo bonus state ST4 starts as shown in FIG. 47(c). In this case, at timing t8 when pseudo bonus state ST4 starts, the winning confirmation presentation ends as shown in FIG. 47(i) and the presentation corresponding to pseudo bonus state ST4 starts.

By providing an opportunity for the special bell to be won during the transition waiting period as described above, it is possible to notify the player that a transition to pseudo bonus state ST4 has been confirmed by using the result of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stopping after they have stopped spinning. In addition, after the special bell is won, even if it is during the transition waiting period, a presentation is executed indicating that a transition to pseudo bonus state ST4 has been confirmed, making it possible for the player to clearly recognize that a transition to pseudo bonus state ST4 is occurring.

Next, we will explain what happens if the special bell does not win during the transition waiting period.

In the transition waiting period as shown in FIG. 47(a), new games are executed at t9, t10, and t11 as shown in FIG. 47(b). In this case, the game started at t11 is the final game of the transition waiting period. Therefore, at t12 when the game ends, the transition waiting period ends as shown in FIG. 47(a) and the pseudo bonus state ST4 starts as shown in FIG. 47(c). In this case, since the special bell win is not established during the transition waiting period, the confirmation effect at the time of winning is not executed as shown in FIG. 47(i). Therefore, the confirmation effect at the time of non-winning is executed as shown in FIG. 47(h) from the time of t12 to the time of t13. In other words, an effect indicating that the pseudo bonus state ST4 is starting is executed. After that, an effect corresponding to the pseudo bonus state ST4 is executed.

As described above, if the special bell does not win during the transition waiting period, a presentation is executed to indicate that the pseudo bonus state ST4 will start when the pseudo bonus state ST4 starts. This makes it possible for the player to clearly recognize that the pseudo bonus state ST4 will start even if the index value IV=10 is not won in the role selection process (Figure 16) during the transition waiting period.

<About the pseudo bonus state ST4>
Next, the processing contents in the pseudo bonus state ST4 will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the pseudo bonus processing at the start of the game executed by the main MPU 72. As already explained, the advantageous lottery processing at the start of the game is executed in step S710, which is a processing executed after the winning/losing judgment of the role is completed in the role lottery processing (FIG. 16) and before the first control processing (step S711) of the play area. Then, the pseudo bonus processing at the start of the game is executed in step S2103 in the advantageous lottery processing at the start of the game (FIG. 40). Note that in the case of the CB state (first CB state ST2 or second CB state ST3), the pseudo bonus processing at the start of the game is not executed.

First, it is determined whether the number of bets for the current game is "3" by determining whether the value of the bet number setting counter 74a in the main RAM 74 is "3" (step S2601). If the number of bets for the current game is "2" (step S2601: NO), the processing from step S2602 onwards is not executed. As a result, in a game in which the number of bets is "2" even if it is in the pseudo bonus state ST4, the processing from step S2602 onwards to add to the remaining number of continued games in the pseudo bonus state ST4 is not executed.

If the number of bets on the current game is "3" (step S2601: YES), it is determined whether the ending flag in the master RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2602). As already explained, the ending flag is a flag for the master MPU 72 to determine whether the number of games played in the second section SC2 measured using the continued game counter 74c is likely to reach the upper limit game number, or whether the limited total net increase in the number of game media measured using the total acquisition counter 74d is likely to reach the upper limit net increase. Specifically, when the sum of the value of the continued game counter 74c of the master RAM 74 and the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter of the master RAM 74 is equal to or greater than the first reference number of games (specifically, 1400 games), or when the result of multiplying the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter of the master RAM 74 by the expected acquisition value of gaming media in the pseudo bonus state ST4 and adding the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d of the master RAM 74 is equal to or greater than the first reference number of acquisitions (specifically, 2100 pieces), the ending flag is set to "1". When the ending flag is set to "1" (step S2602: YES), the processing from step S2603 onwards is not executed. As a result, in a situation where the number of games executed in the second section SC2 is likely to reach the upper limit number of games, or in a situation where the limited total net increase in the number of gaming media is likely to reach the upper limit net increase, the processing for adding the remaining number of continued games in the pseudo bonus state ST4 from step S2603 onwards is not executed.

If the ending flag is not set to "1" (step S2602: NO), the host MPU 72 determines whether the current time is the added-on period in the pseudo bonus state ST4 by determining whether the value of the added-on period counter provided in the host RAM 74 is 1 or greater (step S2603). The added-on period counter is a counter that allows the host MPU 72 to determine whether the current time is the added-on period and the remaining number of continuing games in the added-on period.

If the value of the add-on period counter is "0" and it is not the add-on period (step S2603: NO), on the condition that the index value IV = 11 to 15 is won in the lottery process for the role in the current game (FIG. 16) (step S2604: YES), the add-on period transition lottery process is executed (step S2605). In the add-on period transition lottery process, a lottery is used to determine whether or not to transition to the add-on period in which the remaining number of continued games is more likely to be added in the pseudo bonus state ST4, using an add-on period transition lottery table provided in the main ROM 73 and a lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74. In the lottery process for the role in this game (FIG. 16), if the index value IV=11 is won, there is a 10% probability of winning the transition to the added-on period, if the index value IV=12 is won, there is a 5% probability of winning the transition to the added-on period, if the index value IV=13 is won, there is a 20% probability of winning the transition to the added-on period, if the index value IV=14 is won, there is a 15% probability of winning the transition to the added-on period, and if the index value IV=15 is won, there is a 10% probability of winning the transition to the added-on period. In this case, the lower the probability of winning the lottery process for the role (FIG. 16), the higher the probability of winning the transition to the added-on period. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of winning an index value IV with a low probability of winning in the lottery process for the role (FIG. 16).

If the transition to the added-on period is won (step S2606: YES), an addition process for the number of continued games is executed (step S2607). In the addition process for the number of continued games, the number of games equal to or greater than the number of continued games for which the added-on period will continue is added to the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter in the main RAM 74. Specifically, the added-on period will continue for 10 games, and in step S2607, 20 games, which is the number of games equal to or greater than the 10 games, are added to the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter in the main RAM 74. This makes it possible to prevent the remaining number of continued games in the pseudo bonus state ST4 from becoming "0" during the added-on period. After that, a first addition command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S2608). The first addition command is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize that an addition of the number of games has occurred when transitioning to the added-on period. In addition, the first addition command includes information on the number of games, which is the number of games that is the subject of the current addition, that is, 20 games. When the presentation side MPU 92 receives the first addition command, it causes the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 to execute a presentation indicating that an addition to the number of games has occurred when transitioning to the addition period. After that, it sets the addition winning flag provided in the main side RAM 74 to "1" (step S2609). The addition winning flag is a flag that the main side MPU 72 uses to identify that a win has been made for the transition to the addition period in the transition lottery process for the addition period (step S2605).

If the transition lottery process for the additional period (step S2605) does not result in a win (step S2606: NO), the first additional lottery process is executed (step S2610). In the first additional lottery process, a lottery is used to determine whether or not an additional lottery will be generated, which will increase the remaining number of continued games in the pseudo bonus state ST4, using the first additional lottery table provided in the main ROM 73 and a lottery counter that is regularly updated in the main RAM 74. If the index value IV = 11 is won, 10 games are selected with a 10% probability, 20 games are selected with a 10% probability, 50 games are selected with a 10% probability, and there is a 70% probability of a miss. If the index value IV = 12 is won, 10 games are selected with a 5% probability, 20 games are selected with a 5% probability, 50 games are selected with a 5% probability, and there is an 85% probability of a miss. When the index value IV=13 is selected, 10 games are selected with a probability of 20%, 20 games are selected with a probability of 20%, 50 games are selected with a probability of 20%, and the probability of the winning is a miss is 40%. When the index value IV=14 is selected, 10 games are selected with a probability of 15%, 20 games are selected with a probability of 15%, 50 games are selected with a probability of 15%, and the probability of the winning is a miss is 55%. When the index value IV=15 is selected, 10 games are selected with a probability of 10%, 20 games are selected with a probability of 10%, 50 games are selected with a probability of 10%, and the probability of the winning is a miss is 70%. In this case, the lower the probability of the index value IV to win in the lottery process of the role (FIG. 16), the higher the probability of the winning of the additional game. Also, the lower the probability of the index value IV to win in the lottery process of the role (FIG. 16), the higher the expected value of the number of games to be added is. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of winning an index value IV, which has a low probability of winning, during the role selection process (Figure 16).

If 10, 20, or 50 games is selected in the first add-on lottery process (step S2610) and an add-on win occurs (step S2611: YES), an addition process for the number of continued games is executed (step S2612). In the addition process for the number of continued games, the number of games selected in the first add-on lottery process (step S2610) is added to the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter in the main RAM 74. Then, a second addition command is sent to the presentation side MPU 92 (step S2613). The second addition command is a command for making the presentation side MPU 92 recognize that an add-on win occurred in the first add-on lottery process (step S2610) and the number of added games selected in the first add-on lottery process (step S2610), and the second addition command includes information corresponding to the number of added games selected in the first add-on lottery process (step S2610). When the presentation side MPU 92 receives the second addition command, it causes the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 to display a presentation indicating that an addition to the number of games has occurred.

If the value of the add-on period counter in the main RAM 74 is 1 or more and is in the add-on period (step S2603: YES), the second add-on lottery process is executed (step S2614). In the second add-on lottery process, the number of games to be added to the remaining number of continued games in the pseudo bonus state ST4 is determined by lottery using the first add-on lottery table provided in the main ROM 73 and the lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74. In other words, the first add-on lottery process (step S2610) is configured so that the number of games may not be added, but the second add-on lottery process (step S2614) reliably adds the number of games. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of the add-on period. In addition, the second add-on lottery process (step S2614) is executed in each game that is the target of the remaining number of continued games in the add-on period during the add-on period. As a result, during the top-up period, the remaining number of continued games in the pseudo bonus state ST4 will be added to each game that is the target of playing the remaining number of continued games during that top-up period.

In the second add-on lottery process (step S2614), if an index value IV other than index value IV=11 to 15 is selected, 10 games are selected with an 80% probability, 20 games are selected with a 10% probability, and 50 games are selected with a 10% probability. If an index value IV=11 is selected, 10 games are selected with a 50% probability, 20 games are selected with a 25% probability, and 50 games are selected with a 25% probability. If an index value IV=12 is selected, 10 games are selected with a 60% probability, 20 games are selected with a 20% probability, and 50 games are selected with a 20% probability. If an index value IV=13 is selected, 10 games are selected with a 20% probability, 20 games are selected with a 40% probability, and 50 games are selected with a 40% probability. When the index value IV=14 is selected, 10 games are selected with a probability of 30%, 20 games are selected with a probability of 35%, and 50 games are selected with a probability of 35%. When the index value IV=15 is selected, 10 games are selected with a probability of 50%, 20 games are selected with a probability of 25%, and 50 games are selected with a probability of 25%. In this case, the lower the probability of winning the lottery process for the hand (FIG. 16) for the index value IV, the higher the expected value of the number of games to be added. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of winning the lottery process for the hand (FIG. 16) for the index value IV with a low probability of winning. In addition, the expected value of the number of games to be added when the second lottery process for adding is executed once (step S2614) is a number of games that is greater than the expected value of the number of games to be added when the first lottery process for adding is executed once (step S2610). This makes it possible to increase the advantage of the period of addition.

Then, an addition process for the number of continued games is executed (step S2615). In the addition process for the number of continued games, the number of games selected in the second add-on lottery process (step S2614) is added to the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter in the main RAM 74. Then, a third addition command is sent to the presentation side MPU 92 (step S2616). The third addition command is a command for causing the presentation side MPU 92 to recognize the number of added games selected in the second add-on lottery process (step S2614), and the third addition command includes information corresponding to the number of added games selected in the second add-on lottery process (step S2614). When the presentation side MPU 92 receives the third addition command, it causes the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 to perform a presentation indicating that the number of games has been added.

Next, the pseudo bonus processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 49. The pseudo bonus processing is executed in step S905 of the response processing at the end of play (Figure 21). As described above, the response processing at the end of play is executed after all of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped spinning in one game, so the pseudo bonus processing is also executed after all of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped spinning in one game.

First, it is determined whether the number of bets for the current game is "3" by determining whether the value of the bet number setting counter 74a in the main RAM 74 is "3" (step S2701). If the number of bets for the current game is "2" (step S2701: NO), the processing from step S2702 onwards is not executed. As a result, even if a game with the number of bets of "2" is executed in the pseudo bonus state ST4, the remaining number of continued games in the pseudo bonus state ST4 is not subtracted, and furthermore, the remaining number of continued games in the added period in the pseudo bonus state ST4 is not subtracted.

Note that when in the CB state (first CB state ST2 or second CB state ST3), the pseudo bonus process (Figure 49) itself is not executed, so even if the CB state is started in the middle of the pseudo bonus state ST4, the number of games played in the CB state is not treated as the number of games played in the pseudo bonus state ST4. Therefore, even if the CB state is transitioned to in the middle of the pseudo bonus state ST4, after the CB state ends, the pseudo bonus state ST4 will resume from the state of the remaining number of continued games immediately before transitioning to the CB state.

If the bet number for the current number of games is "3" (step S2701: YES), the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter in the main RAM 74 is decremented by 1 (step S2702). After that, it is determined whether the value of the add-on period counter in the main RAM 74 is 1 or greater, thereby determining whether the current period is the add-on period (step S2703).

If the value of the added-on period counter is "0" and it is not the added-on period (step S2703: NO), it is determined whether the added-on winning flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2704). If the added-on period transition lottery process (step S2605) at the start of the current game results in a win for the transition to the added-on period, the added-on winning flag is set to "1".

If the add-on winning flag is set to "1" (step S2704: YES), the setting process for the add-on period is executed (step S2705). In the setting process for the add-on period, the add-on period counter in the main RAM 74 is set to a value corresponding to 10 games, which is the initial number of continuing games for the add-on period. After that, the add-on winning flag is cleared to "0" (step S2706), and then a start command for the add-on period is sent to the presentation side MPU 92 (step S2707). The start command for the add-on period is a command for making the presentation side MPU 92 recognize that the add-on period has started. When the presentation side MPU 92 receives the start command for the add-on period, it causes the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 to execute a presentation indicating that the add-on period has started and a presentation indicating that the add-on period is in progress.

If the value of the added-on period counter is 1 or more and thus indicates the added-on period (step S2703: YES), the value of the added-on period counter is decremented by 1 (step S2708). Then, when the value of the added-on period counter after the decrement becomes "0", the added-on period ends.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2704, if the processing of step S2707 is executed, or if the processing of step S2708 is executed, it is judged whether or not the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter in the main RAM 74 is "0" (step S2709). If the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter is "0" (step S2709: YES), it is judged whether or not the ending flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2710).

If the ending flag is not set to "1" (step S2710: NO), the pseudo bonus state flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S2711). After that, a lottery process for the number of release games is executed (step S2712). As already explained, the number of release games is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the number of games required until the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 occurs when the transition lottery process (step S2112) does not result in a win for the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4. In the lottery process for the number of release games, first, a lottery table for the number of release games pre-stored in the main ROM 73 is read out, and numerical information is obtained from a lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74. Then, the number of release games is selected by comparing the numerical information obtained from the lottery counter with the lottery table for the number of release games. In this case, any one of 50 games, 100 games, 200 games, 300 games, 400 games, 500 games, 600 games, 700 games, and 800 games is selected as the number of release games. Furthermore, the probability of selecting each of these release game numbers is the same. However, this is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the probability of selecting a larger number of release games is set high, or the probability of selecting a smaller number of release games is set high. After executing the lottery process for the release game number, the release game number selected in the lottery process for the release game number is set in the release game number counter 74e of the master RAM 74 (step S2713). The release game number counter 74e is a counter for identifying the remaining number of release games in the master MPU 72.

Then, an end command for the pseudo bonus state ST4 is sent to the presentation side MPU 92 (step S2714). The end command for the pseudo bonus state ST4 is a command for making the presentation side MPU 92 recognize that the pseudo bonus state ST4 has ended. When the presentation side MPU 92 receives the end command for the pseudo bonus state ST4, it controls the upper lamp 61, speaker 62 and image display device 63 so that a presentation corresponding to the normal game state ST1 is started after a presentation indicating that the pseudo bonus state ST4 has ended is executed.

If the ending flag is set to "1" (step S2710: YES), a process for setting the end preparation state ST5 is executed (step S2715). In this process, the pseudo bonus state flag in the master RAM 74 is cleared to "0". In this process, the end preparation state flag provided in the master RAM 74 is set to "1". The end preparation state flag is a flag that the master MPU 72 uses to identify that the game is in the end preparation state ST5, and setting the end preparation state flag to "1" changes the game state to the end preparation state ST5. After that, the end preparation complete flag in the master RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S2716). As already explained, the end preparation complete flag is a flag that the master MPU 72 uses to identify whether or not one game has been played in the end preparation state ST5.

As already explained, in the end preparation state ST5, if a positive judgment is made in step S1902 in the second control process for the game section (FIG. 38) and the end preparation complete flag is not set to "1" (step S1903: NO), the end preparation complete flag is set to "1" and then processing is executed to determine whether the ending condition for the second section SC2 has been met, and the second control process for the game section in the current game (FIG. 38) is terminated. On the other hand, if the end preparation complete flag is set to "1" (step S1903: YES), processing is executed to end the second section SC2 and transition to the first section SC1 (steps S1914 to S1916). As a result, the second section SC2 ends when the game following the game in which the pseudo bonus state ST4 ended ends.

Figure 50 is a flowchart showing the pseudo bonus presentation control process executed by the presentation side MPU 92. The pseudo bonus presentation control process is repeatedly executed by the presentation side MPU 92 at a relatively short interval (e.g., every 4 milliseconds).

First, the addition process is executed (step S2801). Figure 51 is a flowchart showing the addition process. In the addition process, it is determined in step S2901 whether or not the first addition command has been received. As already explained, the first addition command is a command sent from the main MPU 72 when a transition to the addition period occurs and the number of games at the time of the transition (specifically, 20 games) is added to the remaining number of continued games in the pseudo bonus state ST4.

If the first addition command is received (step S2901: YES), the information on the number of games to be added (specifically, 20 games) contained in the first addition command is read, and the read information on the number of games is added to the continued game number counter for grasping and the continued game number counter for display in the presentation RAM 94 (step S2902). As already explained, the continued game number counter for grasping is a counter for the presentation MPU 92 to specify the remaining number of continued games in the pseudo bonus state ST4 measured by the main MPU 72. As already explained, the continued game number counter for display is a counter for the presentation MPU 92 to specify the remaining number of continued games to be displayed in the game number image G32 in the image display device 63. By adding to the value of the continued game number counter for display, the number of games to be added this time is added to the number of games in the game number image G32 displayed in the image display device 63. Note that when the number of games is added, the number of games to be added is notified to the player before the display is updated so that the number of games in the game number image G32 increases.

In the addition process, in step S2903, it is determined whether or not a second addition command has been received. As already explained, the second addition command is a command sent from the main MPU 72 when an additional win is made in the first additional lottery process (step S2610).

If the second addition command has been received (step S2903: YES), a stock lottery process is executed (step S2904). In the stock lottery process, a stock lottery table provided in the production side ROM 93 and a lottery counter that is periodically updated in the production side RAM 94 are used to determine by lottery whether or not to notify the player of the newly generated addition. In this case, there is a 50% probability that the stock lottery will be lost and the newly generated addition will be notified to the player, and there is a 50% probability that the stock lottery will be won and the newly generated addition will not be notified to the player.

If the stock lottery is unsuccessful in the stock lottery process (step S2905: NO), the information on the number of games to be added (specifically, either 10, 20, or 50 games) contained in the currently received second addition command is read, and the read information on the number of games is added to the continuing games counter for grasping and the continuing games counter for display in the presentation side RAM 94 (step S2906). By being added to the value of the continuing games counter for display, the number of games to be added this time is added to the number of games in the game number image G32 displayed on the image display device 63. Note that when the number of games is added, the number of games to be added is notified to the player before the display is updated to increase the number of games in the game number image G32.

If a stock is won in the stock lottery process (step S2905: YES), the information on the number of games to be added (specifically, either 10, 20, or 50 games) contained in the currently received second addition command is read, and the read game number information is added to the continued games counter for keeping track of the number of games in the presentation RAM 94, but is not added to the continued games counter for display (step S2907). By not adding it to the value of the continued games counter for display, the number of games to be added this time is not added to the number of games in the game number image G32 displayed on the image display device 63.

In the addition process, in step S2908, it is determined whether or not a third addition command has been received. The third addition command is a command sent from the main MPU 72 when the second addition lottery process (step S2614) is executed by starting a game during the addition period that is to be used up for the remaining number of continued games in the addition period.

If the third addition command has been received (step S2908: YES), it is determined whether or not it is the presentation side addition period (step S2909). As already explained, the addition period is a period that lasts for 10 games. However, if a game with a bet number of "2" is executed during the addition period, the second addition lottery process (step S2614) is not executed, so that the number of games is not added and the remaining number of continued games during the addition period is not consumed. Also, if a CB state (first CB state ST2 or second CB state ST3) occurs during the addition period, even if a game is executed in that CB state, the number of games is not added and the remaining number of continued games during the addition period is not consumed.

On the other hand, during the added-on period, the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 are controlled by the production side MPU 92 to execute a production corresponding to the added-on period. In particular, the image display device 63 displays a video according to a series of stories corresponding to the added-on period, and this video display is performed so that each time a new game is executed during the added-on period, the video portion corresponding to that game starts. The video display is set so that the video display according to the series of stories ends when the 10th game ends after the start of the added-on period.

In the above configuration, if a game with a bet number of "2" or a game in CB state is executed during the add-on period, the main MPU 72 stops the progress of the add-on period, while the presentation MPU 92 progresses the presentation corresponding to the add-on period. In other words, after the presentation corresponding to the add-on period has started, even if the main MPU 72 stops the progress of the add-on period, the presentation corresponding to the add-on period will progress with the start of a new game. Therefore, even if a game that stops the progress of the add-on period in the main MPU 72 occurs during the add-on period, it is possible to smoothly progress the presentation corresponding to the add-on period.

If a game that causes the master MPU 72 to stop the progress of the added-on period occurs during the added-on period, the actual added-on period controlled by the master MPU 72 will end in the game after the video display according to the series of stories corresponding to the added-on period ends. In this case, the presentation side added-on period is the period during which the presentation corresponding to the added-on period is executed under the control of the presentation side MPU 92. When the presentation side MPU 92 receives a start command for the added-on period from the master MPU 72, it sets information corresponding to 10 games, which is the initial number of games to be continued during the added-on period, to the presentation side added-on period counter provided in the presentation side RAM 94. Then, each time a new game is started, regardless of whether the game is in a non-CB state and the number of bets is "3", the value of the presentation side added-on period counter is decremented by 1, so that the presentation corresponding to the value of the presentation side added-on period counter is executed in each game, and the execution of the presentation corresponding to the added-on period is terminated when the game in which the value of the presentation side added-on period counter becomes "0" ends.

When the third addition command is received (step S2908: YES) and the presentation side addition period counter is equal to or greater than 1, indicating that the presentation side addition period is in progress (step S2909: YES), the information on the number of games to be added (specifically, either 10, 20, or 50 games) contained in the currently received third addition command is read, and the read information on the number of games is added to the continuing game number counter for grasping and the continuing game number counter for display in the presentation side RAM 94 (step S2910). By being added to the value of the continuing game number counter for display, the number of games to be added this time is added to the number of games in the game number image G32 displayed on the image display device 63. Note that when the number of games is added, the number of games to be added is notified to the player before the display is updated so that the number of games in the game number image G32 increases.

After that, the process of progressing the added-on effect is executed (step S2911). In the process of progressing the added-on effect, the value of the presentation side added-on period counter is decremented by 1. In addition, the data range to be referenced in the data table for executing the added-on effect read into presentation side RAM 94 is updated to match the start of the new game. For example, if it is the first game in the presentation side added-on period, the data range for the first game in the above data table is referenced, if it is the second game in the presentation side added-on period, the data range for the second game in the above data table is referenced, and if it is the tenth game in the presentation side added-on period, the data range for the tenth game in the above data table is referenced.

When a third addition command is received (step S2908: YES) and the value of the presentation side addition period counter is "0" so that it is not the presentation side addition period (step S2909: NO), the information on the number of games to be added that is included in the currently received third addition command (specifically, either 10 games, 20 games, or 50 games) is read out, and the read information on the number of games is added to the continued games counter for keeping track of in the presentation side RAM 94, but is not added to the continued games counter for display (step S2912). By not adding it to the value of the continued games counter for display, the number of games to be added out this time is not added to the number of games in the game number image G32 displayed on the image display device 63.

Returning to the explanation of the pseudo bonus presentation control process (FIG. 50), after the addition process is executed in step S2801, the presentation side add-on period process is executed (step S2802). FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the presentation side add-on period process.

First, it is determined whether or not it is the production side added-on period by determining whether the value of the production side added-on period counter in the production side RAM 94 is 1 or greater (step S3001). If the value of the production side added-on period counter is "0" and it is not the production side added-on period (step S3001: NO), it is determined whether or not a start command for the added-on period has been received (step S3002).

As already explained, the start command of the added-on period is a command sent from the main MPU 72 when the added-on period starts. If the start command of the added-on period is received (step S3002: YES), the presentation setting process for the added-on period is executed (step S3003). In the presentation setting process for the added-on period, information corresponding to 10 games, which is the initial number of continuous games in the added-on period, is set in the presentation side added-on period counter in the presentation side RAM 94. In addition, in the presentation setting process for the added-on period, a data table for executing the added-on presentation is read from the presentation side ROM 93 and stored in the presentation side RAM 94. As already explained, the data table has data ranges corresponding to each of games 1 to 10. For example, if it is the first game in the presentation side added-on period, the data range for the first game in the data table is referenced, if it is the second game in the presentation side added-on period, the data range for the second game in the data table is referenced, and if it is the tenth game in the presentation side added-on period, the data range for the tenth game in the data table is referenced.

If the value of the presentation side add-on period counter is 1 or more and it is within the presentation side add-on period (step S3001: YES), it is determined whether or not a game start command has been received (step S3004). As already explained, the game start command is sent when step S713 in the role selection process (Figure 16) is executed by the main MPU 72. In other words, the game start command is sent when a new game is started.

If a game start command is received (step S3004: YES), it is determined whether the number of bets for the game started this time is "2" or whether the game is in the CB state (first CB state ST2 or second CB state ST3) (step S3005). As already explained, if the game is started with the value of the bet number setting counter 74a being "3", the master MPU 72 sends the first bet number command in step S603 of the setting process at the start (FIG. 15), and if the game is started with the value of the bet number setting counter 74a being "2", the master MPU 72 sends the second bet number command in step S604 of the setting process at the start (FIG. 15). If the second bet number command is received, a positive determination is made in step S3005. In addition, since the game start command contains information corresponding to the current game state, if information indicating that the game is in the CB state is set in the game start command, a positive determination is made in step S3005.

As already explained, if a game with a bet number of "2" or a game in CB state is executed during the add-on period, the main MPU 72 stops the progress of the add-on period. On the other hand, in order to smoothly progress the presentation corresponding to the add-on period, the presentation side MPU 92 continues the presentation corresponding to the add-on period even if a game with a bet number of "2" or a game in CB state is executed during the add-on period. Therefore, during the presentation side add-on period (step S3001: YES), if a game with a bet number of "2" or a game in CB state is started (steps S3004 and S3005: YES), processing is executed to progress the presentation side add-on period in steps S3006 to S3008.

Specifically, first, the minimum number of games is selected as the number of games to be added (step S3006). As already explained, the master MPU 72 executes the second addition lottery process (step S2614) for each game during the addition period, and the second addition lottery process (step S2614) selects either 10 games, 20 games, or 50 games. That is, in step S3006, 10 games, which is the minimum number of games, is selected from these numbers of games. Then, information corresponding to the selected 10 games is added to the value of the continued game number counter for display in the presentation RAM 94 (step S3007). The number of games in the game number image G32 on the image display device 63 is increased by adding the value of the continued game number counter for display. This makes it possible to make the player recognize that the number of games during the addition period has been added by the execution of this game, even if the progress of the addition period in the master MPU 72 is stopped. When an addition to the number of games occurs, the player is notified of the number of games that has been added before the game count image G32 is updated to increase the number of games.

Here, if a game with a bet number of "2" or a game in CB state is executed during the addition period, the progress of the addition period will be stopped, whereas if the performance side addition period is configured to proceed, the addition period will continue even after the performance side addition period ends. In this case, the second addition lottery process (step S2614) is executed in the game during the continued addition period, and 10 games, 20 games, and 50 games are added. In contrast, as described above, if a game with a bet number of "2" or a game in CB state is executed during the addition period, information corresponding to 10 games, which is the minimum number of games among the number of games to be added, is added to the value of the continued game number counter for display in the performance side RAM 94. This makes it possible to prevent a notification that a number of games has been given that is greater than the number of games actually given to the player during the addition period, even if a performance is executed indicating that the number of games has been added when a game with a bet number of "2" or a game in CB state is executed during the addition period.

In addition, if a game with a bet of "2" or a game in CB state is executed during the addition period, the value of the display continued game number counter is incremented, but the value of the grasp continued game number counter is not incremented. As already explained, when the second add-on lottery process (step S2614) during the add-on period is executed by the master MPU 72 in a situation that is not the production side add-on period and a third addition command is sent, information corresponding to the number of added games set in the third addition command is added to the value of the grasp continued game number counter (step S2912). Therefore, it is possible to match the number of games grasped by the production side MPU 92 as the remaining number of continued games in pseudo bonus state ST4 with the remaining number of continued games managed by the master MPU 72.

After that, the process of progressing the added effect is executed (step S3008). The processing content of the processing of progressing the added effect is the same as the processing of progressing the added effect in step S2911 in the addition process (Figure 51). Specifically, in the processing of progressing the added effect, the value of the performance side added period counter is decremented by 1. Also, the data range to be referenced in the data table for executing the added effect read into the performance side RAM 94 is updated to match the start of the new game. For example, if it is the first game in the performance side added period, the data range for the first game in the data table is referenced, if it is the second game in the performance side added period, the data range for the second game in the data table is referenced, and if it is the tenth game in the performance side added period, the data range for the tenth game in the data table is referenced.

Returning to the explanation of the pseudo bonus presentation control process (Figure 50), after the presentation side add-on period process is executed in step S2802, it is determined whether or not a game start command has been received (step S2803). As already explained, the game start command is sent when step S713 in the role selection process (Figure 16) is executed by the main MPU 72. In other words, the game start command is sent when a new game is started.

If a game start command is received (step S2803: YES), it is determined whether the number of bets for the currently started game is "2" or whether the game is in the CB state (first CB state ST2 or second CB state ST3) (step S2804). As already described, if the game is started with the value of the bet number setting counter 74a being "3", the master MPU 72 sends the first bet number command in step S603 of the setting process at the start (FIG. 15), and if the game is started with the value of the bet number setting counter 74a being "2", the master MPU 72 sends the second bet number command in step S604 of the setting process at the start (FIG. 15). If the second bet number command is received, a positive determination is made in step S2804. In addition, since the game start command contains information corresponding to the current game state, if information indicating that the game is in the CB state is set in the game start command, a positive determination is made in step S2804.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2804, this means that one game has been played in the pseudo bonus state ST4 managed by the main MPU 72. Therefore, the value of the continued game number counter for tracking in the presentation RAM 94 and the value of the continued game number counter for display are each decremented by one (step S2805).

If a positive judgment is made in step S2804, it means that a game with a bet number of "2" or a game in the CB state has been executed in the middle of the pseudo bonus state ST4. In this case, the main MPU 72 does not treat the game as a game executed in the pseudo bonus state ST4. On the other hand, in order to facilitate the progress of the presentation in the pseudo bonus state ST4, the presentation MPU 92 advances the presentation corresponding to the pseudo bonus state ST4 even if a game with a bet number of "2" or a game in the CB state has been executed in the middle of the pseudo bonus state ST4. Therefore, in step S2806, the value of the continued game number counter for display in the presentation RAM 94 is decremented by 1, but the value of the continued game number counter for grasping in the presentation RAM 94 is not decremented by 1. This makes it possible to make the number of games grasped as the remaining continued game number in the pseudo bonus state ST4 by the presentation MPU 92 coincide with the remaining continued game number managed by the main MPU 72, while allowing the player to recognize that the remaining continued game number has decreased with the execution of the current game on the image display device 63.

When the processing of step S2805 or the processing of step S2806 is executed, the pseudo bonus presentation progress processing is executed (step S2807). In the pseudo bonus presentation progress processing, the data range to be referenced in the first pseudo bonus data table or the second pseudo bonus data table read into the presentation side RAM 94 is updated to the data range set corresponding to the next game. This causes the presentation corresponding to the pseudo bonus state ST4 to progress with the start of a new game.

Then, on the condition that the value of the display continued game number counter is "0" (step S2808: YES), it is determined whether the value of the grasp continued game number counter is 1 or more (step S2809). As already explained, if an add-on win is obtained in the first add-on lottery process (step S2610) executed by the main MPU 72 and a second addition command is sent, a stock lottery process (step S2904) is executed by the performance MPU 92, and if a stock win is obtained, the number of add-on games selected in the first add-on lottery process (step S2610) is added to the grasp continued game number counter, but is not added to the display continued game number counter. In addition, when a game with a bet number of "2" or a game in the CB state is executed during the addition period, the minimum number of games among the number of games to be added selected in the second addition lottery process (step S2614) in the main MPU 72 is added to the display continued game number counter, whereas in the second addition lottery process (step S2614) in a game executed during the subsequent addition period but not during the performance side addition period, a number of games greater than the minimum number of games may be selected and the selected number of games is added to the grasp continued game number counter. In addition, when a game with a bet number of "2" or a game in the CB state is executed in the pseudo bonus state ST4, the value of the display continued game number counter is decremented by 1, whereas the value of the grasp continued game number counter is not decremented. In other words, a situation may occur in which the number of games displayed in the game number image G32 displayed on the image display device 63 is less than the actual remaining number of continued games in the pseudo bonus state ST4.

If the value of the display continued game count counter is "0" (step S2808: YES) and the value of the grasp continued game count counter is "0" (step S2809: NO), this means that the pseudo bonus state ST4 has ended. In this case, a process for setting the pre-end effect is executed (step S2810). In the process for setting the pre-end effect, a data table is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94 so that an effect indicating that the pseudo bonus state ST4 has ended in the current game is executed. This starts a pre-end effect on the image display device 63 indicating that the pseudo bonus state ST4 has ended, and an effect corresponding to the display effect is executed on the upper lamp 61 and speaker 62.

If the value of the display continued game number counter is "0" (step S2808: YES) and the value of the grasp continued game number counter is 1 or more (step S2809: YES), it is determined whether the presentation side ending flag in the presentation side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2811). As already explained, the presentation side ending flag is a flag that the presentation side MPU 92 uses to determine whether the ending flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1". If the presentation side ending flag is not set to "1" in the pseudo bonus state ST4, the game number image G32 is displayed on the image display device 63, and if the presentation side ending flag is set to "1" in the pseudo bonus state ST4, the game number image G32 is not displayed on the image display device 63.

When the presentation side ending flag is set to "1" (step S2811: YES), the game count image G32 is not displayed on the image display device 63 in the first place, so even if the value of the continued game count counter for display becomes "0" when the value of the continued game count counter for grasping is 1 or more and the pseudo bonus state ST4 continues, the player is not notified of this situation. Therefore, in this case, the processing of steps S2812 to S2815 is not executed, so that the presentation corresponding to the pseudo bonus state ST4 that had been executed up until that point continues as is.

If the presentation side ending flag is not set to "1" (step S2811: NO), the game count image G32 is displayed on the image display device 63, and therefore the number of games displayed on the game count image G32 becomes "0" in a situation where the value of the continuing game count counter for grasping is 1 or more and the pseudo bonus state ST4 continues. In this case, by executing the processing of steps S2812 to S2815, a presentation is executed to indicate that the pseudo bonus state ST4 will continue.

Specifically, first, a lottery process for executing a revival effect is executed (step S2812). In the lottery process for executing a revival effect, a lottery is executed to determine whether a normal continuation effect or a revival effect will be executed as an effect indicating that the pseudo bonus state ST4 will continue. In the normal continuation effect, after the current game starts and the number of games displayed in the game count image G32 of the image display device 63 becomes "0", an effect is executed indicating that the pseudo bonus state ST4 will continue and an effect indicating that the number of games corresponding to the value set in the continued game count counter for grasping has been awarded. Then, the number of games displayed as the award target in that effect is added to the number of games displayed in the game count image G32.

In the revival effect, after the current game starts and the number of games displayed in the game count image G32 of the image display device 63 becomes "0", a pre-end effect is started to indicate that the pseudo bonus state ST4 will end. Then, when the game ends and a new game starts, an effect is executed to indicate that the pseudo bonus state ST4 will actually continue, and an effect to indicate that the number of games corresponding to the value set in the continued game count counter for grasping has been awarded. Then, the number of games displayed as the award target in the effect is added to the number of games displayed in the game count image G32.

In the execution lottery process for the revival effect (step S2812), the execution of the revival effect is won with a probability of 20%. If the execution of the revival effect is not won (step S2813: NO), the setting process for the normal continuation effect is executed (step S2814). In the setting process for the normal continuation effect, after the current game is started and the number of games displayed in the game number image G32 of the image display device 63 becomes "0", an effect indicating that the pseudo bonus state ST4 will continue and an effect indicating that the number of games corresponding to the value set in the continued game number counter for grasping have been awarded are executed, and further, a data table for adding the number of games displayed as the award target in the effect to the number of games displayed in the game number image G32 is read from the presentation side ROM 93 to the presentation side RAM 94. In addition, in the setting process for the normal continuation effect, the value set in the continued game number counter for grasping is set in the continued game number counter for display.

When the execution of the revival effect is selected (step S2813: YES), the setting process of the revival effect is executed (step S2815). In the setting process of the revival effect, after the current game is started and the number of games displayed in the game number image G32 of the image display device 63 becomes "0", a pre-end effect is started to indicate that the pseudo bonus state ST4 will end, and when the game ends and a new game is started, an effect is executed to indicate that the pseudo bonus state ST4 will actually continue, and an effect is executed to indicate that the number of games corresponding to the value set in the continued game number counter for grasping has been awarded, and further, a data table is read from the presentation side ROM 93 to the presentation side RAM 94 so that the number of games displayed as the award target in the effect is added to the number of games displayed in the game number image G32. In addition, in the setting process of the revival effect, the value set in the continued game number counter for grasping is set in the continued game number counter for display.

In addition to the above processes, the pseudo bonus presentation control process also determines in step S2816 whether an ending command has been received (step S2816). If an ending command has been received (step S2816: YES), a process to not display the number of remaining games is executed (step S2817). In the process to not display the number of remaining games, the presentation side ending flag in the presentation side RAM 94 is set to "1". In addition, the game count image G32 displayed on the image display device 63 is not displayed. This makes it possible to prevent the remaining number of continued games in the pseudo bonus state ST4 from being announced when a situation arises in which the ending condition for the second section SC2 is likely to be met as the pseudo bonus state ST4 progresses.

In addition to the above processes, the pseudo bonus presentation control process also determines in step S2818 whether an end command for the pseudo bonus state ST4 or a second interval initialization command has been received (step S2818). As already explained, the end command for the pseudo bonus state ST4 is a command sent from the main MPU 72 when the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends and transitions to the normal game state ST1 without the intervening end preparation state ST5 in a situation where the second interval SC2 continues even after the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends. Also, as already explained, the second interval initialization command is a command sent from the main MPU 72 when the second interval SC2 ends.

If a positive judgment is made in step S2818, the process for setting the end effect is executed (step S2819). In the process for setting the end effect, a data table is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94 so that an effect corresponding to the normal game state ST1 is executed after an effect indicating a transition to the normal game state ST1 is executed. As a result, an effect corresponding to the normal game state ST1 is executed after an effect indicating a transition to the normal game state ST1 is executed on the image display device 63, and an effect corresponding to the display effect is executed on the upper lamp 61 and the speaker 62.

Next, the progression of the pseudo bonus state ST4 will be described with reference to the time chart in Figure 53. Figure 53(a) shows the period during which one game is played, Figure 53(b) shows the period in the pseudo bonus state ST4, Figure 53(c) shows the period in the normal game state ST1, Figure 53(d) shows the period during which a pre-end effect is played indicating that the pseudo bonus state ST4 is ending, Figure 53(e) shows the period during which a revival effect is played indicating that the pseudo bonus state ST4 will continue, Figure 53(f) shows the period in the end preparation state ST5, and Figure 53(g) shows the period during which the interval display unit 67 is lit.

First, we'll explain when the revival performance is performed.

At timing t1, the first game in pseudo bonus state ST4 is executed as shown in FIG. 53(a). In this case, the pseudo bonus state ST4 is already set when the previous game ends as shown in FIG. 53(b). Also, since the interval display unit 67 is in a lit state before the transition to pseudo bonus state ST4, the interval display unit 67 is in a lit state even at timing t1 as shown in FIG. 53(g).

After that, at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 53(a), a new game is started in the pseudo bonus state ST4. In this game, the remaining number of continued games in the pseudo bonus state ST4 is 1 or more, but the value of the display continued game counter in the presentation RAM 94 is "0", and the number of games in the game number image G32 in the image display device 63 is "0". Then, it is decided to execute the revival presentation in the game. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 53(d), at the timing of t2, which is the timing when the current game is started, a pre-end presentation indicating that the pseudo bonus state ST4 will end is started. FIG. 54(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the execution contents of the pre-end presentation in the image display device 63. As shown in FIG. 54(a), in the pre-end presentation, a pre-end image G51 indicating that the pseudo bonus state ST4 will end is displayed. Note that the image display device 63 displays the game number image G32 and the acquisition number image G33 separately from the pre-end image G51, and the number of games displayed in the game number image G32 is "0".

After that, at the timing of t3, a new game is started as shown in FIG. 53(a). In this case, at the timing of t3, the pre-end effect is ended as shown in FIG. 53(d) and the revival effect is started as shown in FIG. 53(e). FIG. 54(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the execution contents of the revival effect in the image display device 63. As shown in FIG. 54(b), in the revival effect, a revival image G52 is displayed indicating that the pseudo bonus state ST4 will continue, rather than ending. This makes it possible to make a player who recognized that the pseudo bonus state ST4 will end due to the pre-end effect recognize that the pseudo bonus state ST4 will actually continue. In addition, in the revival effect, the remaining number of continued games in the pseudo bonus state ST4 is notified and the notified number of games is added to the number of games displayed in the game number image G32. Note that, during all of the above periods, the interval display unit 67 is kept lit as shown in FIG. 53(g).

Next, we will explain the case where the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends and the second section SC2 continues.

At timing t4, the first game in pseudo bonus state ST4 is executed as shown in FIG. 53(a). In this case, the pseudo bonus state ST4 is already set when the previous game ends as shown in FIG. 53(b). Also, since the interval display unit 67 is in a lit state before the transition to pseudo bonus state ST4, the interval display unit 67 is in a lit state even at timing t4 as shown in FIG. 53(g).

After that, at timing t5, a new game is started in pseudo bonus state ST4 as shown in FIG. 53(a). This game is the final game of pseudo bonus state ST4. Therefore, at timing t5, which is the timing when the current game is started as shown in FIG. 53(d), a pre-end performance indicating the end of pseudo bonus state ST4 is started. After that, at timing t6, which is the ending timing after all reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped spinning in the final game of pseudo bonus state ST4, the pre-end performance ends as shown in FIG. 53(d).

This time, even though the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends, the second section SC2 does not end. Therefore, at the timing of t6, as shown in Figures 53(b) and 53(c), the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends and the normal game state ST1 begins without transitioning to the end preparation state ST5. Also, during all of the above period, the section display unit 67 remains lit as shown in Figure 53(g). After that, at the timing of t7, the first game begins after transitioning to the normal game state ST1 as shown in Figure 53(a).

As described above, when the second interval SC2 continues after the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends, the interval display unit 67 remains lit. Therefore, even if the interval display unit 67 is checked at the timing when all reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped in the final game of the pseudo bonus state ST4 in which the pre-end performance is being executed, it is not possible to determine that the pseudo bonus state ST4 has ended. Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect that the revival performance will be executed at the timing when all reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped in the final game of the pseudo bonus state ST4 in a situation in which the pre-end performance is being executed, and it is possible to maintain the expectation that the pseudo bonus state ST4 will continue.

Next, we will explain the case where the second section SC2 also ends when the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends.

At timing t8, the first game in pseudo bonus state ST4 is executed as shown in FIG. 53(a). In this case, the pseudo bonus state ST4 is already set when the previous game ends as shown in FIG. 53(b). Also, since the interval display unit 67 is in a lit state before the transition to pseudo bonus state ST4, the interval display unit 67 is in a lit state even at timing t8 as shown in FIG. 53(g).

After that, at timing t9, a new game begins in pseudo bonus state ST4, as shown in FIG. 53(a). This game is the final game of pseudo bonus state ST4. Therefore, at timing t9, which is the timing when the current game begins, as shown in FIG. 53(d), a pre-end performance indicating the end of pseudo bonus state ST4 begins. Then, at timing t10, which is the ending timing after all reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped spinning in the final game of pseudo bonus state ST4, the pre-end performance ends, as shown in FIG. 53(d).

This time, the second section SC2 ends when the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends. Therefore, at the timing of t10, the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends and the game transitions to the end preparation state ST5, as shown in FIG. 53(b) and FIG. 53(f). After that, in the end preparation state ST5, the game is executed from the timing of t11 to the timing of t12, as shown in FIG. 53(a). Then, at the timing of t12 when the game ends, the end preparation state ST5 ends and the game transitions to the normal game state ST1, as shown in FIG. 53(c) and FIG. 53(f). Also, at the timing of t12, the section display unit 67 switches from the lit state to the unlit state, as shown in FIG. 53(g). After that, at the timing of t13, the first game after the transition to the normal game state ST1 starts, as shown in FIG. 53(a).

At time t10, a presentation is started indicating that the current pseudo bonus state ST4 will end and that the game will transition to the normal game state ST1. This presentation continues until time t12, when the end preparation state ST5 ends. However, this configuration is not limited to this, and a pre-end presentation may be continued for the game in which the pseudo bonus state ST4 has ended until the next game is started, and when the next game is started, a presentation is started indicating that the current pseudo bonus state ST4 will end and that the game will transition to the normal game state ST1.

When the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends as described above, if the second section SC2 ends, the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends and the game enters the end preparation state ST5, and the section display unit 67 is maintained in the lit state in the end preparation state ST5. Therefore, even if the section display unit 67 is checked at the timing when all reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped in the final game of the pseudo bonus state ST4 in which the pre-end performance is being executed, it is not possible to determine that the pseudo bonus state ST4 has ended. Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect that the revival performance will be executed at the timing when all reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped in the final game of the pseudo bonus state ST4 in a situation in which the pre-end performance is being executed, and it is possible to maintain the expectation that the pseudo bonus state ST4 will continue.

Next, the manner in which the number of games is added during the addition period and the manner in which the addition of the number of games is notified will be described with reference to the time chart in FIG. 55. FIG. 55(a) shows a situation in the addition period managed by the main MPU 72, FIG. 55(b) shows a period in which a game with a bet number of "3" is being played, FIG. 55(c) shows a period in which a game with a bet number of "2" is being played, FIG. 55(d) shows a situation in the presentation side addition period managed by the presentation side MPU 92, FIG. 55(e) shows the timing when the number of games is added, FIG. 55(f) shows the timing when the addition presentation progresses as games are played, and FIG. 55(g) shows the timing when the addition of the number of games is notified.

First, we will explain the case where a game with a bet of "2" and a game in the CB state (first CB state ST2 or second CB state ST3) are not executed during the top-up period.

At the timing of t1, the add-on period starts as shown in FIG. 55(a), and the presentation-side add-on period starts as shown in FIG. 55(d). After that, as shown in FIG. 55(b), a game with the bet number of "3" is repeatedly executed during the add-on period, including the timings of t2, t3, and t4. In this case, when each game starts as shown in FIG. 55(e), the number of remaining games to be continued in the pseudo bonus state ST4 is added, and as shown in FIG. 55(f), the presentation of the add-on period progresses with the start of each game, and the number of games to be added in each game is announced as shown in FIG. 55(g). Then, at the timing of t5, the number of remaining games to be continued in the add-on period becomes "0", and the add-on period ends as shown in FIG. 55(a), and the presentation-side add-on period ends as shown in FIG. 55(d).

Next, we will explain what happens when a game with a bet of "2" is played in the middle of the bonus period.

At timing t6, the add-on period starts as shown in FIG. 55(a), and the presentation-side add-on period starts as shown in FIG. 55(d). Then, at timing t7, a game with a bet of "3" is executed as shown in FIG. 55(b). In this case, the remaining number of continued games in the pseudo bonus state ST4 is added as shown in FIG. 55(e), the presentation of the add-on period progresses with the start of the game as shown in FIG. 55(f), and the number of games to be added is announced as shown in FIG. 55(f).

After that, as shown in FIG. 55(c), a game with a bet number of "2" is executed at each of the timings t8 and t9. In this case, as shown in FIG. 55(e), the remaining number of games to be continued in the pseudo bonus state ST4 is not added in each game, but as shown in FIG. 55(f), the presentation of the addition period progresses with the start of each game, and the number of games to be added is announced for each game, as shown in FIG. 55(g). The number of added games announced here is the minimum number of games (specifically, 10 games) that can be selected in the second addition lottery process (step S2614) when a game with a bet number of "3" and not in a CB state is executed during the addition period.

After that, as shown in FIG. 55(b), a game with the bet number of "3" is repeatedly executed during the addition period, including the timing of t10 and the timing of t11. In this case, as shown in FIG. 55(e), when each game is started, the remaining number of continued games in the pseudo bonus state ST4 is added, and as shown in FIG. 55(f), the presentation of the addition period progresses with the start of each game, and as shown in FIG. 55(g), the number of games that are the subject of the addition in each game is notified. Then, at the timing of t12, the remaining number of continued games in the presentation side addition period measured by the presentation side MPU 92 becomes "0", and the presentation side addition period ends as shown in FIG. 55(d). In this case, the presentation indicating that it is the addition period ends in the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63, and the execution of the presentation corresponding to the situation in the pseudo bonus state ST4 and not the addition period is resumed. However, since the remaining number of continued games in the addition period measured by the main side MPU 72 is still 1 or more, the addition period continues as shown in FIG. 55(a).

After that, as shown in FIG. 55(b), a game with a bet number of "3" is executed at each of the timings t13 and t14. In this case, when each game is started as shown in FIG. 55(e), the remaining number of games to be continued in the pseudo bonus state ST4 is added, but as shown in FIG. 55(d), the performance corresponding to the addition period has already ended, and as shown in FIG. 55(g), the number of games to be added in each game is not notified. Therefore, even though the remaining number of games to be continued in the pseudo bonus state ST4 is actually added, this is not notified to the player. In addition, the number of added games awarded at each of the timings t13 and t14 is equal to or greater than the number of added games notified at each of the timings t8 and t9 when the game with a bet number of "2" was executed.

At time t15, the number of remaining games during the added-on period measured by the main MPU 72 becomes "0." Therefore, the added-on period ends at time t15, as shown in FIG. 55(a).

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

A transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 occurs in the second section SC2. Therefore, a player expecting a transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 will expect to enter the second section SC2. In this case, when the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends, the second section SC2 may continue, and a transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 in the continued second section SC2 may occur. This makes it possible for the player to expect the occurrence of a further pseudo bonus state ST4 even if the pseudo bonus state ST4 has ended.

If the ending condition for the second section SC2 is met in the pseudo bonus state ST4, the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends with the end of the second section SC2 even if the remaining number of continued games in the pseudo bonus state ST4 is not "0". This makes it possible to prevent the pseudo bonus state ST4 from continuing for an excessively long period of time. Also, when the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends, not only will the second section SC2 continue, but there will also be cases where both the pseudo bonus state ST4 and the second section SC2 end. This makes it possible to diversify whether or not the second section SC2 continues when the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends.

In the second section SC2 and in the normal game state ST1, if the number of continued games in the second section SC2 becomes equal to or exceeds the second reference number of games, which is a number of games that is less than the upper limit number of games, or if the limited total net increase in the number of game media becomes equal to or exceeds the second reference number of acquisitions, which is a number that is less than the upper limit net increase, the pseudo bonus state ST4 is forcibly entered. This makes it possible to grant the benefit of the occurrence of the pseudo bonus state ST4 when the pre-termination period in which the ending condition of the second section SC2 is close to being met is reached in the situation in the second section SC2 and in the normal game state ST1. Therefore, even if the second section SC2 continues after the pseudo bonus state ST4 has ended, it is possible to prevent the second section SC2 from ending without a further transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4.

If the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends in a situation where the number of continued games in the second section SC2 is equal to or greater than a first reference number of games, which is a number of games that is less than the upper limit number of games, or the limited total net increase in the number of game media is equal to or greater than a first reference number of acquisitions, which is a number that is less than the upper limit net increase, the second section SC2 also ends. This makes it possible to prevent the second section SC2 from continuing when the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends in a situation where the ending condition of the second section SC2 is close to being met. This makes it possible to prevent an event from occurring where, even though a transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 has occurred, the ending condition of the second section SC2 is immediately met and the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends with the end of the second section SC2.

In a situation where the number of continued games in the second section SC2 is equal to or exceeds the first reference number of games, which is a number of games that is less than the upper limit number of games, or where the limited total net increase in the number of game media is equal to or exceeds the first reference number of acquisitions, which is a number that is less than the upper limit number of net increase, even if an addition trigger occurs, the number of games will not be added to the remaining number of continued games in the pseudo bonus state ST4. This makes it possible to prevent an event from occurring in which, despite the addition of the number of games, the ending condition of the second section SC2 is met before the added number of games is consumed, and the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends with the end of the second section SC2.

In a situation where the number of continuing games in the second section SC2 is equal to or exceeds the first reference number of games, which is a number of games that is less than the upper limit number of games, or in a situation where the limited total net increase in the number of gaming media is equal to or exceeds the first reference number of acquisitions, which is a number that is less than the upper limit net increase, the number of remaining continuing games in the pseudo bonus state ST4 is not announced. This makes it possible to make it less likely that the player will feel uncomfortable when the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends due to the ending condition of the second section SC2 being met, even though the remaining number of continuing games in the pseudo bonus state ST4 is 1 or more.

If the index value IV=10 is won in the lottery process (FIG. 16) during a transition waiting period in which the second transition confirmation flag is set to "1" and the value of the transition waiting counter is 1 or more, or in which none of the first to third transition confirmation flags are set to "1" and the value of the release game number counter 74e is 5 or less, a notification (hereinafter also referred to as a special notification) is executed to enable the player to recognize that the right reel 32R should be stopped in the first stop. In this situation, a special bell can be won by stopping the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R so that the right reel 32R is stopped in the first stop. This makes it possible to notify the player that the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 is approaching using the stopping results of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Even if a special bell is won during the transition waiting period, the transition waiting period continues without the game state transitioning to pseudo bonus state ST4 until a predetermined number of games (specifically, 5 games) have been played during the transition waiting period. This makes it possible to notify the player that the transition of the game state to pseudo bonus state ST4 is approaching, without affecting the timing of the transition of the game state to pseudo bonus state ST4, by using the stopping results of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

If a special bell win occurs during the transition waiting period, the above special notification will not be executed even if the index value IV=10 is won again in the role selection process (Figure 16) during that transition waiting period. This makes it possible to prevent excessive special notifications from being executed for players who are already aware that the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 is approaching due to the special bell win.

If the special notification is executed when the index value IV = 10 is won in the lottery process for the role (Figure 16) during the transition waiting period, but the special bell prize is not awarded, if the index value IV = 10 is won again in the lottery process for the role (Figure 16) during the same transition waiting period, the special notification will be executed again. This makes it possible to increase the opportunities for the special bell prize to be awarded during the transition waiting period.

If the transition waiting period has elapsed without the index value IV=10 being won in the lottery process for the winning combination (FIG. 16), a confirmation effect for a non-winning combination is executed on the image display device 63, etc. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that a transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 will occur in the game state even if the index value IV=10 is not won in the lottery process for the winning combination (FIG. 16) during the transition waiting period.

When the index value IV=10 is won in the role selection process (FIG. 16) in a situation that is not the transition waiting period, a notification (hereinafter also referred to as a predetermined notification) is executed to enable the player to recognize that the left reel 32L should make its first stop. Then, in this situation, the first bell win is achieved by stopping the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R so that the left reel 32L makes its first stop. This results in a special bell win during the transition waiting period, making it possible to increase the player's attention to the special bell win being achieved.

In pseudo bonus state ST4, the number of remaining games to be played in that pseudo bonus state ST4 may be increased, and if an increase is made, the number of games required until the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends will increase. Therefore, the player will expect this increase to occur in pseudo bonus state ST4. In this case, the increase may occur in the target game (a game that is not in either the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 and has a bet of "3"), whereas the increase does not occur in the non-target game (a game in the first CB state ST2, the second CB state ST3, or has a bet of "2"). This makes it possible to impose certain restrictions on the circumstances in which the increase can be performed.

In a game with a bet of "3", the above-mentioned surcharge may occur, whereas in a game with a bet of "2", the above-mentioned surcharge does not occur. This basically makes it possible for the player to play a game with a bet of "3".

In a configuration in which a game with a bet number of "3" is more advantageous to a player than a game with a bet number of "2", the above-mentioned surcharge may occur in a game with a bet number of "3", whereas the above-mentioned surcharge does not occur in a game with a bet number of "2". As a result, by playing a game with a bet number of "3" to create an advantageous situation, the above-mentioned surcharge can be automatically executed.

Not only will the above-mentioned surcharge not be applied if a non-target game is played during the surcharge period, but the surcharge period itself will not progress if a non-target game is played during the surcharge period. This makes it possible to prevent an incident from occurring in which the surcharge period progresses even though the above-mentioned surcharge is not applied, even if a non-target game is played by mistake during the surcharge period.

During the added-on period, an added-on effect is executed. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the added-on period. In this case, if a non-target game is executed during the added-on period, the progress of the added-on period is stopped, whereas the progress of the effect-side added-on period continues. This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable even if a non-target game is executed during the added-on period.

If a non-target game is executed during the add-on period, the progress of the add-on period is stopped in the non-target game, while the performance side add-on period continues, so that the performance side add-on period ends in the game before the game in which the add-on period ends. This makes it possible to execute the add-on performance for the predetermined number of games, even if a non-target game is executed during the add-on period.

If the above-mentioned addition is executed when the addition period is still ongoing even after the production side addition period has ended, the player will not be notified that the addition has occurred. This makes it possible to avoid giving a sense of discomfort to players who recognize that the addition period has ended because the production side addition period has already ended.

In a configuration in which the above-mentioned addition occurs in each game during the addition period, if a non-target game is executed during the production side addition period, a notification is executed to indicate that the minimum number of games among the number of games eligible for addition in each game during the addition period has been added, even though the above-mentioned addition is not actually executed. This makes it possible to give the player the impression that the above-mentioned addition will occur in each game during the addition period, while preventing a notification from being executed that a number of added games has been awarded that is greater than the number of added games that will actually be awarded during the addition period.

When a non-target game is played, the above-mentioned addition is not performed, but a process is performed to bring the ending condition of the second section SC2 closer to being met. Therefore, it is possible to increase the disadvantage of playing a non-target game.

Second Embodiment
In this embodiment, the combination of symbols that will result in the first CB winning is different from that of the first embodiment. Below, the configuration that differs from the first embodiment will be described. Note that the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment will be omitted.

Figure 56 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the symbol combinations that result in the first CB winning and the symbol combinations that result in the second CB winning in this embodiment.

The combination of symbols that will win the second CB is the same as in the first embodiment, where the left reel 32L has a "white 7" symbol, the center reel 32M has a "white 7" symbol, and the right reel 32R has a "BAR" symbol on the main line ML. Five or more symbols will pass the main line ML from when the "white 7" symbol passes over the main line ML on the left reel 32L until the "white 7" symbol passes over the main line ML again. Also, five or more symbols will pass over the main line ML from when the "white 7" symbol passes over the main line ML on the center reel 32M until the "white 7" symbol passes over the main line ML again. Also, five or more symbols will pass over the main line ML from when the "BAR" symbol passes over the main line ML on the right reel 32R until the "BAR" symbol passes over the main line ML again. Therefore, depending on the timing of the stop operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44, the second CB winning may not be achieved even if the second CB role is won.

On the other hand, the combination of symbols that will win the first CB is different from that of the first embodiment, and is a combination in which the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "bell" symbol, the stopped symbol on the center reel 32M is a "replay" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol on the main line ML. The number of symbols that pass on the main line ML from when the "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L passes on the main line ML until the next time the "bell" symbol passes on the main line ML is four or less. Also, the number of symbols that pass on the main line ML from when the "replay" symbol on the center reel 32M passes on the main line ML until the next time the "replay" symbol passes on the main line ML is four or less. Also, the number of symbols that pass on the main line ML from when the "bell" symbol on the right reel 32R passes on the main line ML until the next time the "bell" symbol passes on the main line ML is four or less. Therefore, if the first CB win occurs, the first CB win occurs regardless of the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the timing of the stop operation of stop buttons 42 to 44.

Figure 56(b) is a time chart showing the flow of the game when the first CB role or the second CB role is won. Figure 56(b1) shows the period in which a game with a bet number of "3" is played, Figure 56(b2) shows the period in which a game with a bet number of "2" is played, Figure 56(b3) shows the period in which the first CB role is in a winning state, Figure 56(b4) shows the period in which the second CB role is in a winning state, and Figure 56(b5) shows the period in which the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 is played.

First, we will explain what happens when the first CB role is won.

After the main MPU 72 executes the all-clear process (step S105), a game with the bet number "3" is started at the timing of t1 when neither the first CB nor the second CB has been won, as shown in FIG. 56 (b1). In this case, the first CB is won at the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 56 (b3). Then, at the timing of t2, the current game ends as shown in FIG. 56 (b1). In this case, the combination of symbols that wins the first CB role in the current game and establishes the first CB winning is a combination of symbols that does not cause so-called misses. Therefore, when the first CB winning is established at the timing of t2, the winning state of the first CB role is released as shown in FIG. 56 (b3), and the first CB state ST2 is started as shown in FIG. 56 (b5).

Next, we will explain what happens when the second CB role is won.

After the main MPU 72 executes the all-clear process (step S105), a game with the bet number of "2" is started at the timing of t3 when neither the first CB nor the second CB has been won, as shown in FIG. 56 (b2). In this case, the second CB is won at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 56 (b4). The game then ends, but the combination of symbols that results in the second CB win is a combination of symbols that may cause a so-called miss, and the second CB win is not achieved because the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated at a stop operation timing that does not result in the second CB win. Then, at the timing of t4, a game with the bet number of "2" is started as shown in FIG. 56 (b2), but the second CB win is not achieved in the game either, as the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated at a stop operation timing that does not result in the second CB win.

After that, at timing t5 and timing t6, when the second CB role is won, a game with the bet number of "3" is started as shown in FIG. 56 (b1). However, even if the second CB role is won, in a game with the bet number of "3", the second CB win is not achieved regardless of the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the timing of the stop operation of stop buttons 42 to 44. After that, at timing t7, a game with the bet number of "2" is started as shown in FIG. 56 (b2), but in this game too, the second CB win is not achieved because stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated at a stopping operation timing that does not achieve the second CB win.

According to the above configuration, instead of playing the normal game method of first playing a game with a bet number of "2" to enter the winning state of the second CB role and then starting a game with a bet number of "3", if a game with a bet number of "3" is played in a situation where the second CB role is not in the winning state, the first CB win is definitely established in the game where the first CB role is won, and the player transitions to the first CB state ST2, which is disadvantageous to the player. As a result, even if a player tries to obtain an unfair advantage by playing a game with a bet number of "3" after illegally executing the all-clear process (step S105), a transition to the first CB state ST2 occurs, making it possible to make it difficult for the fraudster to obtain an unfair advantage.

Third Embodiment
In this embodiment, the condition for transitioning from one of the first section SC1 and the second section SC2 to the other is different from that of the first embodiment. The following describes the configuration that is different from the first embodiment. Note that the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment is basically omitted.

Figure 57 is a flowchart showing the first control process of the game area in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 72.

First, it is determined whether the second section flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S3101). The second section flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to identify whether the play section is the second section SC2 or not; when the second section flag is set to "1", it is the second section SC2, and when the value of the second section flag is "0", it is the first section SC1. When the second section flag is set to "1" (step S3101: YES), the processing from step S3102 onwards is not executed. This makes it possible to prevent the processing in steps S3105 to S3108 for newly setting the play section to the second section SC2 from being executed when the play section is already in the second section SC2.

If the second section flag is not set to "1" (step S3101: NO), it is determined whether the current gaming state is a CB state (first CB state ST2 or second CB state ST3) (step S3102). If the current gaming state is a CB state (step S3102: YES), the processing from step S3103 onwards is not executed. This makes it possible to prevent the processing of steps S3105 to S3108 for newly setting the gaming section to the second section SC2 from being executed if the current gaming state is a CB state, even if it is the first section SC1.

If the current game state is not the CB state (step S3102: NO), the number of bets for the current game is determined to be "3" by determining whether the value of the bet number setting counter 74a in the main RAM 74 is "3" (step S3103). If the number of bets for the current game is "2" (step S3103: NO), the processing from step S3104 onwards is not executed. This makes it possible to prevent the processing of steps S3105 to S3108 for newly setting the game zone to the second zone SC2 from being executed in a game with the number of bets being "2", even if the game is in the first zone SC1.

If the number of bets on the current game is "3" (step S3103: YES), it is determined whether any index value IV has been won in the current role selection process (Figure 16) (step S3104). If the current role selection process (Figure 16) is a miss (step S3104: NO), the processes from step S3105 onwards are not executed. This makes it possible to prevent the processes from step S3105 to step S3108 from being executed to set the new play area to the second area SC2 if the role selection process (Figure 16) is a miss, even if the first area SC1 is selected.

If any of the index values IV is selected in the current role selection process (FIG. 16) (step S3104: YES), the second section flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1", and the number of continued games counter 74c and the total number of wins counter 74d in the main RAM 74 are both cleared to "0" (step S3105). Setting the second section flag to "1" results in the second section SC2.

Then, the branch wait flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S3106). The branch wait flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the state after the transition to the second section SC2 is a period in which it has not been determined whether the state will be the normal game state ST1 in the second section SC2 or the pseudo bonus state ST4 in the second section SC2. As will be described in detail later in this embodiment, if a game with a bet number of "3" is played in the game following the game that has transitioned to the second section SC2, the pseudo bonus state ST4 occurs, and if a game with a bet number of "2" is played in the game following the game that has transitioned to the second section SC2, the normal game state ST1 continues. In a situation in which the branch wait flag is set to "1", the branching of the game state has not yet occurred after the transition to the second section SC2 has occurred.

Then, the branch wait counter provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S3107). The branch wait counter is a counter that allows the main MPU 72 to determine whether a new game has started when the branch wait flag is set to "1". When a game ends when the branch wait flag is set to "1", the value of the branch wait counter is decremented by 1 and the value of the branch wait counter becomes "0". Then, when the next game ends, it is determined that the branch wait flag is set to "1" and the value of the branch wait counter is "0", and the game state is allocated according to the number of bets for that game.

Then, the section display unit 67 is turned on (step S3108). In the section display unit 67 turning on process, the section display unit 67 is switched from an off state to an on state. This causes the section display unit 67 to start notifying that it is the second section SC2.

Figure 58 is a flowchart showing the normal processing in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 72.

If the branch wait flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S3201: YES), and the value of the branch wait counter in the main RAM 74 is 1 or greater (step S3202: NO), this means that a transition to the second section SC2 occurred at the start of the current game, so the value of the branch wait counter is decremented by 1 (step S3203) and the normal processing is terminated. As a result, in a game in which a transition to the second section SC2 has occurred, allocation is not made to either the second section SC2 and normal game state ST1 or the second section SC2 and pseudo bonus state ST4.

On the other hand, if the branch wait flag is set to "1" (step S3201: YES) and the value of the branch wait counter is "0" (step S3202: YES), this means that the current game is the game following the game in which the transition to the second section SC2 occurred, so the branch wait flag is cleared to "0" (step S3204). Then, if the number of bets on the current game is "3" (step S3205: YES), processing is executed to start the pseudo bonus state ST4 in steps S3206 and S3207, and if the number of bets on the current game is "2" (step S3205: NO), processing is executed to continue the normal game state ST1 in steps S3208 and S3209.

To start the pseudo bonus state ST4, a start setting process is first executed (step S3206). In the start setting process, the pseudo bonus state flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1", and a value corresponding to 40 games, which is the initial number of continued games in the pseudo bonus state ST4, is set to the pseudo bonus continuation counter provided in the main RAM 74. The pseudo bonus state flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to determine whether the game state is in the pseudo bonus state ST4, and the pseudo bonus continuation counter is a counter that allows the main MPU 72 to determine the remaining number of continued games in the pseudo bonus state ST4.

Then, a start command is sent to the presentation side MPU 92 (step S3207). The start command is a command indicating that the pseudo bonus state ST4 has newly started. The start command also includes information indicating that the current initial number of continued games in the pseudo bonus state ST4 is 40 games. When the start command is received, the presentation side MPU 92 causes the presentation corresponding to the pseudo bonus state ST4 to be executed by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63. In this case, the image display device 63 displays a video corresponding to the pseudo bonus state ST4, and also displays a display indicating the number of remaining continued games in the pseudo bonus state ST4 and the number of gaming media acquired in the pseudo bonus state ST4.

As a process for continuing the normal game state ST1, first, a lottery process for the number of release games is executed (step S3208). The number of release games is a counter for the master MPU 72 to specify the number of games required until the situation in the second section SC2, which is the normal game state ST1, ends and the transition to the first section SC1 occurs in the case where the release lottery process (step S3218) described later does not result in a win for the release of the normal game state ST1. In the lottery process for the number of release games, first, a lottery table for the number of release games stored in advance in the master ROM 73 is read out, and numerical information is obtained from a lottery counter that is periodically updated in the master RAM 74. Then, the number of release games is selected by collating the numerical information obtained from the lottery counter with the lottery table for the number of release games. In this case, any one of 50 games, 100 games, 200 games, 300 games, 400 games, 500 games, 600 games, 700 games, and 800 games is selected as the number of release games. In addition, the selection probability for each of these numbers of release games is the same. However, this is not limited to this, and the probability of selecting a larger number of release games may be set high, or the probability of selecting a smaller number of release games may be set high. After executing the lottery process for the number of release games, the number of release games selected in the lottery process for the number of release games is set in the release game number counter 74e (see FIG. 9) of the master RAM 74 (step S3209). The release game number counter 74e is a counter for identifying the remaining number of release games in the master MPU 72.

In the normal processing (FIG. 58), if the branch waiting flag of the main RAM 74 is not set to "1" (step S3201: NO), the second section flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" and the current gaming section is the second section SC2 (step S3210: YES), and it is determined whether the current gaming state is the CB state (first CB state ST2 or second CB state ST3) (step S3211). If the current gaming state is the CB state (step S3211: YES), the processing from step S3212 onwards is not executed. In the processing from step S3212 onwards, the number of games required to end the situation in the second section SC2, which is the normal gaming state ST1, is subtracted as one game is played, and if the end condition of the situation is established as the game is played, the processing for ending the second section SC2 is executed. In this case, by not executing the processing from step S3212 onwards when in CB state, even if the game is played in CB state, it is possible to prevent this from being a factor in bringing closer the end of the situation in the second section SC2, which is the normal game state ST1.

If the game is not in the CB state (step S3211: NO), the number of bets in the current game is determined to be "3" by determining whether the value of the bet number setting counter 74a in the main RAM 74 is "3" (step S3212). If the number of bets in the current game is "2" (step S3212: NO), the process from step S3213 onwards is not executed. As already explained, in the process from step S3213 onwards, the number of games required to end the situation in the second section SC2 and the normal gaming state ST1 is subtracted as one game is played, and if the end condition of the situation is established as the game is played, the process for ending the second section SC2 is executed. In this case, by not executing the process from step S3213 onwards, even if a game with the number of bets "2" is played, it is possible to prevent it from becoming a factor that brings the end of the situation in the second section SC2 and the normal gaming state ST1 closer.

If the number of bets for the current game is "3" (step S3212: YES), the value of the release game number counter 74e in the master RAM 74 is decremented by 1 (step S3213). If the value of the release game number counter 74e after decrementing by 1 is "0" (step S3214: YES), the setting process for the end preparation state ST5 is executed (step S3215). In this setting process, the end preparation state flag in the master RAM 74 is set to "1". The end preparation state flag is a flag for the master MPU 72 to identify that the end preparation state ST5 is in progress, and setting the end preparation state flag to "1" changes the game state to the end preparation state ST5. After that, the end preparation complete flag in the master RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S3216). As already explained, the end preparation complete flag is a flag for the master MPU 72 to identify whether or not one game has been played in the end preparation state ST5.

In the end preparation state ST5, as in the first embodiment, if a positive judgment is made in step S1902 in the second control process (FIG. 38) of the game section and the end preparation completion flag is not set to "1" (step S1903: NO), the end preparation completion flag is set to "1" and then a process is executed to determine whether the ending condition of the second section SC2 is met, and the second control process (FIG. 38) of the game section in this game is terminated. On the other hand, if the end preparation completion flag is set to "1" (step S1903: YES), a process is executed to terminate the second section SC2 and transition to the first section SC1 (steps S1914 to S1916). This ends the second section SC2. Note that if the end preparation state ST5 is not set and the value of the release game number counter 74e becomes "0", the second section SC2 may be terminated in that game.

If the value of the release game number counter 74e after subtracting 1 is not "0" (step S3214: NO), it is determined whether or not any of the index values IV = 11 to 15 has been won in the lottery process for the current role (Figure 16) (step S3217). If a positive determination is made in step S3217, a release lottery process is executed (step S3218). In the release lottery process, a release lottery table provided in the main ROM 73 and a lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74 are used to determine by lottery whether or not to end the second section SC2. In the lottery process of the hand in this game (FIG. 16), if the index value IV=11 is won, there is a 20% probability of the release winning that ends the second section SC2, if the index value IV=12 is won, there is a 10% probability of the release winning that ends the second section SC2, if the index value IV=13 is won, there is a 40% probability of the release winning that ends the second section SC2, if the index value IV=14 is won, there is a 30% probability of the release winning that ends the second section SC2, and if the index value IV=15 is won, there is a 20% probability of the release winning that ends the second section SC2. In this case, the lower the probability of the index value IV being won in the lottery process of the hand (FIG. 16), the higher the probability of the release winning that ends the second section SC2. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of winning an index value IV with a low winning probability in the lottery process of the hand (FIG. 16).

If the release lottery process results in a win for release (step S3219: YES), the process of setting the end preparation state ST5 is executed in step S3215, and the end preparation complete flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" in step S3216. The processing contents of steps S3215 and S3216 have already been explained. As a result, the game state changes to the end preparation state ST5, and the second section SC2 ends in the game following the current game, transitioning to the first section SC1. Note that if the end preparation state ST5 is not set and the release lottery process results in a win for release, the second section SC2 may end in that game.

Figure 59 is a flowchart showing the pseudo bonus processing in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 72.

Steps S3301 to S3308 execute the same processing as steps S2701 to S2708 of the pseudo bonus processing (FIG. 49) in the first embodiment. If a negative judgment is made in step S3304, if the processing of step S3307 is executed, or if the processing of step S3308 is executed, it is determined whether the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter in the main RAM 74 is "0" (step S3309). If the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter is "0" (step S3309: YES), the pseudo bonus state flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S3310). Thereafter, a lottery process for the number of games to be released is executed (step S3311).

As already explained, the number of release games is a counter for the master MPU 72 to determine the number of games required until the state in the second section SC2 in which the normal gaming state ST1 is terminated and the transition to the first section SC1 occurs in the case where the release lottery process (step S3216) does not result in a release win for the normal gaming state ST1. In the lottery process for the number of release games, a lottery table for the number of release games pre-stored in the master ROM 73 is first read out, and numerical information is obtained from a lottery counter that is periodically updated in the master RAM 74. The number of release games is then selected by comparing the numerical information obtained from the lottery counter with the lottery table for the number of release games. In this case, any of 50 games, 100 games, 200 games, 300 games, 400 games, 500 games, 600 games, 700 games, and 800 games is selected as the number of release games. In addition, the probability of selecting each of these numbers of release games is the same. However, this is not limited to this, and the probability of selecting a larger number of release games may be set high, or the probability of selecting a smaller number of release games may be set high. After executing the lottery process for the number of release games, the number of release games selected in the lottery process for the number of release games is set in the release game number counter 74e of the main RAM 74 (step S3312).

Then, an end command for the pseudo bonus state ST4 is sent to the presentation side MPU 92 (step S3313). The end command for the pseudo bonus state ST4 is a command for making the presentation side MPU 92 recognize that the pseudo bonus state ST4 has ended. When the presentation side MPU 92 receives the end command for the pseudo bonus state ST4, it controls the upper lamp 61, speaker 62 and image display device 63 so that a presentation corresponding to the normal game state ST1 is started after a presentation indicating that the pseudo bonus state ST4 has ended is executed.

Next, the progress of the second section SC2 will be described with reference to the time chart in Figure 60. Figure 60(a) shows the situation in the second section SC2, Figure 60(b) shows the period during which a game with a bet number of "3" is being played, Figure 60(c) shows the period during which a game with a bet number of "2" is being played, Figure 60(d) shows the period during which the normal game state ST1 is in effect, Figure 60(e) shows the period during which the pseudo bonus state ST4 is in effect, Figure 60(f) shows the timing when the remaining number of release games becomes "0", and Figure 60(g) shows the timing when a release win occurs in the release lottery process (step S3218).

In a situation where the first section SC1 is in progress, at time t1, a game with the number of bets being "3" is executed as shown in FIG. 60(b). The game is not in the CB state (first CB state ST2 or second CB state ST3), and furthermore, a winning combination has been achieved in the combination lottery process (FIG. 16) executed in the game. Therefore, at time t1, the game section transitions from the first section SC1 to the second section SC2 as shown in FIG. 60(a).

Then, at time t2, the next game is started for the game in which the transition to the second section SC2 has occurred. In this case, the game started at time t2 is a game with a bet of "2" as shown in FIG. 60(c). In the game following the game in which the transition to the second section SC2 has occurred, a branch occurs to either a situation in which the game is in the second section SC2 and normal game state ST1, or a situation in which the game is in the second section SC2 and pseudo bonus state ST4. When a game with a bet of "2" is played as the game in question, the situation in which the game is in the second section SC2 and normal game state ST1 will continue as shown in FIG. 60(a) and FIG. 60(d).

After that, as shown in FIG. 60(b), a game with a bet number of "3" is repeated including times t3 and t4. Then, as the game with a bet number of "3" that started at time t4 is executed, the number of remaining games to be released becomes "0" at time t5, which is the time when the game ends, as shown in FIG. 60(f). Therefore, at time t5, as shown in FIG. 60(a), the second section SC2 ends and the play section becomes the first section SC1. In other words, the situation becomes one in the first section SC1 and normal play state ST1.

After that, in a situation where the first section SC1 is in progress, at the timing t6, a game with the number of bets being "3" is executed as shown in FIG. 60(b). The game is not in the CB state (first CB state ST2 or second CB state ST3), and furthermore, a winning combination has been obtained in the combination lottery process (FIG. 16) executed in the game. Therefore, at the timing t6, the game section transitions from the first section SC1 to the second section SC2 as shown in FIG. 60(a).

Then, at time t7, the next game is started for the game in which the transition to the second section SC2 has occurred. In this case, the game started at time t7 is a game with a bet of "3" as shown in FIG. 60(b). In the game following the game in which the transition to the second section SC2 has occurred, a branch occurs to either a situation in which the game is in the second section SC2 and is in the normal game state ST1, or a situation in which the game is in the second section SC2 and is in the pseudo bonus state ST4. When a game with a bet of "3" is executed as the game, at time t8, which is the timing when the game ends, the normal game state ST1 ends and the game transitions to the pseudo bonus state ST4 as shown in FIG. 60(d) and FIG. 60(e).

After that, as shown in FIG. 60(b), a game with a bet number of "3" is repeated including times t9 and t10. Then, as a result of the game with a bet number of "3" that started at time t10 being played, the number of remaining games to be continued in pseudo bonus state ST4 becomes "0" at time t11, which is the time when the game ends. Therefore, at time t11, as shown in FIG. 60(d) and FIG. 60(e), pseudo bonus state ST4 ends and normal game state ST1 begins. In other words, the situation becomes one in the second section SC2 and normal game state ST1.

After that, as shown in FIG. 60(b), the game with the bet number of "3" is repeated including the timing of t12 and the timing of t13. Then, in the release lottery process (step S3218) executed at the timing of t14, which is the ending timing of the game with the bet number of "3" that started at the timing of t13, a release win is obtained as shown in FIG. 60(g), and at the timing of t14, the second section SC2 ends as shown in FIG. 60(a) and the play section becomes the first section SC1. In other words, the situation becomes one in the first section SC1 and normal play state ST1.

When the number of continued games in the second section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games or the limited total net increase in the number of game media in the second section SC2 reaches the upper limit net increase in the number of game media in the second section SC2 in the pseudo bonus state ST4, the second section SC2 and the pseudo bonus state ST4 end, and the state becomes the first section SC1 and the normal game state ST1. When the number of continued games in the second section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games or the limited total net increase in the number of game media in the second section SC2 reaches the upper limit net increase in the number of game media in the second section SC2 in the normal game state ST1, the second section SC2 ends, and the state becomes the first section SC1 and the normal game state ST1.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

When the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends, the second section SC2 continues, but during this continued second section SC2, a second transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 does not occur. This makes it possible to forcibly create a situation in which the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 is restricted once the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends, while keeping constant the conditions for transitioning to the pseudo bonus state ST4 when the second section SC2 is newly started.

The second section SC2 ends when the release condition is met in a situation where the second section SC2 is in the normal game state ST1. Then, when the second section SC2 ends, a transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 may occur as the second section SC2 starts anew. Therefore, when the second section SC2 is in the normal game state ST1, the player will hope that the release condition will be met.

In a configuration in which the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends and the game enters the second section SC2 and normal game state ST1, the second section SC2 ends based on the completion of the determined number of games to be released when the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends. This allows the player to expect that the number of games to be released will be completed early when the game is in the second section SC2 and normal game state ST1.

In a configuration in which the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends and the player is in the second section SC2 and normal gaming state ST1, the second section SC2 ends when a release win is made in the release lottery process (step S3218). As a result, in a situation in which the player is in the second section SC2 and normal gaming state ST1, the player will expect the release lottery process (step S3218) to be executed and for the player to win the release lottery process (step S3218).

If the ending condition for the second section SC2 is met in the pseudo bonus state ST4, the pseudo bonus state ST4 will end with the end of the second section SC2, even if the number of remaining continuing games in the pseudo bonus state ST4 is one or more. This makes it possible to prevent the pseudo bonus state ST4 from continuing for an excessively long period of time. Also, when the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends, not only will the second section SC2 continue, but there will also be cases where both the pseudo bonus state ST4 and the second section SC2 end. This makes it possible to diversify whether or not the second section SC2 continues when the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends.

The start of the second section SC2 may cause the game state to transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4. As a result, when the game state is in the second section SC2 and normal game state ST1, the player will expect the second section SC2 to end early.

The game following the game in which the second section SC2 is started becomes the game to which the branch is to be made, and a game with a bet amount of "3" is executed as the game to which the branch is to be made, causing a transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4. This basically makes it possible to transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 when the second section SC2 is newly started.

When a game with a bet of "2" is executed as the game to be branched off, the situation becomes the second section SC2 and normal game state ST1. The manager of the amusement hall who thinks it is undesirable for the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 to occur immediately when the amusement hall opens for business can intentionally create a situation in the second section SC2 and normal game state ST1 by generating the second section SC2 in advance and executing a game with a bet of "2" as the game to be branched off.

As described above, in the second section SC2 that occurs when a game with a bet of "2" is executed as the branching target game, and the game is in the normal game state ST1, no transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 occurs. This makes it possible to intentionally create a situation in which no transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 occurs for a while after the game parlor opens for business.

The second section SC2 occurs based on the execution of a game with a bet of "3" in the first section SC1. Therefore, it is considered that the player will also play the game subject to the branch with the bet of "3". This basically makes it possible to transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 when the second section SC2 is newly generated.

The second section SC2 is set based on whether any role is won in the role selection process (FIG. 16) in the first section SC1. This allows the transition from the first section SC1 to the second section SC2 to occur quickly.

The configuration is not limited to the branching game being the game next to the game set in the second section SC2, and the branching game may be two games, three games, or four games after the game set in the second section SC2. Also, the number of games required from the game set in the second section SC2 until the branching game occurs may be determined by lottery.

Fourth Embodiment
In this embodiment, the condition for transitioning to the pseudo bonus state ST4 when transitioning from the first section SC1 to the second section SC2 is different from that of the first embodiment. The following describes the configuration that differs from the first embodiment. Note that the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment is basically omitted.

Figure 61 is a flowchart showing the role selection process in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 72.

In step S3401, a random number is obtained to be used when determining whether the role is a hit or a miss, similar to step S701 in the role selection process (FIG. 16) in the first embodiment described above. After that, a selection table for determining whether the role is a hit or a miss is read from the main ROM 73 (step S3402). In this embodiment, the contents of the role selection table when betting three coins, which is selected when the number of bets is "3" in the non-CB state, and the role selection table when betting two coins, which is selected when the number of bets is "2" in the non-CB state, differ from those in the first embodiment described above.

Figure 62(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the role selection table when three coins are bet in this embodiment, and Figure 63 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the role selection table when two coins are bet in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 62(a), the role selection table when 3 coins are bet has index values IV set to "1 to 17" in the same manner as the role selection table when 3 coins are bet in the first embodiment (FIG. 17). The point values PV set for each of these index values IV=1 to 17 are the same as those in the role selection table when 3 coins are bet in the first embodiment (FIG. 17). In addition, the winning data set for each of index values IV=1 to 16 is the same as those in the role selection table when 3 coins are bet in the first embodiment (FIG. 17). However, the type of winning data set for index value IV=17 is different from that in the role selection table when 3 coins are bet in the first embodiment (FIG. 17). Specifically, not only the first CB winning data but also the tenth compensation winning data is set for index value IV=17.

Figure 62 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the combination of symbols that will result in the 10th supplementary winning. If the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "bell" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "replay" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol, then the 10th supplementary winning will occur. When the 10th supplementary winning occurs, the number of gaming media to be awarded will be "1".

As shown in FIG. 63, the role selection table when 2 coins are bet has index values IV set to "1 to 17" in the same manner as the role selection table when 2 coins are bet in the first embodiment (FIG. 18). The point values PV set for each of these index values IV=1 to 17 are the same as those in the role selection table when 2 coins are bet in the first embodiment (FIG. 18). In addition, the winning data set for each of index values IV=1 to 16 is the same as those in the role selection table when 2 coins are bet in the first embodiment (FIG. 18). However, the type of winning data set for index value IV=17 is different from that in the role selection table when 2 coins are bet in the first embodiment (FIG. 18). Specifically, not only the 2nd CB winning data but also the 10th compensation winning data is set for index value IV=17.

Figure 64 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the winning mode that can be achieved when the role selection table for three bets or the role selection table for two bets is selected. As shown in Figure 64, for index values IV = 1 to 16, the relationship between the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the winning mode that can be achieved is the same as in the first embodiment above. If a win occurs with index value IV = 17, regardless of the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, if the number of bets is "3", the first CB win or the tenth supplementary win is achieved, and if the number of bets is "2", the second CB win or the tenth supplementary win is achieved.

The symbol combination that establishes the first CB winning and the symbol combination that establishes the second CB winning are set so as not to stop on the main line ML depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, whereas the symbol combination that establishes the tenth supplementary winning is set to stop on the main line ML regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. And, when both the first CB winning data and the tenth supplementary winning data are set in the main RAM 74, or when both the second CB winning data and the tenth supplementary winning data are set in the main RAM 74, the symbols that make up the symbol combination that establishes the tenth supplementary winning are displayed stopped on the main line ML in priority over the symbols that make up the symbol combination that establishes the first CB winning and the symbols that make up the symbol combination that establishes the second CB winning. Therefore, whether the number of bets is "3" or "2", if a win occurs with index value IV=17, the 10th supplementary win is achieved without fail, regardless of the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, and the achievement of the 1st CB win or the 2nd CB win is avoided. This makes it possible to prevent the 1st CB win or the 2nd CB win from being achieved in a game in which index value IV=17 is won.

When the first CB winning data and the second CB winning data are stored in the main RAM 74, they are stored and held in the main RAM 74 until the corresponding CB win is achieved. Therefore, even if the 10th supplementary win is achieved as a priority in a game in which index value IV = 17 is won, the state in which the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 will be carried over to the next game.

Returning to the explanation of the lottery process for winning or losing a role (FIG. 61), after the lottery table is selected in step S3402, the index value IV is set to "1" (step S3403), and then the judgment value DV used when judging whether the role is a winning or losing role is set (step S3404). In this judgment value setting process, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the current judgment value DV to set a new judgment value DV. Note that in the initial judgment value setting process, the value of the random number acquired in step S3401 is set as the current judgment value DV, and the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV (index value IV=1) is added to this random number value to set the new judgment value DV.

Then, a judgment is made as to whether the role corresponding to the index value IV is a hit or a miss (step S3405). In the hit or miss judgment, it is judged whether the judgment value DV exceeds "65535". If the judgment value DV does not exceed "65535" (step S3405: NO), it means that the role corresponding to the index value IV has not been played. In such a case, the index value IV is incremented by 1 (step S3406), and it is judged whether there is a role corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether there is a target for which a hit or a miss judgment should be made (step S3407). Specifically, it is judged whether the index value IV incremented by 1 exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a target for which a hit or a miss judgment should be made, the process returns to step S3404, and the hit or a miss judgment of the role continues. At this time, in step S3404, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the judgment value DV used to judge whether the previous role was a hit or miss (i.e., the current judgment value DV) to obtain a new judgment value DV, and in step S3405, the role is judged to be a hit or miss based on the judgment value DV.

If it exceeds "65535" (step S3405: YES), the first control process for the game area is executed (step S3408), and then a winning data acquisition process is executed to set the winning combination data corresponding to the index value IV at that time in the master RAM 74 (step S3409). In other words, in this embodiment, if any of index values IV = 1 to 17 is won, the first control process for the game area (step S3408) is executed before the winning data acquisition process (step S3409) is executed. The first control process for the game area in this embodiment (step S3408) will be explained later.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3407, or if the process of step S3409 is executed, this means that the judgment of whether the winning combination was successful or not has been completed. In this case, a first stop information setting process is executed to set stop information for reel stop control (step S3410). Then, in step S3411, an advantageous lottery process at the start of the game is executed, in step S3412, a stop order notification control process is executed, and in step S3413, a game start command transmission process is executed. The process contents of steps S3410 to S3413 are the same as steps S709, S710, S712, and S713 of the lottery process for winning combinations in the first embodiment (FIG. 16).

Figure 65 is a flowchart showing the first control process of the play area executed in step S3408 in the role selection process (Figure 61).

First, it is determined whether the second section flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S3501). The second section flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to identify whether the play section is the second section SC2 or not; when the second section flag is set to "1", it is the second section SC2, and when the value of the second section flag is "0", it is the first section SC1. When the second section flag is set to "1" (step S3501: YES), the processing from step S3502 onwards is not executed. As a result, when it is the second section SC2, the direct hit lottery processing in step S3506 and the lottery processing for the number of games to be released in step S3510 are not executed.

If the second section flag is not set to "1" (step S3501: NO), it is determined whether the current game state is a CB state (first CB state ST2 or second CB state ST3) (step S3502). If the current game state is a CB state (step S3502: YES), the processing from step S3503 onwards is not executed. As a result, if the current game state is a CB state even if it is the first section SC1, the processing to set it to the second section SC2 in step S3504, the direct hit lottery processing in step S3506, and the lottery processing for the number of games to be released in step S3510 are not executed.

If the current game state is not the CB state (step S3502: NO), the number of bets for the current game is determined to be "3" by determining whether the value of the bet number setting counter 74a in the main RAM 74 is "3" (step S3503). If the number of bets for the current game is "2" (step S3503: NO), the processing from step S3504 onwards is not executed. As a result, in a game where the number of bets is "2" even if it is the first section SC1, the processing for setting the second section SC2 in step S3504, the direct hit lottery processing in step S3506, and the lottery processing for the number of games to be released in step S3510 are not executed.

If the number of bets on the current game is "3" (step S3503: YES), the second section flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1", and the number of continued games counter 74c and the total number of wins counter 74d in the main RAM 74 are both cleared to "0" (step S3504). Setting the second section flag to "1" results in the second section SC2.

Then, it is determined whether the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 (step S3505). Here, as already explained, in the lottery process for the winning combination (FIG. 61), the first control process for the game area (step S3408) is executed before the winning data acquisition process (step S3409) is executed. Therefore, even if the lottery process for the winning combination (FIG. 61) in the current game has won with index value IV=17, the first control process for the game area (FIG. 65) is executed before the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data set to the index value IV=17 is stored in the main RAM 74, so the first CB winning data and the second CB winning data are not stored in the main RAM 74. Therefore, even if the winning combination has been won with index value IV=17 in the current game, a negative determination is made in step S3505. On the other hand, if the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data was stored in the main RAM 74 before the start of the current game, a positive determination will be made in step S3505.

If a positive determination is made in step S3505, a direct hit lottery process is executed (step S3506). In the direct hit lottery process, a direct hit lottery table provided in the main ROM 73 and a lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74 are used to determine by lottery whether or not a direct hit wins in the pseudo bonus state ST4. In the lottery process for the role in this game (FIG. 61), if the index value IV is other than 11 to 15, there is a 10% probability of a direct win in the pseudo bonus state ST4, if the index value IV is 11, there is a 20% probability of a direct win in the pseudo bonus state ST4, if the index value IV is 12, there is a 15% probability of a direct win in the pseudo bonus state ST4, if the index value IV is 13, there is a 60% probability of a direct win in the pseudo bonus state ST4, if the index value IV is 14, there is a 30% probability of a direct win in the pseudo bonus state ST4, and if the index value IV is 15, there is a 20% probability of a direct win in the pseudo bonus state ST4. In this case, the lower the probability of a winning index value IV in the lottery process for the role (FIG. 61), the higher the probability of a direct win in the pseudo bonus state ST4. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of winning an index value IV, which has a low probability of winning, during the role selection process (Figure 61).

If the direct hit lottery process results in a direct hit win to pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S3507: YES), the first transition confirmation flag in the master RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S3508). As in the first embodiment, the first transition confirmation flag is a flag that allows the master MPU 72 to identify that a direct hit win to pseudo bonus state ST4 has occurred in the direct hit lottery process (step S3506) executed when transitioning to the second section SC2. If the first transition confirmation flag is set to "1", processing is executed to transition the game state to pseudo bonus state ST4 when the current game ends, as in the first embodiment.

Then, the section display unit 67 is turned on (step S3509). In the section display unit 67 turning on process, the section display unit 67 is switched from an off state to an on state. This causes the section display unit 67 to start notifying that the section is in the second section SC2.

If the direct hit lottery process does not result in a direct hit win to the pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S3507: NO), a lottery process for the number of release games is executed (step S3510). The number of release games is a counter for the master MPU 72 to specify the number of games required until the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 occurs when the transition lottery process (step S2112) in the first embodiment does not result in a win to transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4. In the lottery process for the number of release games, a lottery table for the number of release games pre-stored in the master ROM 73 is first read out, and numerical information is obtained from a lottery counter that is periodically updated in the master RAM 74. Then, the number of release games is selected by collating the numerical information obtained from the lottery counter with the lottery table for the number of release games. In this case, any one of 50 games, 100 games, 200 games, 300 games, 400 games, 500 games, 600 games, 700 games, and 800 games is selected as the number of release games. In addition, the selection probability for each of these numbers of release games is the same. However, this is not limited to this, and the probability of selecting a larger number of release games may be set high, or the probability of selecting a smaller number of release games may be set high. After executing the lottery process for the number of release games, the number of release games selected in the lottery process for the number of release games is set in the release game number counter 74e provided in the main RAM 74 (step S3511).

After that, a lighting lottery process for the section display unit 67 is executed (step S3512) in the same manner as step S1812 in the first control process (FIG. 37) for the game section in the first embodiment. If immediate lighting is selected in the lighting lottery process for the section display unit 67 (step S3512) (step S3513: YES), a lighting process for the section display unit 67 is executed (step S3514). In the lighting process for the section display unit 67, the section display unit 67 is switched from an unlit state to a lit state. This causes the section display unit 67 to start notifying the user that it is the second section SC2. On the other hand, if waiting for lighting is selected in the lighting lottery process for the section display unit 67 (step S3512) (step S3513: NO), the lighting waiting flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S3515). The standby flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to identify that the section display unit 67 is waiting to be switched from an off state to an on state in the second section SC2.

Here, the value set in the release game number counter 74e is decremented by 1 in step S2217 in the normal processing (FIG. 41) as in the first embodiment, and if the value of the release game number counter 74e after decrementing by 1 becomes "0" (step S2218: YES), the first start setting process (step S2213) is executed to transition the game state to the pseudo bonus state ST4. In this case, when the value of the release game number counter 74e becomes "0", regardless of whether the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 in that game, the first start setting process (step S2213) is executed to transition the game state to the pseudo bonus state ST4. Also, in this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, in the second section SC2, a transition lottery process (step S2112) is executed in the advantageous lottery process (FIG. 40) at the start of the game, and if a transition is selected in the transition lottery process, a first start setting process (step S2213) is executed in the normal process (FIG. 41), thereby transitioning the game state to the pseudo bonus state ST4.

In other words, if either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is not stored in the main RAM 74 when transitioning to the second section SC2, the direct hit lottery process (step S3506) for determining whether or not to transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 is not executed. In contrast, when the second section SC2 is continuing, the process for transitioning to the pseudo bonus state ST4 is executed regardless of whether either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74. As a result, when the second section SC2 is newly started, a certain condition is imposed on transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4, that is, that either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, whereas when the second section SC2 is continuing, such a condition is not imposed on transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4.

Next, the manner in which the transition to the second section SC2 occurs will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 66. FIG. 66(a) shows the period during which operating power is supplied to the main MPU 72, FIG. 66(b) shows the period during which a game with a bet number of "3" is being played, FIG. 66(c) shows the timing when the lottery for the winning combination (steps S3401 to S3407) is performed, FIG. 66(d) shows the timing when the first control process (FIG. 65) for the play section is performed, FIG. 66(e) shows the period during which the CB winning data (first CB winning data or second CB winning data) is stored in the main RAM 74, FIG. 66(f) shows the situation in the second section SC2, FIG. 66(g) shows the period during which the normal play state ST1 is played, and FIG. 66(h) shows the period during which the pseudo bonus state ST4 is played.

First, we will explain the case where the direct hit lottery process (step S3506) is executed but a transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 does not occur.

When the power to the slot machine 10 is turned on at time t1 while CB winning data is stored in the master RAM 74, the supply of operating power to the master MPU 72 begins at time t1, as shown in FIG. 66(a). In this case, the first section SC1 is reached, and the normal gaming state ST1 is reached, as shown in FIG. 66(f) and FIG. 66(g).

In the first embodiment, when the partial clear process (step S104) is executed in the main process (FIG. 10), the first CB winning data is cleared but the second CB winning data is not cleared, and when the full clear process (step S105) is executed, both the first CB winning data and the second CB winning data are cleared. In this embodiment, both the first CB winning data and the second CB winning data are cleared regardless of whether the partial clear process (step S104) or the full clear process (step S105) is executed. Therefore, when the set value update process (step S106) is executed, the main RAM 74 is in a state where neither the first CB winning data nor the second CB winning data is stored. This time, the set value update process (step S106) is not executed in the main process (FIG. 10) that is executed when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started, so the state in which the CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 is maintained.

After that, at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 66(b), a game with the bet number of "3" is started. In this case, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 66(c), a lottery for a winning combination (steps S3401 to S3407) is executed. In the lottery for the winning combination, one of the index values IV is won. Therefore, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 66(d), the first control process (FIG. 65) for the game section is executed. As a result, at the timing of t4, a transition to the second section SC2 occurs as shown in FIG. 66(f). In addition, in the first control process (FIG. 65) for the game section, a direct lottery process (step S3506) is executed. However, since a direct win does not occur in the direct lottery process (step S3506), a transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 does not occur in this game, and the normal game state ST1 is maintained as shown in FIG. 66(g). Then, at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 66(b), this game ends.

Next, we will explain the case where the direct hit lottery process (step S3506) is executed and a transition to pseudo bonus state ST4 occurs.

When the slot machine 10 is turned on at time t6 while the CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 begins at time t6, as shown in FIG. 66(a). In this case, as shown in FIG. 66(f) and FIG. 66(g), the first section SC1 is reached and the normal gaming state ST1 is in effect. Also, since the setting value update process (step S106) was not executed this time in the main process (FIG. 10) that was executed when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 began, the state in which the CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 is maintained.

After that, at the timing of t7, as shown in FIG. 66(b), a game with the bet number of "3" is started. In this case, at the timing of t8, as shown in FIG. 66(c), a lottery for a winning combination (steps S3401 to S3407) is executed. In the lottery for the winning combination, one of the index values IV is won. Therefore, at the timing of t9 thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66(d), the first control process (FIG. 65) for the game section is executed. As a result, at the timing of t9, a transition to the second section SC2 occurs as shown in FIG. 66(f). In addition, in the first control process (FIG. 65) for the game section, a direct lottery process (step S3506) is executed. Then, a direct win occurs in the direct lottery process (step S3506). Therefore, at the timing of t10 when the current game ends, as shown in FIG. 66(g) and FIG. 66(h), the game state transitions from the normal game state ST1 to the pseudo bonus state ST4.

Next, we will explain the case where the normal game state ST1 continues without executing the direct hit lottery process (step S3506).

When the power to the slot machine 10 is turned on at time t11 while CB winning data is stored in the master RAM 74, the supply of operating power to the master MPU 72 begins at time t11, as shown in FIG. 66(a). In this case, the first section SC1 is reached, and the normal gaming state ST1 is reached, as shown in FIG. 66(f) and FIG. 66(g).

Here, the main process (FIG. 10), which is executed when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started, executes the setting value update process (step S106). Therefore, the partial clear process (step S104) or the full clear process (step S105) is executed, and the CB winning data in the main RAM 74 is cleared at timing t12, as shown in FIG. 66(e). In other words, no CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74.

After that, at the timing of t13, a game with the number of bets being "3" is started as shown in FIG. 66(b). In this case, at the timing of t14, a lottery for a winning combination (steps S3401 to S3407) is executed as shown in FIG. 66(c). In the lottery for the winning combination, the index value IV=17, which is set with the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data and the tenth compensation winning data, is won. Therefore, at the timing of t15 thereafter, the first control process (FIG. 65) for the game section is executed as shown in FIG. 66(d). As a result, at the timing of t15, a transition to the second section SC2 occurs as shown in FIG. 66(f).

However, the first control process for the play area (Figure 65) is executed before the winning data acquisition process (step S3409) in the role selection process (Figure 61). Therefore, even if index value IV = 17 is won in the current game, the CB winning data is not stored in the main RAM 74 when the first control process for the play area (Figure 65) is being executed. Therefore, the direct hit winning process (step S3506) is not executed in the first control process for the play area (Figure 65), and no transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 occurs in the current game. Therefore, the normal play state ST1 is maintained as shown in Figure 66 (g).

Then, at time t16, which is the timing after the first control process (FIG. 65) of the game area is completed, the winning data acquisition process (step S3409) is executed, and the CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 as shown in FIG. 66(e). Then, at time t17, as shown in FIG. 66(b), the current game ends.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

Whether or not a transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 can occur when the second section SC2 is set depends on whether or not the situation set in the second section SC2 is a situation in which CB winning data (first CB winning data or second CB winning data) is stored in the main RAM 74. As a result, the player needs to pay attention not only to the fact that the second section SC2 is set, but also to whether or not the situation is one in which CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74.

When the supply of operating power starts, a partial clear process (step S104) or a full clear process (step S105) is executed, resulting in a state in which no CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74. On the other hand, even if the second section SC2 ends, this does not trigger a state in which no CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74. This makes it possible to differentiate the manner in which the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 occurs between the second section SC2 that occurs immediately after the supply of operating power starts and the second section SC2 that occurs again after the second section SC2 has already occurred.

When the partial clear process (step S104) or the full clear process (step S105) is executed, the set value update process (step S106) is executed. Therefore, immediately after the set value update process (step S106) is executed, no CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, and if the second section SC2 is set in this situation, a transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 will not occur when the second section SC2 is set. This makes it possible to prevent a transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 from occurring immediately after, for example, the set value update process (step S106) is executed fraudulently.

When the index value IV = 17 is won in the role selection process (Figure 61), CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74. This makes it possible to determine whether or not to transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 when set to the second section SC2, depending on whether or not the situation is after the index value IV = 17 is won in the role selection process (Figure 61).

Even if index value IV=17 is won in the lottery process for winning combinations (FIG. 61), before CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 in the winning data acquisition process (step S3409) for the winning index value IV=17, it is determined whether or not the second section SC2 is set in a situation where CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 in the first control process for the game section (FIG. 65). As a result, in order to determine that the situation set in the second section SC2 is a situation where CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, it is necessary that index value IV=17 has been won in the lottery process for winning combinations (FIG. 61) in a game prior to the game set in the second section SC2.

If the set value update process (step S106) is executed when the supply of operating power starts, the partial clear process (step S104) or full clear process (step S105) is executed, resulting in a situation in which the CB winning data is not stored in the main RAM 74. In this case, even if the index value IV = 17 is won in the role selection process (Figure 61) in the game immediately after the start, the second section SC2 is set in the game, but the CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, and it is not determined that the second section SC2 has been set, so a transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 does not occur when the second section SC2 is set. This makes it possible to prevent a transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 from occurring immediately after, for example, an illegal execution of the set value update process (step S106).

When index value IV = 17 is won in the role selection process (Figure 61), not only the CB winning data but also the 10th supplementary winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, and the achievement of the 10th supplementary winning is given priority over the achievement of a CB winning (first CB winning or second CB winning). This makes it possible for the situation in which the CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 to be maintained up to games following the game in which index value IV = 17 was won in the role selection process (Figure 61).

If the second section SC2 is set when CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, a transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 may occur when the second section SC2 is set, whereas if the second section SC2 is set when no CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, a transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 will not occur when the second section SC2 is set. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to whether or not CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74.

When the second section SC2 is set in a situation where CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, the direct hit lottery process (step S3506) is executed, and a transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 occurs when a direct hit is won, whereas a transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 does not occur unless a direct hit is won. This makes it possible to create a situation where a transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 does not occur even when the second section SC2 is set in a situation where CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74. Therefore, even if it is confirmed that a transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 does not occur when the second section SC2 is set, for example, it is possible to make it impossible to specify whether or not the setting value update process (step S106) has been executed. In addition, in the case of this configuration, the player expects that the second section SC2 will be set in a situation where CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, and expects a direct hit to occur in the direct hit lottery process (step S3506) when the second section SC2 is set in a situation where CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74. This makes it possible to diversify the targets that the player focuses on.

When the game is in the second section SC2 and in the normal game state ST1, if a transition lottery process (step S2112) results in a transition win or the number of remaining release games becomes "0", the game state transitions to the pseudo bonus state ST4, regardless of whether CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74. This makes it possible to make the conditions required for the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 different when the second section SC2 is newly set and when the game is in the second section SC2 and in the normal game state ST1 continues. This makes it possible to diversify the transition manner of the pseudo bonus state ST4 in relation to the second section SC2.

Fifth embodiment
In this embodiment, the condition for transitioning to the pseudo bonus state ST4 when transitioning from the first section SC1 to the second section SC2 is different from that of the first embodiment. The following describes the configuration that differs from the first embodiment. Note that the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment is basically omitted.

Figure 67 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the types of game states and transition patterns of game states in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, a first section SC1 and a second section SC2 are set as game sections, and a normal game state ST1, a pseudo bonus state ST4, and an end preparation state ST5 are set as game states. Although not shown in FIG. 67, a first CB state ST2 and a second CB state ST3 also exist as game states. In this embodiment, in addition to the game states in the first embodiment, a first chance zone state (hereinafter referred to as the first CZ state) ST6 and a second chance zone state (hereinafter referred to as the second CZ state) ST7 exist.

The first CZ state ST6 and the second CZ state ST7 are both game states that can be entered when the game zone is the second zone SC2, and are game states that cannot be entered when the game zone is the first zone SC1. In the first CZ state ST6 or the second CZ state ST7, the transition lottery process (step S3707) during the CZ described later is executed regardless of the lottery process (FIG. 16) for each game, and a transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 occurs when the transition is won. In the normal game state ST1, which is neither the first CZ state ST6 nor the second CZ state ST7, if the index value IV = 11 to 15 is won in the lottery process (FIG. 16), the normal transition lottery process (step S3711) is executed. In this case, the probability of winning the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 in the first CZ state ST6 or the second CZ state ST7 is set higher than the probability of winning the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 in the normal game state ST1. In other words, a transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 is more likely to occur in the first CZ state ST6 or the second CZ state ST7 than in the second section SC2, which is the normal game state ST1.

In each of the first CZ state ST6 and the second CZ state ST7, a game with a bet of "3" in a non-CB state ends when 10 games, which is the number of CZ continuation games, are played. The probability of a transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 occurring in the first CZ state ST6 or the second CZ state ST7 is 50%. If the first CZ state ST6 ends without a transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4, the normal game state ST1 will occur. In other words, if a transition to the first CZ state ST6 occurs, there is a 50% probability of a transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4, and there is a 50% probability of returning to the normal game state ST1. Also, if a transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 does not occur and the second CZ state ST7 ends, the end preparation state ST5 will occur, and then the first section SC1 will occur. In other words, if a transition to the second CZ state ST7 occurs, there is a 50% probability of a transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4, and there is a 50% probability of returning to the first section SC1. In addition, the probability that a transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 occurs in the first CZ state ST6 is the same as the probability that a transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 occurs in the second CZ state ST7. Also, as in the first embodiment, a transition from the normal game state ST1 to the pseudo bonus state ST4 can occur.

The first CZ state ST6 will definitely occur if the game zone transitions from the first zone SC1 to the second zone SC2. In other words, when the game zone transitions from the first zone SC1 to the second zone SC2, the first CZ state ST6 will be entered first. When the first CZ state ST6 is entered, there is a 50% probability that the normal game zone ST1 will then be entered, and a 50% probability that the pseudo bonus state ST4 will then be entered. The second CZ state ST7 will definitely occur if the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends without the ending condition of the second zone SC2 being met. When the second CZ state ST7 is entered, there is a 50% probability that the first zone SC1 will then be entered, and a 50% probability that the pseudo bonus state ST4 will then be entered.

Here, if the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends without the ending condition of the second section SC2 being met, the game will transition to the second CZ state ST7 as described above. However, even if the game transitions to the first section SC1 via the end preparation state ST5 without the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 occurring with a 50% probability, the game will then transition to the first CZ state ST6 with the transition to the second section SC2, and if the game reaches the first CZ state ST6, the game will transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 with a 50% probability. In other words, if the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends without the ending condition of the second section SC2 being met, the game will transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 with a 50% probability in the subsequent second CZ state ST7, and even if the game transitions to the first section SC1 with a 50% probability, the game will transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 with a 50% probability in the subsequent first CZ state ST6 with the transition to the second section SC2. Therefore, if the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends without the ending condition of the second section SC2 being met, the game will transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 again with a 75% probability.

On the other hand, if the partial clear process (step S104) or the full clear process (step S105) is executed and the setting value update process (step S106) is executed when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 starts, the process will start from the first section SC1. In this case, the process will transition to the first CZ state ST6 with the transition to the second section SC2, but as already explained, there is a 50% probability that the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 will occur in the first CZ state ST6. Also, if the ending condition of the second section SC2 is met and the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends, the process will become the first section SC1 without passing through the second CZ state ST7. In this case, the process will transition to the first CZ state ST6 with the transition to the second section SC2, but there is a 50% probability that the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 will occur in the first CZ state ST6, as already explained.

In other words, if the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends without the ending condition of the second section SC2 being satisfied, there is a 75% chance of transitioning back to the pseudo bonus state ST4, whereas if the set value update process (step S106) is executed when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 starts or if the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied, there is a 50% chance of transitioning back to the pseudo bonus state ST4. This makes it possible to relatively increase the chance of transitioning back to the pseudo bonus state ST4 when the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends without the ending condition of the second section SC2 being satisfied, while relatively decreasing the chance of transitioning to the pseudo bonus state ST4 when the set value update process (step S106) is executed when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 starts or if the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied.

The processing configuration for enabling the transition of the game state as described above will be described below. Figure 68 is a flowchart showing the first control process of the game section in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 72.

First, it is determined whether the second section flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S3601). The second section flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to identify whether the gaming section is the second section SC2 or not; when the second section flag is set to "1", it is the second section SC2, and when the value of the second section flag is "0", it is the first section SC1. When the second section flag is set to "1" (step S3601: YES), the processing from step S3602 onwards is not executed. As a result, when it is the second section SC2, the processing of step S3606 to transition the gaming state to the first CZ state ST6 is not executed.

If the second section flag is not set to "1" (step S3601: NO), it is determined whether the current game state is a CB state (first CB state ST2 or second CB state ST3) (step S3602). If the current game state is a CB state (step S3602: YES), the processing from step S3603 onwards is not executed. As a result, even if it is in the first section SC1, if it is in the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the processing to set it to the second section SC2 in step S3605 and the processing to transition the game state to the first CZ state ST6 in step S3606 are not executed.

If the current game state is not the CB state (step S3602: NO), the number of bets for the current game is determined to be "3" by determining whether the value of the bet number setting counter 74a in the main RAM 74 is "3" (step S3603). If the number of bets for the current game is "2" (step S3603: NO), the processing from step S3604 onwards is not executed. As a result, in a game in which the number of bets is "2" even if it is the first section SC1, the processing to set the second section SC2 in step S3605 and the processing to transition the game state to the first CZ state ST6 in step S3606 are not executed.

If the number of bets on the current game is "3" (step S3603: YES), it is determined whether any index value IV has been won in the current role selection process (Figure 16) (step S3604). If the current role selection process (Figure 16) is a miss (step S3604: NO), the processes from step S3605 onwards are not executed. As a result, even if the first section SC1 is selected, if the role selection process (Figure 16) is a miss, the process of setting the second section SC2 in step S3605 and the process of transitioning the game state to the first CZ state ST6 in step S3606 are not executed.

If any of the index values IV is selected in the current role selection process (FIG. 16) (step S3604: YES), the second section flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1", and the number of continued games counter 74c and the total number of wins counter 74d in the main RAM 74 are both cleared to "0" (step S3605). Setting the second section flag to "1" results in the second section SC2.

Then, the first CZ flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1", and the CZ counter provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "10" (step S3606). The first CZ flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to determine whether the game state is the first CZ state ST6 or not. The CZ counter is a counter that allows the main MPU 72 to determine the remaining number of CZ continuation games in the first CZ state ST6 and the second CZ state ST7.

After that, the section display unit 67 is turned on (step S3607). In the section display unit 67 turning on process, the section display unit 67 is switched from an off state to an on state. This causes the section display unit 67 to start notifying that it is in the second section SC2. Furthermore, when a transition to the second section SC2 occurs, a transition to the first CZ state ST6 will definitely occur, and when a transition to the first CZ state ST6 occurs, it is possible to make the section display unit 67 turn on.

Then, a first CZ transition command is sent to the presentation side MPU 92 (step S3608). The first CZ transition command is a command for making the presentation side MPU 92 recognize that it has transitioned to the first CZ state ST6. When the presentation side MPU 92 receives the first CZ transition command, it causes the presentation corresponding to the first CZ state ST6 to be performed on the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63. This makes it possible for the player to clearly recognize whether or not it is in the first CZ state ST6. Note that the image display device 63 may be configured to display the remaining number of CZ continuation games in the first CZ state ST6.

Figure 69 is a flowchart showing the advantageous lottery processing at the start of the game in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 72.

First, it is determined whether the second section flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S3701). As already explained, the second section flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to identify whether the gaming section is the second section SC2 or not; when the second section flag is set to "1", it is the second section SC2, and when the value of the second section flag is "0", it is the first section SC1. If the second section flag is not set to "1" (step S3701: NO), the processing from step S3702 onwards is not executed. As a result, if it is the first section SC1, the processing from step S3706 onwards to transition the gaming state to the pseudo bonus state ST4 is not executed.

If the second section flag is set to "1" (step S3701: YES), and if the current game state is the pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S3702: YES), the pseudo bonus processing at the start of the game is executed (step S3703). The processing content of the pseudo bonus processing at the start of the game is the same as that of the first embodiment described above.

If the second section flag is set to "1" (step S3701: YES) and the game state is not the pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S3702: NO), it is determined whether the current game state is a CB state (first CB state ST2 or second CB state ST3) (step S3704). If the current game state is a CB state (step S3704: YES), the processing from step S3705 onwards is not executed. As a result, even if it is the second section SC2, if it is a CB state, the processing from step S3706 onwards to transition the game state to the pseudo bonus state ST4 is not executed.

If the current gaming state is not the CB state (step S3704: NO), the number of bets for the current game is determined to be "3" by determining whether the value of the bet number setting counter 74a in the main RAM 74 is "3" (step S3705). If the number of bets for the current game is "2" (step S3705: NO), the processing from step S3706 onwards is not executed. As a result, in a game where the number of bets is "2" even if it is the second section SC2, the processing from step S3706 onwards to transition the gaming state to the pseudo bonus state ST4 is not executed.

If the number of bets in the current game is "3" (step S3705: YES), the game state is determined to be either the first CZ state ST6 or the second CZ state ST7 by determining whether "1" is set in either the first CZ flag or the second CZ flag in the main RAM 74 (step S3706). If a positive determination is made in step S3706, a transition lottery process during the CZ is executed (step S3707). In the transition lottery process during the CZ, a lottery process is executed to determine whether or not a transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 will occur with a winning probability corresponding to the result of the lottery process for the role in the current game (Figure 16). In this case, the higher the index value IV with a low winning probability in the lottery process for the role (Figure 16), the higher the probability of a transition winning in the transition lottery process during the CZ. In addition, the probability of winning the transition lottery process during the CZ is arbitrary, but the probability of winning the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 before the CZ continuation game count of 10 games is played in the first CZ state ST6 or the second CZ state ST7 is 50%.

If a transition win occurs (step S3708: YES), the transition confirmation flag stored in the master RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S3709). The transition confirmation flag is a flag that specifies to the master MPU 72 that the game state will transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 when the current game ends.

On the other hand, if both the first CZ flag and the second CZ flag in the master RAM 74 are not set to "1" (step S3706: NO), the normal transition lottery process is executed (step S3711) on the condition that the index value IV = 11 to 15 is won in the lottery process for the current game (Figure 16) (step S3710: YES). The processing content of the normal transition lottery process is the same as the transition lottery process in step S2112 in the advantageous lottery process at the start of the game in the first embodiment (Figure 40). If the transition is won (step S3712: YES), the transition confirmation flag in the master RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S3713). As already explained, the transition confirmation flag is a flag for the master MPU 72 to specify that the game state will be transitioned to the pseudo bonus state ST4 when the current game ends.

Figure 70 is a flowchart showing the normal processing in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 72.

If the second section flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" and the current play section is the second section SC2 (step S3801: YES), it is determined whether the transition confirmation flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S3802). If a transition has been won in the transition lottery process during the CZ (step S3707) or the normal transition lottery process (step S3711) at the start of the current game, the transition confirmation flag is set to "1".

If the transition confirmation flag is set to "1" (step S3802: YES), the start setting process is executed (step S3803). In the start setting process, the pseudo bonus state flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1", and the pseudo bonus continuation counter in the main RAM 74 is set to a value corresponding to 40 games, which is the initial number of continued games in the pseudo bonus state ST4. The pseudo bonus state flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to determine whether the game state is in the pseudo bonus state ST4, and the pseudo bonus continuation counter is a counter that allows the main MPU 72 to determine the remaining number of continued games in the pseudo bonus state ST4.

Then, a start command is sent to the presentation side MPU 92 (step S3804). The start command is a command indicating that the pseudo bonus state ST4 has newly started. The start command also includes information indicating that the current initial number of continued games in the pseudo bonus state ST4 is 40 games. When the start command is received, the presentation side MPU 92 causes the presentation corresponding to the pseudo bonus state ST4 to be executed by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63. In this case, the image display device 63 displays a video corresponding to the pseudo bonus state ST4, and also displays a display indicating the remaining number of continued games in the pseudo bonus state ST4 and the number of gaming media acquired in the pseudo bonus state ST4.

If the transition confirmation flag is not set to "1" (step S3802: NO), it is determined whether the current game state is a CB state (first CB state ST2 or second CB state ST3) (step S3805). If the current game state is a CB state (step S3805: YES), the processing from step S3806 onwards is not executed. In the processing from step S3806 onwards, if it is the first CZ state ST6 or the second CZ state ST7, a process is executed to subtract 1 from the remaining CZ continuation game number as one game is played, and if the remaining CZ continuation game number becomes "0", a process is executed to end the current CZ state among the first CZ state ST6 and the second CZ state ST7. In addition, a process is executed to subtract 1 from the number of games required to transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 as one game is played, and if the transition condition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 is established as the game is played, a process is executed to transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4. In this case, by not executing the processing from step S3806 onwards when in the CB state, even if the game is played in the CB state, it is possible to prevent this from being a factor in bringing the game closer to the end of the first CZ state ST6 or the second CZ state ST7, and it is also possible to prevent this from being a factor in bringing the game closer to the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4.

If the current game state is not the CB state (step S3805: NO), the value of the bet number setting counter 74a in the main RAM 74 is determined to be "3" to determine whether the bet number for the current game is "3" (step S3806). If the bet number for the current game is "2" (step S3806: NO), the processing from step S3807 onwards is not executed. As a result, by not executing the processing from step S3807 onwards when a game with a bet number of "2" is executed, even if a game with a bet number of "2" is played, it is possible to prevent this from being a factor in approaching the end of the first CZ state ST6 or the second CZ state ST7, and to prevent this from being a factor in approaching the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4.

If the number of bets on the current game is "3" (step S3806: YES), it is determined whether the first CZ state ST6 is reached by determining whether the first CZ flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S3807). If the first CZ flag is set to "1" (step S3807: YES), the value of the CZ counter in the main RAM 74 is decremented by 1 (step S3808). Then, if the value of the CZ counter after decrementing by 1 is "0" (step S3809: YES), the first CZ flag is cleared to "0" (step S3810).

After that, a lottery process for the number of release games is executed (step S3811). The number of release games is a counter for the master MPU 72 to specify the number of games required until the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 occurs when the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 is not selected in the normal transition lottery process (step S3711). In the lottery process for the number of release games, a lottery table for the number of release games pre-stored in the master ROM 73 is read out, and numerical information is obtained from a lottery counter that is periodically updated in the master RAM 74. The number of release games is then selected by comparing the numerical information obtained from the lottery counter with the lottery table for the number of release games. In this case, any of 50 games, 100 games, 200 games, 300 games, 400 games, 500 games, 600 games, 700 games, and 800 games is selected as the number of release games. In addition, the selection probability of each of these numbers of release games is the same. However, this is not limited to this, and a configuration in which the probability of selecting a number of release games with a large number of games is set high, or a configuration in which the probability of selecting a number of release games with a small number of games is set high may be used. After the lottery process for the number of release games is executed, the number of release games selected in the lottery process for the number of release games is set in the release game number counter 74e of the master RAM 74 (step S3812). The release game number counter 74e is a counter for identifying the remaining number of release games in the master MPU 72.

If the first CZ flag is not set to "1" (step S3807: NO), it is determined whether the second CZ flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" to determine whether the second CZ state ST7 is in effect (step S3813). If the second CZ flag is set to "1" (step S3813: YES), the value of the CZ counter in the main RAM 74 is decremented by 1 (step S3814). Then, if the value of the CZ counter after decrementing by 1 is "0" (step S3815: YES), the second CZ flag is cleared to "0" (step S3816).

After that, a process for setting the end preparation state ST5 is executed (step S3817). In this setting process, the end preparation state flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1". The end preparation state flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to identify that the game is in the end preparation state ST5, and setting the end preparation state flag to "1" changes the game state to the end preparation state ST5. After that, the end preparation complete flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S3818). The end preparation complete flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to identify whether or not one game has been played in the end preparation state ST5.

In the end preparation state ST5, as in the first embodiment, if a positive judgment is made in step S1902 in the second control process (FIG. 38) of the game section and the end preparation completion flag is not set to "1" (step S1903: NO), the end preparation completion flag is set to "1" and then a process is executed to determine whether the ending condition of the second section SC2 is met, and the second control process (FIG. 38) of the game section in this game is terminated. On the other hand, if the end preparation completion flag is set to "1" (step S1903: YES), a process is executed to terminate the second section SC2 and transition to the first section SC1 (steps S1914 to S1916). This ends the second section SC2. Note that if the end preparation state ST5 is not set and the second CZ state ST7 ends, the second section SC2 may be terminated in that game.

If the second CZ flag is not set to "1" (step S3813: NO), the value of the release game number counter 74e in the main RAM 74 is decremented by 1 (step S3819). Then, if the value of the release game number counter 74e after decrementing by 1 is "0" (step S3820: YES), a start setting process is executed (step S3821), and a start command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S3822). The process contents of these steps S3821 and S3822 are the same as those of steps S3803 and S3804.

Figure 71 is a flowchart showing the pseudo bonus processing in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 72.

First, it is determined whether the number of bets for the current game is "3" by determining whether the value of the bet number setting counter 74a in the main RAM 74 is "3" (step S3901). If the number of bets for the current game is "2" (step S3901: NO), the processing from step S3902 onwards is not executed. As a result, even if a game with the number of bets of "2" is executed in the pseudo bonus state ST4, the remaining number of continued games in the pseudo bonus state ST4 is not subtracted, and furthermore, the remaining number of continued games in the added period in the pseudo bonus state ST4 is not subtracted.

Note that when in the CB state (first CB state ST2 or second CB state ST3), the pseudo bonus process (Figure 49) itself is not executed, so even if the CB state is started in the middle of the pseudo bonus state ST4, the number of games played in the CB state is not treated as the number of games played in the pseudo bonus state ST4. Therefore, even if the CB state is transitioned to in the middle of the pseudo bonus state ST4, after the CB state ends, the pseudo bonus state ST4 will resume from the state of the remaining number of continued games immediately before transitioning to the CB state.

If the bet number for the current number of games is "3" (step S3901: YES), other processing is executed (step S3902). In the other processing, the same processing as the processing of steps S2703 to S2708 in the pseudo bonus processing (FIG. 49) in the first embodiment is executed.

Then, the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter in the master RAM 74 is decremented by 1 (step S3903). If the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter after decrementing by 1 is "0" (step S3904: YES), the pseudo bonus state flag in the master RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S3905). This ends the pseudo bonus state ST4. Then, the second CZ flag in the master RAM 74 is set to "1" and the CZ counter in the master RAM 74 is set to "10" (step S3906). The second CZ flag is a flag for the master MPU 72 to determine whether the game state is the second CZ state ST7 or not. The CZ counter is a counter for the master MPU 72 to determine the remaining number of CZ continuation games in the first CZ state ST6 and the second CZ state ST7.

Then, a pseudo bonus state ST4 end command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S3907). The pseudo bonus state ST4 end command is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize that the pseudo bonus state ST4 has ended and transitioned to the second CZ state ST7. When the production side MPU 92 receives the pseudo bonus state ST4 end command, it controls the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 so that after a presentation indicating that the pseudo bonus state ST4 has ended is executed, a presentation corresponding to the second CZ state ST7 is executed. This makes it possible for the player to clearly recognize that the pseudo bonus state ST4 has ended, and also makes it possible for the player to clearly recognize whether or not the player is in the second CZ state ST7. The image display device 63 may be configured to display the remaining number of CZ continuation games in the second CZ state ST7.

Next, the transition of the game state will be explained with reference to the time chart in Figure 72. Figure 72(a) shows the situation in the first section SC1, Figure 72(b) shows the situation in the second section SC2, Figure 72(c) shows the period in the first CZ state ST6, Figure 72(d) shows the period in the normal game state ST1, Figure 72(e) shows the period in the pseudo bonus state ST4, and Figure 72(f) shows the period in the second CZ state ST7.

At the timing of t1, when the game zone is in the first zone SC1, the game zone transitions from the first zone SC1 to the second zone SC2, as shown in FIG. 72(a) and FIG. 72(b). In this case, the game zone transitions to the first CZ state ST6 at the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 72(c). In the first CZ state ST6, no transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 occurs. Therefore, at the timing of t2 when the first CZ state ST6 ends, the game zone transitions to the normal game state ST1, as shown in FIG. 72(d). After that, if a transition is won in the normal transition lottery process (step S3711) executed in the normal game state ST1, or if the remaining number of release games becomes "0", the game zone transitions from the normal game state ST1 to the pseudo bonus state ST4 at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 72(d) and FIG. 72(e).

After that, at the timing of t4, the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends as shown in FIG. 72(e). In this case, the ending condition of the second section SC2 is not met. Therefore, at the timing of t4, the game state becomes the second CZ state ST7 as shown in FIG. 72(f). The transition lottery process during the CZ executed in the second CZ state ST7 (step S3707) results in a transition win. Therefore, at the timing of t5, the game state returns from the second CZ state ST7 to the pseudo bonus state ST4 as shown in FIG. 72(e) and FIG. 72(f).

After that, at the timing of t6, the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends as shown in FIG. 72(e). In this case, the ending condition of the second section SC2 is not met. Therefore, at the timing of t6, the game state becomes the second CZ state ST7 as shown in FIG. 72(f). In the second CZ state ST7, a transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 does not occur. Therefore, at the timing of t7, the second CZ state ST7 ends as shown in FIG. 72(f), and the game section transitions from the second section SC2 to the first section SC1 as shown in FIG. 72(a) and FIG. 72(b). Note that in reality, the transition to the end preparation state ST5 occurs before the second CZ state ST7 ends and the first section SC1 ends.

After that, at the timing of t8, the game zone transitions from the first zone SC1 to the second zone SC2 as shown in Figures 72(a) and 72(b). In this case, at the timing of t8, the game zone transitions to the first CZ state ST6 as shown in Figure 72(c). The transition lottery process during the CZ executed in the first CZ state ST6 (step S3707) results in a transition win. Therefore, at the timing of t9, the game state transitions from the first CZ state ST6 to the pseudo bonus state ST4 as shown in Figures 72(c) and 72(e).

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

When the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends, the game enters the second CZ state ST7, which is more likely to transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 than the normal game state ST1. This makes it possible for the player to expect a transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 again even if the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends.

If the second CZ state ST7 ends without a transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4, the second section SC2 also ends. This makes it possible to prevent the second section SC2 from continuing in a state where there is a low expectation of a transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 when the second CZ state ST7 ends without a transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4.

When the second section SC2 is newly set, the first CZ state ST6 occurs, which is more likely to transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 than the normal game state ST1. This makes it possible to increase the player's anticipation for the new setting of the second section SC2.

In particular, by configuring the pseudo bonus state ST4 to become the second CZ state ST7 after it ends and becoming the first CZ state ST6 when it is newly set to the second section SC2, it is possible to increase the probability of returning to the pseudo bonus state ST4 after it ends. Furthermore, when the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends, both the second CZ state ST7 and the first CZ state ST6 occur sequentially, whereas when the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends, if it is newly set to the second section SC2 after the supply of operating power starts, for example, only the first CZ state ST6 occurs. Therefore, it is possible to increase the probability of returning to the pseudo bonus state ST4 after it ends, even if the probability of transitioning to the pseudo bonus state ST4 immediately after the supply of operating power starts is not set very high.

If no transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 occurs in the first CZ state ST6, the second section SC2 is reached and the normal game state ST1 is entered. This makes it possible to continue the second section SC2 even if no transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 occurs in the first CZ state ST6.

In the first section SC1, if any role is won in the role selection process (FIG. 16), the second section SC2 is set. This allows the transition from the first section SC1 to the second section SC2 to occur early. Even if the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 does not occur in the second CZ state ST7 that occurs after the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends, the second section SC2 ends with the end of the second CZ state ST7 and becomes the first section SC1, and if any role is won in the role selection process (FIG. 16) in the first section SC1, the second section SC2 is newly set and the first CZ state ST6 is set. Therefore, not only is the probability of transitioning again to the pseudo bonus state ST4 after the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends higher, but it is also possible to reduce the number of games required to transition again to the pseudo bonus state ST4.

Sixth embodiment
In this embodiment, the pseudo bonus state ST4 includes a first pseudo bonus state in which the initial number of continuing games is relatively large, and a second pseudo bonus state in which the initial number of continuing games is relatively small. Specifically, in the first pseudo bonus state, the initial number of continuing games is 100 games, and in the second pseudo bonus state, the initial number of continuing games is 50 games.

In the configuration in which a first pseudo bonus state and a second pseudo bonus state exist as described above, in this embodiment, if a special bell is won on the main line ML, if it is the transition waiting period corresponding to the transition to the first pseudo bonus state, then at the start of the subsequent game, after all reels 32L, 32M, 32R have started to rotate, a combination of symbols corresponding to the first pseudo bonus state is displayed stationary during the period in which operation of stop buttons 42 to 44 is disabled, and if it is the transition waiting period corresponding to the transition to the second pseudo bonus state, then at the start of the subsequent game, after all reels 32L, 32M, 32R have started to rotate, a combination of symbols corresponding to the second pseudo bonus state is displayed stationary during the period in which operation of stop buttons 42 to 44 is disabled. After the symbol combination is displayed, all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start spinning again, after which operation of stop buttons 42-44 becomes effective, and based on the operation of stop buttons 42-44, stopping control of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is executed in a manner that corresponds to the result of the lottery process (Figure 16).

Figures 73(a) to 73(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the operation of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R as described above.

When the index value IV=10 is hit during the transition waiting period in the normal game state ST1, the right reel 32R is stopped first, and the stop buttons 42-44 are operated to stop the "white 7" symbol, the "white 7" symbol, and the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML, resulting in a special bell win on the main line ML as shown in FIG. 73(a). After that, when a new game is started based on the operation of the start lever 41, the rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started, and the rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped during the inactive period of the operation of the stop buttons 42-44.

If this is the transition waiting period corresponding to the transition to the first pseudo bonus state, as shown in FIG. 73(b), the "red 7" symbol is stopped on the left reel 32L, the "red 7" symbol is stopped on the center reel 32M, and the "red 7" symbol is stopped on the right reel 32R on the main line ML as a combination of symbols corresponding to the first pseudo bonus state. This notifies the player that a transition to the first pseudo bonus state will occur. After that, regardless of whether the start lever 41 has been operated or not, the rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is started again, and the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 becomes effective, and the stop control of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is executed in a manner corresponding to the result of the lottery process (FIG. 16) based on the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44.

If this is the transition waiting period corresponding to the transition to the second pseudo bonus state, as shown in FIG. 73(c), the "BAR" symbol is stopped on the left reel 32L, the "BAR" symbol is stopped on the center reel 32M, and the "BAR" symbol is stopped on the right reel 32R as a combination of symbols corresponding to the second pseudo bonus state on the main line ML. This notifies the player that a transition to the second pseudo bonus state will occur. After that, regardless of whether the start lever 41 has been operated or not, the rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is started again, and the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 becomes effective, and the stop control of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is executed in a manner corresponding to the result of the lottery process (FIG. 16) based on the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44.

According to the above configuration, if a special bell win occurs during the transition waiting period, a combination of symbols corresponding to the type of pseudo bonus state ST4 that occurs after the current transition waiting period has elapsed is displayed. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the special bell win.

<Other embodiments>
The present invention is not limited to the contents of the above-described embodiments, and various modifications and improvements are possible within the scope of the present invention. For example, the following modifications may be made. The configurations of the following alternative forms may be applied individually to the configurations of the above-described embodiments, or may be applied in combination. The configurations of the above-described embodiments may be applied in combination with each other, and the configurations of the following alternative forms may be applied individually or in combination with each other to the configuration obtained by combining the configurations of the above-described embodiments with each other.

(1) In each of the above embodiments, when any role is won in the lottery process for the role in the first section SC1, the game is surely shifted to the second section SC2. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when any role is won in the lottery process for the role in the first section SC1, a section transition lottery process is executed to determine by lottery whether or not to shift to the second section SC2, and when the transition is won in the section transition lottery process, the game may be shifted to the second section SC2. In addition, when a predetermined role defined as a part of the role is won in the lottery process for the role in the first section SC1, the game may be shifted to the second section SC2, and when the predetermined role is won, a section transition lottery process is executed to determine by lottery whether or not to shift to the second section SC2, and when the transition is won in the section transition lottery process, the game may be shifted to the second section SC2. The above-mentioned predetermined role may be a role whose probability of winning varies depending on a set value, or may be a role whose probability of winning does not vary depending on a set value. In addition, in the first section SC1, a section transition lottery process is executed to determine by lottery whether or not to transition to the second section SC2 in each game, regardless of the results of the lottery process for the role, and if the transition is successful in the section transition lottery process, the game may transition to the second section SC2.

(2) In the first embodiment described above, when the second section SC2 is in the normal game state ST1, the transition lottery process (step S2112) may be executed in each game regardless of the result of the lottery process for the winning combination. In this case, a transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 occurs regardless of the result of the lottery process for the winning combination.

(3) In the first embodiment and the like described above, the number of games to release is set as the maximum number of games required to confirm a transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 when in the second section SC2 and in the normal game state ST1, but this is not limited to this, and the number of games to release may not be set.

(4) In the first embodiment and the like, when the production-side add-on period has ended and the add-on period is continuing, even if the number of games is added in the game during the continuing add-on period, the number of games added is not notified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification may be executed in response to the addition of the number of games. For example, when a game in the CB state (first CB state ST2 or second CB state ST3) or a game with a bet number of "2" is executed during the production-side add-on period, the progress of the add-on period is stopped, but it is notified that the minimum number of games among the number of games to be added selected in the second add-on lottery process (step S2614) has been granted. However, when a number of games to be added that is greater than the minimum number of games is selected in the second add-on lottery process (step S2614) executed in a situation where the add-on period is continuing after the production-side add-on period has ended, it may be notified that the number of games equal to the difference between the minimum number of games and the selected number of games to be added has been granted. In this case, it is possible to accurately notify the player of the number of additional games actually awarded.

(5) In the first embodiment and the like, when a game in the CB state (first CB state ST2 or second CB state ST3) or a game with a bet number of "2" is executed during the added-on period, the progress of the added-on period is stopped, while the progress of the presentation side added-on period continues. However, this is not limited to this, and when a non-target game such as the above is executed during the added-on period, the progress of the added-on period may be stopped and the progress of the presentation side added-on period may also be stopped. In this case, a configuration in which the progress of the presentation side added-on period is stopped on the image display device 63 with the video display content immediately before the start of the non-target game, and when a target game, which is a game in a non-CB state with a bet number of "3", is executed after that, the temporarily stopped state is released and the video display of the presentation side added-on period is resumed from the temporarily stopped state. This makes it possible to clearly recognize that a non-target game has been executed during the added-on period. In addition, when the video display during the performance-side added period is temporarily stopped as described above, a text image or the like may be displayed to clearly indicate that a non-target game is being played. In addition, when the video display during the performance-side added period is temporarily stopped as described above, the light emission effect of the upper lamp 61 and the sound output effect of the speaker 62 may also be temporarily stopped, or these effects may be continued without being temporarily stopped, or when a non-target game is being played, a corresponding effect may be executed.

(6) In the first embodiment and the like described above, if a game in the CB state (first CB state ST2 or second CB state ST3) or a game with a bet number of "2" is executed during the added-on period, the progress of the added-on period is stopped. However, this is not limited to this, and the progress of the added-on period may be stopped when a game in the CB state is executed, while the progress of the added-on period may not be stopped when a game with a bet number of "2" is executed, or the progress of the added-on period may be stopped when a game with a bet number of "2" is executed, while the progress of the added-on period may not be stopped when a game in the CB state is executed.

(7) In the first embodiment and the like, when a game with a bet number of "2" is executed in the first section SC1, the game does not transition to the second section SC2. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Even if a game with a bet number of "2" is executed in the first section SC1, the game may transition to the second section SC2 or transition to the second section SC2 may occur with a predetermined probability. In addition, when the configuration is applied to the third embodiment, instead of a configuration in which a transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 occurs depending on whether the bet number in the game following the game in which the transition to the second section SC2 occurs is "2" or "3", a configuration in which a transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 occurs depending on whether the bet number in the game that transitioned to the second section SC2 is "2" or "3" may be used. Specifically, if the bet number in the game that transitioned to the second section SC2 is "3", the game may transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4, and if the bet number in the game that transitioned to the second section SC2 is "2", the game may not transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4. This makes it possible to increase the importance of playing a game with a bet of "3".

(8) In the third embodiment, if the number of bets in the game following the game that has been shifted to the second section SC2 is "3", a transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 occurs without fail, and if the number of bets in the game following the game that has been shifted to the second section SC2 is "2", the normal game state ST1 continues without fail, but this is not limited to the above. For example, if the number of bets in the game following the game that has been shifted to the second section SC2 is "3", a direct lottery process may be executed, and if a direct win occurs in the direct lottery process, a transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 may occur. In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which a direct lottery process is executed and a direct win occurs in the direct lottery process regardless of whether the number of bets in the game following the game that has been shifted to the second section SC2 is "3" or "2", and a transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 occurs, and the probability of a direct win in the direct lottery process is higher when the number of bets in the game following the game that has been shifted to the second section SC2 is "3" than when it is "2".

(9) In the third embodiment, in the second section SC2 to which the game is first shifted after the partial clear process (step S104) or the full clear process (step S105) is executed, if the number of bets in the game following the game that shifted to the second section SC2 is "3", the game shifts to the pseudo bonus state ST4, and if the number of bets is "2", the game continues to play in the normal game state ST1. In the second section SC2 to which the game shifts after the second section SC2 has already occurred and the second section SC2 has ended, the game shifts to the pseudo bonus state ST4 regardless of the number of bets in the game following the game that shifted to the second section SC2. This makes it possible to make the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 different between the second section SC2 that first occurs after the partial clear process (step S104) or the full clear process (step S105) is executed and the second section SC2 that occurs after the second section SC2.

A specific example of a configuration for realizing the above configuration is that when the partial clear process (step S104) or the full clear process (step S105) is executed, the post-clear flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1", while when the second section SC2 ends, the post-clear flag is cleared to "0". If the post-clear flag is set to "1" when a transition to the second section SC2 occurs, if the number of bets in the game following the game that transitioned to the second section SC2 is "3", the game transitions to the pseudo bonus state ST4, and if the number of bets is "2", the normal game state ST1 continues. If the post-clear flag is not set to "1" when a transition to the second section SC2 occurs, the game transitions to the pseudo bonus state ST4 regardless of the number of bets in the game following the game that transitioned to the second section SC2. This makes it possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects with a relatively simple processing configuration.

(10) In the first embodiment and the like, if the final game of the transition waiting period is reached during which the second transition confirmation flag is set to "1" and the value of the transition waiting counter is 1 or greater, or during which none of the first to third transition confirmation flags are set to "1" and the value of the release game count counter 74e is 5 or less, and no special bell win has been achieved, a configuration may be adopted in which an effect is executed indicating that the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 has been confirmed at the point in time when the lottery process for the role in the final game does not result in a win with index value IV = 10. This makes it possible to start the confirmation effect for non-winning at an early timing in the final game of the transition waiting period.

(11) In the third embodiment described above, if the number of bets in the game following the game that has been shifted to the second section SC2 is "2", the situation in the second section SC2 and the normal gaming state ST1 continues, and if the number of remaining release games in this situation becomes "0" or if a release lottery win is won in the release lottery process (step S3218), the second section SC2 ends and the game transitions to the first section SC1. However, this is not limited to this. For example, if the number of bets in the game following the game that has been shifted to the second section SC2 is "2", and the situation in the second section SC2 and the normal gaming state ST1 continues, if the number of remaining release games in this situation becomes "0" or if a release lottery win is won in the release lottery process (step S3218), a transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 may occur. In addition, in this configuration, when the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends in the second section SC2 and the game state ST1 is in the second section SC2, if the number of remaining games to be released becomes "0" or if a release lottery is won in the release lottery process (step S3218), the game state may end in the second section SC2 and transition to the first section SC1. This makes it possible to vary the game state after the game state in the second section SC2 and the game state ST1 ends depending on the trigger for the situation.

(12) In the fourth embodiment, when any of the CB winning data (first CB winning data or second CB winning data) is stored in the main RAM 74 and the second section SC2 is set, a transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 may occur at the time of the setting. However, this is not limited to this. For example, a specific flag may be provided in the main RAM 74, and when CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 and a CB win is not achieved in the game in which the CB winning data is stored, the specific flag may be set to "1" when the game ends. Then, when the second section SC2 is set in a situation where the specific flag is set to "1", a transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 may occur in the game set in the second section SC2, whereas when the second section SC2 is set in a situation where the specific flag is not set to "1", a transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 does not occur in the game set in the second section SC2.

In this configuration, the specific flag is set to "1" at the end of the game in which the CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, so that the specific flag is set to "1" after the first control process of the game section is executed in the game in which the CB winning data is stored. Therefore, even if the second section SC2 is set by winning the index value IV = 17 in the lottery process of the game executed in the first section SC1, the specific flag has not yet been set to "1" at the timing when the first control process of the game section is executed in the game, so the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 does not occur in the game set in the second section SC2. Note that in the above fourth embodiment, not only the CB winning data but also the 10th compensation winning data is set in the index value IV = 17, and the establishment of the 10th compensation winning takes priority over the establishment of the CB winning, so that the CB winning will not be established in the game in which the CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, and the specific flag will be set to "1" in the game.

In the above configuration, when the specific flag is set to "1", if a CB win occurs, if a partial clear process (step S104) is executed, or if a full clear process (step S105) is executed, the specific flag may be cleared to "0". As a result, when the specific flag is set to "1", the CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, and therefore when the second section SC2 is set in a situation where the CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, a transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 may occur in the game.

In the above configuration, when the specific flag is set to "1", the probability of winning a replay role and the probability of a replay winning may be higher than when the specific flag is not set to "1". This makes it possible to achieve the excellent effects described above by using a flag that the main MPU 72 uses to identify a gaming state with a high probability of winning a replay role and a high probability of a replay winning.

(13) In the fourth embodiment described above, in the second section SC2 that occurs in a situation where the CB winning data is not stored in the main RAM 74, no transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 occurs, and similarly to the third embodiment described above, in a situation where the second section SC2 is in the normal game state ST1, if the remaining number of release games becomes "0" or a release win is obtained in the release lottery process, the second section SC2 may end and the first section SC1 may be entered.

(14) In the fourth embodiment, when the second section SC2 is set in a situation where the CB winning data is not stored in the main RAM 74, the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 does not occur at the time of the setting. On the other hand, when the number of remaining release games becomes "0" in the second section SC2 and the normal game state ST1, or when a transition win is obtained in the transition lottery process (step S2112), the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 occurs regardless of whether the CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 or not. However, this is not limited to the above. For example, when the number of remaining release games becomes "0" in the second section SC2 and the normal game state ST1, or when a transition win is obtained in the transition lottery process (step S2112), if the CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 occurs, but if the CB winning data is not stored in the main RAM 74, the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 may not occur.

(15) In the fourth embodiment described above, when the CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 and the second section SC2 is set, a direct hit lottery process is executed and a direct hit is obtained in the direct hit lottery process, causing a transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4. However, this is not limited to this, and a transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 may be ensured when the CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 and the second section SC2 is set.

(16) In the fourth embodiment described above, even if the second section SC2 is set in a situation where the CB winning data is not stored in the main RAM 74, a direct hit lottery process may be executed and a transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 may occur when a direct hit lottery process results in a direct win. In this case, the probability of a direct hit lottery process being a direct win in the direct hit lottery process may be lower when the second section SC2 is set in a situation where the CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 than when the second section SC2 is set in a situation where the CB winning data is not stored in the main RAM 74.

(17) In the fourth embodiment described above, even if index value IV = 17 is won in the lottery process for the first section SC1 (FIG. 61), a transition to the second section SC2 may not occur. As a result, in order to have the CB winning data stored in the main RAM 74 when a transition to the second section SC2 occurs, it is necessary to have won index value IV = 17 in the lottery process for the game prior to the game in which the transition to the second section SC2 occurs (FIG. 61).

(18) In the fifth embodiment, as in the first embodiment, an ending flag is provided in the main RAM 74, and when the ending flag is set to "1", even if the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends, the state may transition to the end preparation state ST5 without transitioning to the second CZ state ST7.

(19) In the fifth embodiment, if the number of bets in the game following the game set in the second section SC2 is "3", a transition to the first CZ state ST6 occurs, and if the number of bets is "2", the game may be maintained in the normal game state ST1 without a transition to the first CZ state ST6. Also, if the second section SC2 is set in a situation where the CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, a transition to the first CZ state ST6 occurs, and if the second section SC2 is set in a situation where the CB winning data is not stored in the main RAM 74, the game may be maintained in the normal game state ST1 without a transition to the first CZ state ST6.

(20) In the fifth embodiment described above, the first CZ state ST6 and the second CZ state ST7 have the same probability of transitioning to the pseudo bonus state ST4, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the first CZ state ST6 and the second CZ state ST7 may have a configuration in which the probability of transitioning to the pseudo bonus state ST4 is slightly different but approximately the same. Also, the first CZ state ST6 may have a higher probability of transitioning to the pseudo bonus state ST4 than the second CZ state ST7, and the second CZ state ST7 may have a higher probability of transitioning to the pseudo bonus state ST4 than the first CZ state ST6.

(21) In the first to fifth embodiments, multiple types of pseudo bonus states ST4 may be set. For example, multiple types of pseudo bonus states ST4 with different initial numbers of continued games may be set. Also, in each of the above embodiments, if a transition condition is met in the pseudo bonus state ST4, the game may transition to a game state that is advantageous to the player after the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends. Examples of such advantageous game states include the AT state, ART state, and RT state.

(22) In the above first embodiment, etc., in a situation where the number of continued games in the second section SC2 is equal to or greater than the first reference number of games, which is a number of games that is less than the upper limit number of games, or in a situation where the limited total net increase in the number of game media is equal to or greater than the first reference number of acquisitions, which is a number that is less than the upper limit number of net increases, the ending flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1", and no additional games are added thereafter. However, this is not limited to this, and the number of games may be added even when the ending flag is set to "1". In this case, the probability of the number of games being added and the expected number of added games may be the same or approximately the same in both a situation where the ending flag is set to "1" and a situation where the ending flag is not set to "1". Also, the probability of the number of games being added and the expected number of added games may be lower in a situation where the ending flag is set to "1" than in a situation where the ending flag is not set to "1".

(23) In each of the above embodiments, the pseudo bonus state ST4 is configured to end when the remaining number of continuing games becomes "0", but this is not limited to this. For example, the pseudo bonus state ST4 may be configured to end when the net increase in the number of game media in the pseudo bonus state ST4 reaches the end reference number. In this case, when the pseudo bonus state ST4 starts, an initial end reference number is set, and when the add-on condition is met in the pseudo bonus state ST4, the remaining net increase in the number of times the end condition of the pseudo bonus state ST4 is met is added. Also, for example, the pseudo bonus state ST4 may be configured to end when the total number of times the first bell win or the second bell win is met in the pseudo bonus state ST4 reaches the end reference number. In this case, when the pseudo bonus state ST4 starts, an initial end reference number is set, and when the add-on condition is met in the pseudo bonus state ST4, the remaining total number of times the end condition of the pseudo bonus state ST4 is met is added.

(24) Although the first predetermined number is "3" and the second predetermined number is "2", the specific values of the first and second predetermined numbers are arbitrary. In addition, the configuration is not limited to the first predetermined number being a number greater than the second predetermined number, and the first predetermined number may be a number less than the second predetermined number.

(25) Although the first CB state ST2 is configured to be a game state in which the game media owned by the player is reduced, it may be configured to be a game state in which the game media owned by the player is not increased or decreased, or it may be configured to be a game state in which the game media owned by the player can be increased but the increase is very small, such as one or two.

In addition, in a game executed in the first CB state ST2, the number of gaming media awarded in that game may be greater than the number of bets set to start that game (specifically, "3"), but due to the low probability of winning the combination that allows for the awarding of those gaming media, the first CB state ST2 as a whole may be configured to not increase or decrease the gaming media owned by the player, or to decrease the gaming media owned by the player.

(26) Although the second CB state ST3 is configured to be a game state in which the game media owned by the player is reduced, it may be configured to be a game state in which the game media owned by the player is not increased or decreased, or it may be configured to be a game state in which the game media owned by the player can be increased but only by a very small amount, such as one or two, or it may be configured to be a game state in which the game media owned by the player can be increased to a certain extent.

In addition, in a game executed in the second CB state ST3, the number of gaming media awarded in that game may be greater than the number of bets set to start that game (specifically, "2"), but due to the low probability of winning the combination that allows for the awarding of the gaming media, the second CB state ST3 as a whole may be configured to not increase or decrease the gaming media owned by the player, or to decrease the gaming media owned by the player.

(27) If the pseudo bonus state ST4 transitions to CB state ST2 or ST3, the pseudo bonus state ST4 is temporarily interrupted, and the number of games played in CB state ST2 or ST3 is not subtracted from the remaining number of games to be continued in the pseudo bonus state ST4. However, this is not limited to the above, and if the pseudo bonus state ST4 transitions to CB state ST2 or ST3, the number of games played in the CB state ST2 or ST3 may be subtracted from the remaining number of games to be continued in the pseudo bonus state ST4. This makes it possible to increase the disadvantage of transitioning to CB state ST2 or ST3 in the middle of the pseudo bonus state ST4.

(28) A configuration may be adopted in which, when the setting value update process (step S106) is being executed, a notification regarding the winning state of at least one of the first and second CB roles is executed. For example, when the setting value update process (step S106) is executed in a situation in which the second CB winning data is not stored in the main RAM 74, a notification indicating that the second CB role has not been won may be executed on the image display device 63. By configuring the notification to end when the setting value update process (step S106) is terminated, it is possible to limit the period during which the notification is executed to the period during which the setting value update process (step S106) is being executed. Also, for example, when the setting value update process (step S106) is executed in a situation in which the first CB role winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, a notification indicating that the first CB role has been won may be executed on the image display device 63. By configuring the notification to end when the setting value update process (step S106) is completed, it is possible to limit the period during which the notification is executed to the period during which the setting value update process (step S106) is being executed.

(29) In a situation where the second CB role is not won, the procedure for making the second CB role a winning state may be displayed on the image display device 63. In this case, if neither the first CB role nor the second CB role is won, a game with a bet number of "2" is executed to win the second CB role, and a notification is given that a game with a bet number of "3" should be executed thereafter without establishing the second CB winning in the winning game. Also, if the first CB role is won, a game with a bet number of "3" is executed to establish the first CB winning, transition to the first CB state ST2, and a notification is given that the first CB state ST2 should be exhausted. Then, when the first CB state ST2 is exhausted, a game with a bet number of "2" is executed to win the second CB role, and a notification is given that a game with a bet number of "3" should be executed thereafter without establishing the second CB winning in the winning game. This makes it possible to encourage a situation where the second CB role is won.

(30) In a situation where the second CB role has not been won, if the second CB role is won and the second CB winning is not established, a notification may be executed to indicate that the second CB role has been won. For example, the notification may be an alarm sound such as "Completed" that is output from the speaker 62.

(31) When the second CB role is won and a game with a bet number of "2" is executed, a corresponding notification may be executed on the image display device 63. For example, the notification may be made by displaying the image on the image display device 63 darker than before. Also, when the first CB role is won and a game with a bet number of "2" is executed, a corresponding notification may be executed on the image display device 63. For example, the notification may be made by displaying the image on the image display device 63 darker than before.

(32) If the number of bets becomes "2" when the second CB role has been won, an invalid period for operation of the start lever 41 may occur afterwards. The invalid period is arbitrary, but may be, for example, 10 seconds. In this case, it is possible to reduce the possibility that a game with the number of bets "2" will be executed even if the second CB role has already been won. In addition, during this invalid period, a notification indicating that the second CB role has already been won may be issued by the speaker 62 or the image display device 63, and the notification may be issued in response to the operation of the start lever 41 during the invalid period.

(33) When a game is started in the first section SC1, a decision is made to transition to the second section SC2 at the start of the game and a transition to the second section SC2 occurs at the start of the game. However, this is not limited to the above, and a decision to transition to the second section SC2 may be made at the start of the game and a transition to the second section SC2 occurs at the end of the game. Also, a decision is made to transition to the second section SC2 at the end of the game and a transition to the second section SC2 occurs at the end of the game. In this case, it is possible to increase the number of games played in the first section SC1.

(34) A transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 may occur when a game with a bet number of "3" is executed, whereas a transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 does not occur when a game with a bet number of "2" is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 may occur even when a game with a bet number of "2" is executed. In this case, the probability of a transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 occurring when a game with a bet number of "3" is executed and a game with a bet number of "2" may be the same or approximately the same. Also, a configuration may be used in which a transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 occurs more frequently when a game with a bet number of "3" is executed than when a game with a bet number of "2" is executed. Also, a configuration may be used in which a transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 occurs more frequently when a game with a bet number of "2" is executed than when a game with a bet number of "3" is executed.

(35) The currently set setting value may be confirmed by executing a setting confirmation process based on a setting confirmation operation performed by the manager of the game hall. For example, the setting confirmation process may be executed by inserting a setting key into the setting key insertion hole 57 and turning it ON when operating power is supplied to the main MPU 72, and the currently set setting value may be displayed on the dual-purpose display unit 66 when the setting confirmation process is executed. In this configuration, a partial clear process (step S104) may be executed when the setting confirmation process is executed. When the partial clear process is executed, the first CB winning data is erased, but the second CB winning data and the setting value information are not erased. This makes it possible to confirm the currently set setting value while preventing the second CB winning data from being erased.

(36) In the partial clear process (step S104), the information excluded from erasure is not limited to the second CB winning data, and the intrusion abnormality flag in the main RAM 74 may also be excluded. As a result, even if the power is turned OFF once after the intrusion abnormality notification has started and the partial clear process (step S104) is executed when the power is subsequently turned ON, the intrusion abnormality notification will resume. In this case, in order to prevent the intrusion abnormality notification from resuming, it becomes necessary to execute the full clear process (step S105), and when the full clear process (step S105) is executed, the second CB winning data will be erased.

(37) If the intrusion abnormality flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1", the game may be prevented from continuing. This makes it possible to prevent the game from continuing even if an intrusion abnormality has occurred.

(38) A configuration may be adopted in which a transition to the second section SC2 can occur on the condition that the second CB role has been won, and a configuration may be adopted in which a transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 can occur on the condition that the second CB role has been won. In this case, it is possible to increase the importance of achieving a winning state for the second CB role.

In addition, the configuration may be such that when the first CB role is won, the transition to the second section SC2 does not occur, and when the first CB role is won, the configuration may be such that even in the second section SC2, the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 does not occur. In this case, it is possible to increase the disadvantage of entering the winning state of the first CB role.

(39) Although a period during which the section display unit 67 is off may occur even in the second section SC2, this is not limited thereto, and the section display unit 67 may be reliably configured to be on when it is in the second section SC2.

(40) A configuration may be adopted in which an advantage display unit is provided in addition to the interval display unit 67, and when it is the second interval SC2, the interval display unit 67 is always lit, and when it is the first interval SC1, the interval display unit 67 is always off, and when it is in the pseudo bonus state ST4, the advantage display unit is always lit, and when it is not in the pseudo bonus state ST4, the advantage display unit is always off.

(41) The number of games for which the end preparation state ST5 continues is not limited to one game, and may be two, three, four or more games. In addition, there may be multiple types of continuing game numbers in the end preparation state ST5, and the end preparation state ST5 may be configured to be maintained for a continuing game number selected by lottery from the multiple types of continuing game numbers.

(42) In the second control process for the game section (FIG. 38), the update process (steps S1908 to S1912) of the total wins counter 74d in the main RAM 74 is not executed when a replay win is achieved, but the update process may be executed. In this case, when a replay win is achieved, the number of bets for the current game is subtracted from the total wins counter 74d in step S1908, and the number of bets for the current game is added to the total wins counter 74d in step S1910. Therefore, even if the above update process is executed, the value of the total wins counter 74d remains constant.

(43) In a configuration in which the section display unit 67 is in a lit state (i.e., a display state) in the second section SC2, if a predetermined abnormal state occurs in the slot machine 10, the section display unit 67 may be in an unlit state (i.e., a non-display state). In this case, a display corresponding to the type of abnormal state may be performed in the dual-purpose display unit 66. In this configuration in which the dual-purpose display unit 66 and the section display unit 67 are integrated in the common display area 68, if a predetermined abnormal state occurs in the slot machine 10, the section display unit 67 is turned off and a display corresponding to the type of abnormal state is performed in the dual-purpose display unit 66. This prevents the display state of the common display area 68 from changing depending on whether the section is in the second section SC2 or not, even if the same abnormal state occurs, making it easier to identify the type of abnormal state.

(44) The total number of games played and the number of advantageous games, which is the total number of games played in the second section SC2, are stored as history information, and the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games is calculated. However, this is not limited to this, and the number of wins of the predetermined role that is the subject of the lottery in the role lottery process and the total number of games may be stored as history information, and the winning probability of the predetermined role may be calculated. In this case, the first predetermined role and the second predetermined role are present as the target predetermined roles, and the number of wins for each of the first and second predetermined roles may be stored as history information and the winning probability for each of the first and second predetermined roles may be calculated. Also, the number of wins for each of all roles may be stored as history information and the winning probability for each role may be calculated. This makes it possible to notify the manager of the game hall of the winning probability of the roles under management.

The total number of gaming media awarded and the total number of games may also be stored as historical information, and the number of gaming media awarded per unit number of games may be calculated. This makes it possible to notify the manager of the gaming hall of the number of gaming media awarded per unit number of games. The combination of the total number of gaming media awarded and the total number of games may also be stored as historical information separately for each gaming state and second section SC2, and the number of gaming media awarded per unit number of games may also be calculated separately for each gaming state and second section SC2.

(45) In the pseudo bonus state ST4, the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is not limited to a configuration that makes the pseudo bonus state ST4 more advantageous than a gaming state that is not in the pseudo bonus state ST4. For example, the pseudo bonus state ST4 may be configured to be advantageous by increasing the number of gaming media awarded when a small winning combination is achieved.

(46) Notification of the calculation result using the game history is not limited to the configuration in which it is performed by the combined display unit 66 and the interval display unit 67, and may be performed, for example, by using the credit display unit 65, or may be performed by using the credit display unit 65 and the combined display unit 66. Furthermore, when there are multiple types of calculation results to be notified, the events to be notified of each type may be displayed in a sequential switching manner. When the events to be notified are displayed in a sequential switching manner, for example, the type of event to be notified may be displayed in the credit display unit 65, and the calculation result for the event to be notified or information corresponding to the content of the calculation result may be displayed in the combined display unit 66. This makes it possible to notify of multiple types of events to be notified using a small number of display units, even when there are multiple types of events to be notified.

(47) The first section SC1 may also be configured to have an upper limit on the number of continuing games. In this case, when the number of games played continuously in the first section SC1 reaches the upper limit, it will be set to the second section SC2. This makes it possible to compensate for the first section SC1 continuing until it reaches the upper limit. In addition, by making the upper limit for the number of games in the first section SC1 the same for each of the setting values "Setting 1" to "Setting 6," it is possible to prevent any advantage or disadvantage arising from the setting value regarding the upper limit.

(48) The number of active lines is not limited to the main line ML, and may be two, three, four or more active lines. In this case, the number of active lines may be increased as the number of gaming media bets increases, or the maximum number of active lines may be set regardless of the number of gaming media bets.

(49) The type of information transmitted from the master MPU 72 to the presentation MPU 92 is not limited to those in the above embodiments. For example, when a winning event corresponding to the award of game media is achieved, information on the number of game media awarded as a result of the winning event may be transmitted from the master MPU 72 to the presentation MPU 92. In this case, the information on the number of game media awarded as a result of the winning event may be displayed on the image display device 63 or the like. In addition, when some of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped or have stopped spinning even when all of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not stopped, corresponding information may be transmitted from the master MPU 72 to the presentation MPU 92. In this case, a presentation corresponding to the spinning status of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R may be performed on the image display device 63 or the like.

(50) In each of the above embodiments, a bonus of paying out medals is awarded when a small winning combination is achieved, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration and may be configured in any way as long as the bonus is awarded to the player. For example, a prize other than medals may be awarded when a small winning combination is achieved. In addition, in a slot machine that does not have a function for inserting actual medals or paying out medals, and instead manages medals owned by the player by credit, an increase in the number of credited medals corresponds to the awarding of a bonus.

(51) The present invention may be applied to so-called B-type slot machines, or to any type of slot machine, such as C-type, a combination of A-type and C-type, a combination of B-type and C-type, or a type equipped with an RT game, CT game, or AT game. The present invention may also be applied to a configuration in which a bonus state advantageous to the player exists.

(52) The symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R are not limited to pictures, numbers, letters, etc., but may also be geometric lines, figures, etc. In addition, symbols may be formed using light, color, etc., or using three-dimensional shapes, etc., or may be a combination of these. In other words, the symbols may function as identifiable information.

(53) In each of the above embodiments, a specific example of a slot machine 10 is shown, but the present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine in which games are played using game balls as a gaming medium, or to a gaming machine that combines a slot machine and a pachinko machine.

<Inventions extracted from the above embodiments>
The following describes the features of the inventions extracted from the above-described embodiments, while indicating, as necessary, their effects, etc. In the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiments are appropriately indicated in parentheses, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations indicated in parentheses.

<Features Group A>
Feature A1. A situation setting means for setting a favorable transition possible situation (second section SC2) (in the first embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step S1805 in the main MPU 72, in the fourth embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step S3504 in the main MPU 72, and in the fifth embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step S3605 in the main MPU 72);
When the advantageous transition is possible, advantageous transition means for transitioning the gaming state to an advantageous gaming state (pseudo bonus state ST4) advantageous to the player (in the first embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S2203, S2206, and S2213 in the master MPU 72; in the fifth embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step S3803 in the master MPU 72);
A status continuation means for continuing the advantageous transition possible status when the advantageous gaming state ends (a function for executing the processes of steps S2711 to S2713 in the master MPU 72 in the first embodiment, and a function for executing the processes of steps S3905 and S3906 in the master MPU 72 in the fifth embodiment);
Equipped with
The advantageous transition means is capable of transitioning a gaming state to the advantageous gaming state in the advantageous transition possible situation that is continued by the situation continuation means.

According to feature A1, a transition to an advantageous gaming state occurs in a situation where an advantageous transition is possible, so a player who expects a transition to an advantageous gaming state will expect the situation to become one where an advantageous transition is possible. In this case, when the advantageous gaming state ends, the situation where an advantageous transition is possible may continue, and a transition to the advantageous gaming state may occur in that continued situation where an advantageous transition is possible. This makes it possible for a player to expect the occurrence of a further advantageous gaming state even if the advantageous gaming state has ended.

Feature A2. The gaming machine described in Feature A1 is characterized in that it is equipped with a predetermined termination means (a function for executing the processing of step S1914 in the main MPU 72) that terminates both the advantageous gaming state and the advantageous transition possible situation.

According to feature A2, when an advantageous game state ends, not only is there a case where the advantageous transition situation continues, but there is also a case where both the advantageous game state and the advantageous transition situation end. This makes it possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the advantageous transition situation continues when the advantageous game state ends.

Feature A3. A favorable end means for ending the favorable gaming state based on the fact that the favorable end condition is satisfied in the favorable gaming state (the number of remaining continuing games becomes "0") (in the first embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S2710 to S2716 in the master MPU 72, and in the fifth embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step S3905 in the master MPU 72);
A situation ending means (a function for executing the process of step S1914 in the main MPU 72) for ending the advantageous transition possible situation based on the fact that a situation ending condition is satisfied in the advantageous transition possible situation (the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied);
When the situation end condition is satisfied in the advantageous gaming state, a means for terminating the advantageous gaming state even if the advantageous ending condition is not satisfied (a function for executing the process of step S1914 in the main MPU 72);
The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, characterized by comprising:

According to feature A3, if the condition for ending the situation is met in the advantageous gaming state, the advantageous gaming state also ends with the end of the situation in which an advantageous transition is possible, even if the condition for ending the situation is not met. This makes it possible to prevent the advantageous gaming state from continuing for an excessively long time. Furthermore, with this configuration, not only is there a case in which the advantageous transition possible situation continues when the advantageous gaming state ends, but there is also a case in which both the advantageous gaming state and the advantageous transition possible situation end. This makes it possible to diversify whether or not the advantageous transition possible situation continues when the advantageous gaming state ends.

Feature A4. The gaming machine described in Feature A3, characterized in that the situation ending means determines that the situation ending condition is met when the number of games played in the advantageous transition possible situation reaches an upper limit number of games, and ends the advantageous transition possible situation.

According to feature A4, the advantageous transition possible situation ends when the number of games played in the advantageous transition possible situation reaches the upper limit number of games, so it is possible to prevent the advantageous transition possible situation from continuing for an excessively long period of time.

Feature A5. The gaming machine according to feature A3 or A4, wherein the situation ending means determines that the situation ending condition is met when an increase in the predetermined difference number from a predetermined reference value reaches an upper limit difference number, in which the predetermined difference number is set to the minimum value of the predetermined difference number, by subtracting the total number of game media consumed to execute games when the advantageous transition possible situation continues from the total number of game media awarded by games executed when the advantageous transition possible situation continues, and ends the advantageous transition possible situation.

According to feature A5, the advantageous transition possible situation ends when the increase in the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value in the advantageous transition possible situation reaches the upper limit difference number, so it is possible to prevent the advantageous transition possible situation from continuing for an excessively long time.

Feature A6. The situation end condition is a condition that is established when the game is repeated in the advantageous transition possible situation,
The game is repeated in the advantageous transition possible situation, so that a predetermined pre-termination condition is satisfied before the situation termination condition is satisfied,
The gaming machine described in any one of features A3 to A5, characterized in that the advantageous transition means is equipped with a means (a function of executing the processing of step S2206 in the main MPU 72) for transitioning the gaming state to the advantageous gaming state based on the specified pre-termination condition being satisfied in the advantageous transition possible situation continued by the situation continuation means (the value of the continued game number counter 74c becoming a second reference number of games or the value of the total number of wins counter 74d becoming a second reference number of wins or more).

According to feature A6, if the favorable transition possible situation continues after the favorable gaming state ends, the situation end condition of the favorable transition possible situation is met, and a transition to the favorable gaming state occurs when a predetermined pre-termination condition is met before the favorable transition possible situation ends. This makes it possible to prevent the favorable transition possible situation from ending without a transition to a further favorable gaming state, even if the favorable transition possible situation continues after the favorable gaming state ends.

Feature A7. The situation end condition is a condition that is established when the game is repeated in the advantageous transition possible situation,
The game is repeated in the advantageous transition situation, and a specific pre-termination condition is satisfied before the situation termination condition is satisfied (the sum of the value of the continued game number counter 74c and the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter is equal to or greater than a first reference number of games, or the sum of the value of the total winning number counter 74d and the value obtained by multiplying the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter by the expected winning value is equal to or greater than a first reference number of winnings),
The gaming machine described in any one of features A3 to A6, characterized in that the situation ending means ends the advantageous transition possible situation when the advantageous gaming state ends when the specific pre-termination condition is satisfied, even if the situation ending condition is not satisfied.

According to feature A7, if the advantageous gaming state ends when a specific pre-termination condition is met, the advantageous transition possible state ends even if the state termination condition is not met. This makes it possible to prevent the advantageous transition possible state from continuing when the advantageous gaming state ends in a situation where the state termination condition that ends the advantageous transition possible state is close to being met. This makes it possible to prevent an event from occurring in which, even though a transition to an advantageous gaming state has occurred, the state termination condition is immediately met and the advantageous gaming state ends with the end of the advantageous transition possible state.

Feature A8. Equipped with an add-on means (a function for executing the processes of steps S2603 to S2616 and steps S2703 to S2708 in the master MPU 72) for executing an add-on process to increase the number of games to be played before the advantageous gaming state ends based on the occurrence of an add-on opportunity in the advantageous gaming state,
The gaming machine described in feature A7 is characterized in that the adding-on means does not execute the adding-on processing even if the adding-on trigger occurs when the specific pre-termination condition is met in the advantageous gaming state.

According to feature A8, if a specific pre-termination condition is met in a favorable gaming state, the process for adding on is not executed even if an opportunity for adding on occurs. This makes it possible to prevent an event from occurring in which the favorable gaming state ends when the situation termination condition is met and the favorable transition possible situation ends, even though the process for adding on has been executed.

Feature A9. Equipped with a termination condition notification means (a function for executing the processes of steps S2512, S2513, and S2817 in the performance side MPU 92) for notifying the advantageous termination condition in the advantageous game state,
The gaming machine according to feature A7 or A8, wherein the termination condition notification means prevents the advantageous termination condition from being notified in the advantageous gaming state when the specific pre-termination condition is established.

According to feature A9, if a specific pre-termination condition is met, the advantageous termination condition is not notified during the advantageous game state. This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the advantageous game state ends as the advantageous transition possible situation ends due to the situation termination condition being met even though the advantageous termination condition is not met.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A9, features B1 to B13, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E10, features F1 to F8, features G1 to G7, and features H1 to H10 may be applied to the features A1 to A9. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

<Characteristics Group B>
Feature B1. A situation setting means (a function for executing the processing of step S3105 in the main MPU 72 of the third embodiment) for setting a favorable transition possible situation (second section SC2);
When the advantageous transition is possible, an advantageous transition means (a function for executing the process of step S3206 in the main MPU 72 of the third embodiment) for transitioning the game state to an advantageous game state (pseudo bonus state ST4) advantageous to the player;
A status continuation means for continuing the advantageous transition possible status when the advantageous game state ends (a function for executing the processing of steps S3310 to S3312 in the main MPU 72 of the third embodiment);
A transition limiting means for limiting the transition of the advantageous game state in the advantageous transition possible situation continued by the situation continuing means (a function for executing the processing of steps S3213 to S3216 in the main MPU 72 of the third embodiment);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature B1, a transition to an advantageous gaming state occurs in an advantageous transition situation, so a player hoping for a transition to an advantageous gaming state will hope for an advantageous transition situation to occur. In this case, when the advantageous gaming state ends, the advantageous transition situation may continue, and transition to the advantageous gaming state is restricted in this continued advantageous transition situation. This makes it possible to forcibly generate a situation in which transition to an advantageous gaming state is restricted once an advantageous gaming state has ended, while keeping constant the conditions for transition to an advantageous gaming state when a new advantageous transition situation begins.

Feature B2. A gaming machine according to Feature B1, characterized in that it is provided with a means (a function for executing the process of step S1914 in the master MPU 72, a function for executing the process of steps S3215 and S3216 in the master MPU 72 of the third embodiment) for terminating the advantageous transition possible state based on the establishment of a release condition in the advantageous transition possible state but not in the advantageous game state (the number of remaining release games becomes "0" or a release win is obtained in the release lottery process).

According to feature B2, the advantageous transition possible state ends when the release condition is met in a situation where an advantageous transition possible state is available but the player is not in an advantageous gaming state. Then, when the advantageous transition possible state ends, a transition to an advantageous gaming state may occur as a new advantageous transition possible state begins. Therefore, the player will hope that the release condition will be met in a situation where an advantageous transition possible state is available but the player is not in an advantageous gaming state.

Feature B3. A gaming machine according to feature B1 or B2, characterized in that it is provided with a means for ending the advantageous transition possible state based on the completion of the determined number of games to be released when the advantageous gaming state ends (a function for making a positive determination in step S3214 in the main MPU 72 of the third embodiment and executing the processing of steps S3215 and S3216).

According to feature B3, when the advantageous game state ends, the advantageous transition possible state ends based on the completion of the determined release game number, so in a situation where an advantageous transition possible state is in effect but the advantageous game state is not in effect, the player will expect the completion of the release game number to be completed early.

Feature B4. A means for executing a cancellation lottery process in the advantageous transition possible situation but not in the advantageous game state (a function for executing the process of step S3218 in the main MPU 72 of the third embodiment);
A means for terminating the advantageous transition possible state based on the fact that the cancellation has been selected in the cancellation lottery process (a function for making a positive determination in step S3219 in the master MPU 72 of the third embodiment and executing the processes of steps S3215 and S3216);
A gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3, characterized in that it is provided with:

According to feature B4, when a situation where a favorable transition is possible but the player is not in an advantageous game state, the situation where a favorable transition is possible ends when a cancellation lottery process is executed and a cancellation win is obtained. Therefore, when a situation where a favorable transition is possible but the player is not in an advantageous game state, the player will hope that the cancellation lottery process will be executed and that a cancellation win will be obtained in the cancellation lottery process.

Feature B5. A favorable end means (a function for executing the process of step S3310 in the main MPU 72 of the third embodiment) that ends the favorable gaming state based on the fact that a favorable end condition is satisfied in the favorable gaming state (the number of remaining continuing games becomes "0");
A situation ending means (a function for executing the process of step S1914 in the main MPU 72) for ending the advantageous transition possible situation based on the fact that a situation ending condition is satisfied in the advantageous transition possible situation (the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied);
When the situation end condition is satisfied in the advantageous gaming state, a means for terminating the advantageous gaming state even if the advantageous ending condition is not satisfied (a function for executing the process of step S1914 in the main MPU 72);
A gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B4, characterized in that it is equipped with:

According to feature B5, if the condition for ending the situation is met during an advantageous gaming state, the advantageous gaming state also ends with the end of the situation in which an advantageous transition is possible, even if the condition for ending the situation is not met. This makes it possible to prevent the advantageous gaming state from continuing for an excessively long time. Furthermore, with this configuration, not only is there a case in which the situation in which an advantageous transition is possible continues when the advantageous gaming state ends, but there is also a case in which both the advantageous gaming state and the situation in which an advantageous transition is possible end. This makes it possible to diversify whether or not the situation in which an advantageous transition is possible continues when the advantageous gaming state ends.

Feature B6. The gaming machine described in Feature B5, wherein the situation ending means determines that the situation ending condition is met when the number of games played in the advantageous transition possible situation reaches an upper limit number of games, and ends the advantageous transition possible situation.

According to feature B6, the advantageous transition possible situation ends when the number of games played in the advantageous transition possible situation reaches the upper limit number of games, so it is possible to prevent the advantageous transition possible situation from continuing for an excessively long period of time.

Feature B7. The gaming machine according to Feature B5 or B6, wherein the situation ending means determines that the situation ending condition is met when an increase in the predetermined difference number from a predetermined reference value reaches an upper limit difference number, where the predetermined difference number is a predetermined difference number obtained by subtracting the total number of game media consumed to execute games when the advantageous transition possible situation continues from the total number of game media awarded by games executed when the advantageous transition possible situation continues, and the minimum value of the predetermined difference number is a predetermined reference value, and ends the advantageous transition possible situation.

According to feature B7, the advantageous transition possible situation ends when the increase in the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value in the advantageous transition possible situation reaches the upper limit difference number, so it is possible to prevent the advantageous transition possible situation from continuing for an excessively long time.

Feature B8. The gaming machine according to any one of Features B1 to B7, wherein the advantageous transition means transitions the gaming state to the advantageous gaming state based on the start of the advantageous transition possible situation.

According to feature B8, a transition to an advantageous gaming state occurs based on the start of a situation where an advantageous transition is possible, so in a situation where an advantageous transition is possible but the player is not in an advantageous gaming state, the player will expect the situation where an advantageous transition is possible to end early.

Feature B9: A configuration in which a game can be started when a predetermined number of gaming media ("2" or "3") is bet set,
A gaming machine described in any one of features B1 to B8, characterized in that the advantageous transition means makes it possible to transition the gaming state to the advantageous gaming state based on a bet being set on a first predetermined number ("3") of gaming media among the predetermined number in a branching game, which is either the game in which the advantageous transition possible situation was initiated or a game that occurs thereafter.

According to feature B9, when a situation allowing a favorable transition is initiated or in a game that is a branch target that occurs after the initiation of the favorable transition, the gaming state transitions to the favorable gaming state based on the first predetermined number of gaming media being betted, so that when a new situation allowing a favorable transition is initiated, it is basically possible to transition to the favorable gaming state.

Feature B10. The gaming machine described in Feature B9 is characterized in that it is equipped with a non-advantageous setting means (a function for executing the processing of steps S3208 and S3209 in the main MPU 72 of the third embodiment) that sets the advantageous transition possible state to a state that is not the advantageous gaming state when a second predetermined number ("2") of gaming media among the predetermined number is bet set in the game that is the branching target.

According to feature B10, an amusement parlor manager who considers it undesirable for a game parlor to immediately transition to a favorable gaming state when the game parlor opens for business can intentionally create a situation in which a favorable transition is possible but which is not a favorable gaming state by creating a favorable transition situation in advance and setting a bet on a second predetermined number of gaming media in the game that is the target of the branch.

Feature B11. The gaming machine described in Feature B10, wherein the transition restriction means restricts the transition to the advantageous gaming state in a situation where the advantageous transition is possible and is not the advantageous gaming state, which is set by the non-advantageous setting means.

According to feature B11, when a situation where a favorable transition is possible is newly started and a game that is a branch target is betted with a second predetermined number of gaming media, a transition to a favorable gaming state is restricted in the favorable transition possible situation. This makes it possible to intentionally create a situation in which a transition to a favorable gaming state does not occur for a while after the opening of the gaming hall.

Feature B12. The gaming machine according to any one of Features B9 to B11, characterized in that the situation setting means sets the advantageous transition possible situation based on the execution of a game in which the first predetermined number of gaming media is bet in a situation in which the advantageous transition possible situation is not possible.

According to feature B12, the advantageous transition possible state is set based on the execution of a game in which a first predetermined number of gaming media is bet in a state in which an advantageous transition is not possible, so it is considered that even in a game that is subject to branching, the player plays the game in a state in which the first predetermined number of gaming media is bet. This basically makes it possible to transition to an advantageous gaming state when a new advantageous transition possible state occurs.

Feature B13. A role selection means for executing a role selection process in each game (a function for executing a role selection process in the master MPU 72);
A corresponding control execution means (a function for executing the processes of steps S309 and S310 in the master MPU 72) for executing winning corresponding control based on the establishment of a winning corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination;
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B12, characterized in that the situation setting means sets the advantageous transition possible situation based on winning any role in the lottery process for the role in a situation in which the advantageous transition is not possible.

According to feature B13, in a situation where a favorable transition is not possible, a favorable transition possible situation is set based on winning any role in the role selection process, so that it is possible to quickly transition from a situation where a favorable transition is not possible to a situation where a favorable transition is possible.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A9, features B1 to B13, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E10, features F1 to F8, features G1 to G7, and features H1 to H10 may be applied to the features B1 to B13. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

<Characteristics Group C>
Feature C1. In a gaming machine in which a game can be started when a predetermined number of gaming media ("2" or "3") is bet,
A situation setting means (a function for executing the processing of step S3105 in the main side MPU 72 of the third embodiment) for setting the advantageous transition possible situation (second section SC2);
an advantageous transition means (a function for executing the processing of step S3206 in the main MPU 72 of the third embodiment) that enables a game state to be transitioned to an advantageous game state (pseudo bonus state ST4) advantageous to a player based on a bet being set on a first predetermined number ("3") of gaming media among the predetermined number in a game to be branched, which is either a game in which the advantageous transition situation is initiated or a game that occurs thereafter;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature C1, when a situation allowing advantageous transition is started or in a game that is a branch target that occurs after the start of the situation allowing advantageous transition, the gaming state can be transitioned to an advantageous gaming state based on the first predetermined number of gaming media being bet. Therefore, when a situation allowing advantageous transition is newly started, it is basically possible to transition to the advantageous gaming state. Therefore, the player will look forward to the start of a new situation allowing advantageous transition, which can increase the interest of the game.

Feature C2. The gaming machine described in Feature C1 is characterized in that it is equipped with a non-advantageous setting means (a function for executing the processing of steps S3208 and S3209 in the main MPU 72 of the third embodiment) that sets the advantageous transition possible state to a state that is not the advantageous gaming state when a second predetermined number ("2") of gaming media among the predetermined number is bet set in the game that is the branch target.

According to feature C2, an amusement parlor manager who considers it undesirable for a game parlor to immediately transition to a favorable gaming state when the game parlor opens for business can intentionally create a situation in which a favorable transition is possible but which is not a favorable gaming state by creating a favorable transition situation in advance and setting a bet on a second predetermined number of gaming media in the game that is the target of the branch.

Feature C3. The gaming machine described in Feature C2 is characterized by being equipped with a transition restriction means (a function for executing the processing of steps S3213 to S3216 in the main MPU 72 of the third embodiment) that restricts the transition to the advantageous gaming state in a situation where the advantageous transition is possible and the advantageous gaming state is not set by the non-advantageous setting means.

According to feature C3, when a situation where a favorable transition is possible is newly started and a game that is a branch target has a second predetermined number of gaming media bet set, resulting in a situation where a favorable transition is possible but the game is not in a favorable gaming state, a transition to the favorable gaming state in the favorable transition possible situation is restricted. This makes it possible to intentionally create a situation in which a transition to a favorable gaming state does not occur for a while after the game parlor opens for business.

Feature C4. The gaming machine described in Feature C3 is characterized in that it is provided with a means (a function for executing the process of step S1914 in the master MPU 72, a function for executing the process of steps S3215 and S3216 in the master MPU 72 of the third embodiment) for terminating the advantageous transition possible state based on the establishment of a release condition in the advantageous transition possible state but not in the advantageous game state (the number of remaining release games becomes "0" or a release win is obtained in the release lottery process).

According to feature C4, the advantageous transition possible state ends when the release condition is met in a situation where an advantageous transition possible state is available but the player is not in an advantageous game state. Then, when the advantageous transition possible state ends, a transition to an advantageous game state may occur as a new advantageous transition possible state begins. Therefore, the player will hope that the release condition will be met in a situation where an advantageous transition possible state is available but the player is not in an advantageous game state.

Feature C5. A gaming machine according to feature C3 or C4, characterized in that it is provided with a means for ending the advantageous transition possible state based on the completion of the determined number of games to be released when the advantageous gaming state ends (a function for making a positive determination in step S3214 in the main MPU 72 of the third embodiment and executing the processing of steps S3215 and S3216).

According to feature C5, when the advantageous game state ends, the advantageous transition possible state ends based on the completion of the determined release game number, so in a situation where an advantageous transition possible state is in effect but the advantageous game state is not in effect, the player will expect the completion of the release game number to be completed early.

Feature C6. A means for executing a cancellation lottery process in the advantageous transition possible situation but not in the advantageous game state (a function for executing the process of step S3218 in the main MPU 72 of the third embodiment);
A means for terminating the advantageous transition possible state based on the fact that the cancellation has been selected in the cancellation lottery process (a function for making a positive determination in step S3219 in the master MPU 72 of the third embodiment and executing the processes of steps S3215 and S3216);
A gaming machine according to any one of features C3 to C5, characterized in that it is equipped with:

According to feature C6, when a situation where a favorable transition is possible but the player is not in an advantageous game state, the situation where a favorable transition is possible ends when a cancellation lottery process is executed and a cancellation win is obtained. Therefore, when a situation where a favorable transition is possible but the player is not in an advantageous game state, the player will hope that the cancellation lottery process will be executed and that the cancellation lottery process will result in a cancellation win.

Feature C7. The gaming machine according to any one of Features C1 to C6, characterized in that the situation setting means can set the advantageous transition possible situation based on the execution of a game in which the first predetermined number of gaming media is bet in a situation in which the advantageous transition possible situation is not the case.

According to feature C7, a situation where a favorable transition is possible can be set based on the execution of a game in which a first predetermined number of gaming media is bet in a situation where a favorable transition is not possible, so it is considered that even in a game that is subject to branching, the player plays the game in a state in which the first predetermined number of gaming media is bet. This basically makes it possible to transition to a favorable gaming state when a new situation where a favorable transition is possible occurs.

Feature C8. A role selection means for executing a role selection process in each game (a function for executing a role selection process in the master MPU 72);
A corresponding control execution means (a function for executing the processes of steps S309 and S310 in the master MPU 72) for executing winning corresponding control based on the establishment of a winning corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination;
Equipped with
The gaming machine described in any one of features C1 to C7, characterized in that the situation setting means sets the advantageous transition possible situation based on winning any role in the lottery process for the role in a situation where the advantageous transition is not possible.

According to feature C8, in a situation where a favorable transition is not possible, a favorable transition possible situation is set based on winning any role in the role selection process, so that it is possible to quickly transition from a situation where a favorable transition is not possible to a situation where a favorable transition is possible.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A9, features B1 to B13, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E10, features F1 to F8, features G1 to G7, and features H1 to H10 may be applied to the features C1 to C8. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. A situation setting means (a function for executing the processing of step S3504 in the main MPU 72 of the fourth embodiment) for setting a favorable transition possible situation (second section SC2);
When the advantageous transition is possible, advantageous transition means (a function for executing the processes of steps S2203, S2206, and S2213 in the main MPU 72) for transitioning the game state to an advantageous game state (pseudo bonus state ST4) advantageous to the player;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that the presence or absence of a transition to the advantageous game state in the advantageous transition possible situation or the transition manner differs depending on whether the situation set as the advantageous transition possible situation is a specified situation (a situation in which first CB winning data or second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74).

According to feature D1, a transition to an advantageous game state occurs in a situation where an advantageous transition is possible, so a player who expects a transition to an advantageous game state will expect the situation to become one where an advantageous transition is possible. In this case, whether or not a transition to an advantageous game state occurs in the advantageous transition possible situation, or the transition mode, will differ depending on whether or not the situation set as the advantageous transition possible situation is a specified situation. This will cause the player to pay attention not only to the occurrence of a situation where an advantageous transition is possible, but also to whether or not the situation is a specified situation. This will make it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Feature D2. Equipped with a predetermined information storage means (main RAM 74) capable of storing predetermined information (first CB winning data or second CB winning data);
The gaming machine described in feature D1, wherein the specified situation is a situation in which the specified information is stored in the specified information storage means.

According to feature D2, the presence or absence of a transition to an advantageous game state in an advantageous transition possible situation, or the transition manner, differs depending on whether the situation set as an advantageous transition possible situation is a situation for which predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means. This allows the player to pay attention not only to the occurrence of an advantageous transition possible situation, but also to whether the situation is one for which predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means.

Feature D3. The device includes an information erasing unit (a function of executing a partial clear process and a full clear process in the main MPU 72) that erases the predetermined information stored in the predetermined information storage unit based on the start of the supply of operating power;
A gaming machine as described in feature D2, characterized in that the specified information stored in the specified information storage means is not erased when the advantageous transition possible situation ends.

According to feature D3, immediately after the supply of operating power is started, the specified information may not be stored in the specified information storage means, but even if the advantageous transition possible situation ends, the specified information is not erased as a result. This makes it possible to differentiate between the presence or absence of a transition to an advantageous game state or the transition manner between an advantageous transition possible situation that occurs immediately after the supply of operating power is started and an advantageous transition possible situation that occurs again after an advantageous transition possible situation has already occurred.

Feature D4: Equipped with a means for executing a setting value determination process for determining a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage level (a function for executing the process of step S106 in the main MPU 72);
The gaming machine described in feature D3, wherein the information erasing means erases the specified information stored in the specified information storage means when the setting value determination process is executed.

According to feature D4, when the process for determining the setting value to be used is executed, the specified information is not stored in the specified information storage means, so if a situation in which a favorable transition is possible occurs immediately after this, the presence or absence of a transition to a favorable game state, or the mode of the transition, corresponds to a situation in which the specified information is not stored.

Feature D5. A role selection means for executing a role selection process in each game (a function for executing the processes of steps S3401 to S3408 in the master MPU 72);
A corresponding control execution means (a function for executing the processes of steps S309 and S310 in the master MPU 72) for executing winning corresponding control based on the establishment of a winning corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination;
A means for storing the predetermined information in the predetermined information storage means when a predetermined role (index value IV = 17) is won in the lottery process of the role (a function for executing the process of step S3409 in the main MPU 72);
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features D2 to D4, characterized in that the state in which the specified information is stored in the specified information storage means is maintained even if a specified winning combination corresponding to the specified role is not achieved in a game in which the specified information is stored in the specified information storage means.

According to feature D5, when a predetermined role is won in the role selection process, the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means, so that it is possible to vary the presence or absence of a transition to an advantageous game state or the transition mode depending on whether or not the situation is after a predetermined role is won in the role selection process when an advantageous transition is set as possible.

Feature D6. The situation setting means sets the advantageous transition possible situation based on winning at least the predetermined role in the lottery process of the role in a situation where the advantageous transition possible situation is not the advantageous transition possible situation,
A gaming machine as described in feature D5, characterized in that a memory determination process (processing of step S3505 in the main MPU 72) of whether or not the specified information is stored in the specified information storage means in a game set to the advantageous transition possible situation is executed after the role selection process and before the process of storing the specified information in the specified information storage means.

According to feature D6, even if a predetermined role is won in the lottery process for roles in a game set as a favorable transition possible situation, whether or not the situation set as the favorable transition possible situation is a situation in which the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means is determined before the process of storing the predetermined information in the predetermined information storage means for the winning of the predetermined role. As a result, in order for the situation set as the favorable transition possible situation to be determined to be a situation in which the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means, it is necessary that the predetermined role has been won in the lottery process for roles in a game prior to the game set as the favorable transition possible situation.

Feature D7. The predetermined information is information indicating that the predetermined role has been won in the lottery process for the role,
A gaming machine described in feature D5 or D6, characterized in that when the specified winning is achieved while the specified information is stored in the specified information storage means, the specified information stored in the specified information storage means is erased.

Feature D7 makes it possible to achieve the excellent effects described above by utilizing information indicating that a specific role has been won in the role selection process.

Feature D8. When the predetermined role is won in the lottery process of the role, the specific role (10th compensation role) is also won.
A gaming machine described in any one of features D5 to D7, characterized in that the achievement of a specific winning combination (tenth compensation winning combination) corresponding to the specific combination is given priority over the achievement of the predetermined winning combination.

According to feature D8, even if a predetermined role is won in the role selection process, the achievement of a specific win corresponding to the specific role that is won at the same time is given priority, so it is possible to maintain the situation in which the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means until a game later than the game in which the predetermined role is won in the role selection process.

Feature D9. The advantageous transition means includes a transition execution means (a function for executing the processing of steps S3506 to S3508 in the main MPU 72 of the fourth embodiment) that enables the game state to be transitioned to the advantageous game state based on the advantageous transition possible state being set in the predetermined situation,
A gaming machine described in any one of features D1 to D8, characterized in that when the advantageous transition possible situation is set in a situation that is not the specified situation, the situation becomes one in which the advantageous transition possible situation is a gaming state that is not the advantageous gaming state.

According to feature D9, a transition to an advantageous gaming state occurs based on the setting of an advantageous transition possible situation in a specified situation, and if an advantageous transition possible situation is set in a situation that is not the specified situation, the game state becomes one in which an advantageous transition possible situation is possible but is not an advantageous gaming state, so it is advantageous for the player to be set in an advantageous transition possible situation in the specified situation. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to whether or not the situation is the specified situation.

Feature D10. The transition execution means
A means for executing an advantageous transition lottery process based on the fact that the advantageous transition possible situation has been set in the predetermined situation (a function for executing the process of step S3506 in the master MPU 72 of the fourth embodiment);
A means for transitioning the game state to the advantageous game state based on a transition winning result in the advantageous transition lottery process (a function for executing the process of step S3508 in the master MPU 72 of the fourth embodiment);
The gaming machine described in feature D9 is characterized by being equipped with:

According to feature D10, even if a situation where an advantageous transition is possible is set in a specified situation, a transition to an advantageous game state will not occur unless a transition is won in the advantageous transition lottery process. This allows the player to hope that a situation where an advantageous transition is possible will be set in a specified situation, and to hope that a transition will be won in the advantageous transition lottery process if a situation where an advantageous transition is possible is set in a specified situation. This makes it possible to diversify the objects that the player focuses on.

Feature D11. The gaming machine described in feature D9 or D10, characterized in that the advantageous transition means includes a means (a function for executing the process of step S2213 in the main MPU 72) for transitioning the gaming state to the advantageous gaming state, regardless of whether the predetermined situation exists or not, based on the occurrence of a predetermined transition trigger (a transition winning in the transition lottery process of step S2112 or the remaining number of released games becoming "0") in a situation in which the advantageous transition is possible but the gaming state is not the advantageous gaming state.

According to feature D11, when a game state where a favorable transition is possible but is not a favorable game state continues, a transition to the favorable game state occurs when a specified transition trigger occurs regardless of whether or not the specified state exists. This makes it possible to make the conditions required for a transition to the favorable game state different between when a favorable transition is possible for a new game state and when a game state where a favorable transition is possible but is not a favorable game state continues. This makes it possible to diversify the transition patterns of the favorable game state in relation to the favorable transition possible situation.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A9, features B1 to B13, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E10, features F1 to F8, features G1 to G7, and features H1 to H10 may be applied to the features D1 to D11. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

<Features Group E>
Feature E1. A situation setting means for setting a favorable transition possible situation (second section SC2) (a function for executing the processing of step S3504 in the main MPU 72 of the fourth embodiment);
When the advantageous transition is possible, advantageous transition means (a function for executing the processes of steps S2203, S2206, and S2213 in the main MPU 72) for transitioning the game state to an advantageous game state (pseudo bonus state ST4) advantageous to the player;
Equipped with
The advantageous transition means is
A first transition means (a function for executing the processes of step S2203 and step S3508 in the main MPU 72) for transitioning the game state to the advantageous game state based on the setting of the advantageous transition possible situation;
A second transition means (a function of executing the process of step S2213 in the main MPU 72) for transitioning the game state to the advantageous game state in a game state in which the advantageous transition is possible but is not the advantageous game state;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that the conditions for transition to the advantageous gaming state by the first transition means are different from the conditions for transition to the advantageous gaming state by the second transition means.

According to feature E1, a transition to an advantageous game state can occur based on the setting of an advantageous transition possible situation, and a transition to an advantageous game state can also occur in a game state where an advantageous transition possible situation is present but is not an advantageous game state. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the advantageous transition possible situation. In this case, the conditions required for a transition to an advantageous game state differ between when a new advantageous transition possible situation is set and when a game state where an advantageous transition possible situation is present but is not an advantageous game state continues. This makes it possible to diversify the transition patterns of the advantageous game state in relation to the advantageous transition possible situation.

Feature E2. The first transition means can transition the game state to the advantageous game state based on the advantageous transition possible situation being set in a predetermined situation (a situation in which the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74), and does not transition the game state to the advantageous game state when the advantageous transition possible situation is set in a situation other than the predetermined situation;
The second transition means of the gaming machine described in feature E1 is characterized in that it is capable of transitioning the gaming state to the advantageous gaming state, regardless of whether or not the predetermined situation exists, based on the occurrence of a predetermined transition trigger (a transition win in the transition lottery process of step S2112 or the remaining number of release games becoming "0") in a gaming state in which the advantageous transition is possible but which is not the advantageous gaming state.

According to feature E2, when a new advantageous transition situation is set, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the predetermined situation is met, and when a situation in which an advantageous transition situation is possible but the game state is not an advantageous game state continues, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not a predetermined transition opportunity occurs.

Feature E3. The first transition means is
A means for executing an advantageous transition lottery process based on the fact that the advantageous transition possible situation has been set in the predetermined situation (a function for executing the process of step S3506 in the master MPU 72 of the fourth embodiment);
A means for transitioning the game state to the advantageous game state based on a transition winning result in the advantageous transition lottery process (a function for executing the process of step S3508 in the master MPU 72 of the fourth embodiment);
The gaming machine described in feature E2 is characterized by being equipped with:

According to feature E3, even if a situation where an advantageous transition is possible is set in a specified situation, a transition to an advantageous game state will not occur unless a transition is won in the advantageous transition lottery process. This allows the player to hope that a situation where an advantageous transition is possible will be set in the specified situation, and to hope that a transition will be won in the advantageous transition lottery process if a situation where an advantageous transition is possible is set in the specified situation. This makes it possible to diversify the objects that the player focuses on.

Feature E4: Equipped with a predetermined information storage means (main RAM 74) capable of storing predetermined information (first CB winning data or second CB winning data);
The gaming machine according to feature E2 or E3, wherein the predetermined situation is a situation in which the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means.

According to feature E4, the presence or absence of a transition to an advantageous game state in an advantageous transition possible situation, or the transition manner, differs depending on whether the situation set as an advantageous transition possible situation is a situation for which predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means. This allows the player to pay attention not only to the occurrence of an advantageous transition possible situation, but also to whether the situation is one for which predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means.

Feature E5. The device includes an information erasing unit (a function of executing a partial clear process and a full clear process in the main MPU 72) that erases the predetermined information stored in the predetermined information storage unit based on the start of the supply of operating power;
A gaming machine as described in feature E4, characterized in that the specified information stored in the specified information storage means is not erased when the advantageous transition possible situation ends.

According to feature E5, immediately after the supply of operating power is started, the specified information may not be stored in the specified information storage means, but even if the advantageous transition possible situation ends, the specified information is not erased as a result. This makes it possible to differentiate between the presence or absence of a transition to an advantageous game state or the transition manner between an advantageous transition possible situation that occurs immediately after the supply of operating power is started and an advantageous transition possible situation that occurs again after an advantageous transition possible situation has already occurred.

Feature E6: A means for executing a setting value determination process for determining a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage level (a function for executing the process of step S106 in the main MPU 72) is provided;
The gaming machine described in feature E5, wherein the information erasing means erases the specified information stored in the specified information storage means when the setting value determination process is executed.

According to feature E6, when the process for determining the setting value to be used is executed, the specified information is not stored in the specified information storage means, so if a situation in which a favorable transition is possible occurs immediately after this, the presence or absence of a transition to a favorable game state, or the mode of the transition, will correspond to a situation in which the specified information is not stored.

Feature E7: A role selection means for executing a role selection process in each game (a function for executing the processes of steps S3401 to S3408 in the master MPU 72);
A corresponding control execution means (a function for executing the processes of steps S309 and S310 in the master MPU 72) for executing winning corresponding control based on the establishment of a winning corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination;
A means for storing the predetermined information in the predetermined information storage means when a predetermined role (index value IV = 17) is won in the lottery process of the role (a function for executing the process of step S3409 in the main MPU 72);
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features E4 to E6, characterized in that the state in which the specified information is stored in the specified information storage means is maintained even if a specified winning combination corresponding to the specified role is not achieved in a game in which the specified information is stored in the specified information storage means.

According to feature E7, when a predetermined role is won in the role selection process, the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means, so that it is possible to vary the presence or absence of a transition to an advantageous game state or the transition mode when an advantageous transition is set as possible depending on whether or not the situation is after a predetermined role is won in the role selection process.

Feature E8. The situation setting means sets the advantageous transition possible situation based on winning at least the predetermined role in the lottery process of the role in a situation where the advantageous transition possible situation is not the advantageous transition possible situation,
A gaming machine as described in feature E7, characterized in that a memory determination process (processing of step S3505 in the main MPU 72) of whether or not the specified information is stored in the specified information storage means in a game set to the advantageous transition possible situation is executed after the role selection process and before the process of storing the specified information in the specified information storage means.

According to feature E8, even if a predetermined role is won in the lottery process for roles in a game set as a favorable transition possible situation, whether or not the situation set as the favorable transition possible situation is a situation in which the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means is determined before the process of storing the predetermined information in the predetermined information storage means for the winning of the predetermined role. As a result, in order for the situation set as the favorable transition possible situation to be a situation in which the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means, it is necessary for the predetermined role to have been won in the lottery process for roles in a game prior to the game set as the favorable transition possible situation.

Feature E9. The predetermined information is information indicating that the predetermined role has been won in the lottery process for the role,
A gaming machine described in feature E7 or E8, characterized in that when the specified winning is achieved while the specified information is stored in the specified information storage means, the specified information stored in the specified information storage means is erased.

Feature E9 makes it possible to achieve the excellent effects described above by utilizing information indicating that a specific role has been won in the role selection process.

Feature E10. When the predetermined role is won in the lottery process of the role, the specific role (tenth compensation role) is also won.
A gaming machine described in any one of features E7 to E9, characterized in that the achievement of a specific winning combination (tenth compensation winning combination) corresponding to the specific role is given priority over the achievement of the predetermined winning combination.

According to feature E10, even if a predetermined role is won in the role selection process, the achievement of a specific win corresponding to the specific role that is won at the same time is given priority, so it is possible to maintain the situation in which the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means until a game later than the game in which the predetermined role is won in the role selection process.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A9, features B1 to B13, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E10, features F1 to F8, features G1 to G7, and features H1 to H10 may be applied to the features E1 to E10. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

<Feature Group F>
Feature F1. A situation setting means for setting a favorable transition possible situation (second section SC2) (a function for executing the processing of step S3605 in the main MPU 72 of the fifth embodiment);
When the advantageous transition is possible, an advantageous transition means (a function for executing the process of step S3803 in the main MPU 72 of the fifth embodiment) for transitioning the game state to an advantageous game state (pseudo bonus state ST4) advantageous to the player;
When the advantageous game state ends, a termination expectation setting means (a function for executing the processing of step S3906 in the main MPU 72 of the fifth embodiment) for setting the termination expectation state (second CZ state ST7);
Equipped with
The gaming machine is characterized in that the end-time expected state is more likely to transition to the advantageous gaming state than a predetermined gaming state (normal gaming state ST1) which is a situation in which the advantageous transition is possible but which is not the end-time expected state.

According to feature F1, a transition to an advantageous gaming state occurs in a situation where a transition to an advantageous gaming state is possible, so a player who expects a transition to an advantageous gaming state will expect a situation where a transition to an advantageous gaming state is possible. In this case, when the advantageous gaming state ends, the expected end state is set, which makes it easier to transition to an advantageous gaming state. This makes it possible to make the player expect a transition to an advantageous gaming state again even if the advantageous gaming state ends.

Feature F2. A gaming machine according to feature F1, characterized in that it is provided with a means for terminating the advantageous transition possible state if a transition to the advantageous gaming state does not occur in the expected end state (a function for executing the processing of steps S3817 and S3818 in the main MPU 72 of the fifth embodiment).

According to feature F2, if the end expectation state ends without a transition to an advantageous gaming state occurring, the advantageous transition possible state ends. This makes it possible to prevent the advantageous transition possible state from continuing in a state where the expectation of a transition to an advantageous gaming state is low when the end expectation state ends without a transition to an advantageous gaming state occurring.

Feature F3. A gaming machine according to feature F1 or F2, characterized in that it is equipped with a start expectation setting means (a function for executing the processing of step S3606 in the main MPU 72 of the fifth embodiment) that sets a start expectation state (first CZ state ST6) that is easier to transition to the advantageous gaming state than the predetermined gaming state based on the advantageous transition possible situation being set.

According to feature F3, when a new advantageous transition situation is set, the game is set to a start expectation state that makes it easier to transition to an advantageous game state. This makes it possible to increase the player's sense of anticipation for a new advantageous transition situation being set.

In particular, when the configuration of feature F2 is provided, even if a transition to the advantageous gaming state does not occur in the end expectation state, if the advantageous transition situation is subsequently newly set, the start expectation state will be established. This makes it possible to increase the probability of returning to the advantageous gaming state after the advantageous gaming state ends. Furthermore, in the case of this configuration, when the advantageous gaming state ends, both the end expectation state and the start expectation state occur sequentially, whereas when a beneficial transition situation is newly set after the start of the supply of operating power, for example, only the start expectation state occurs. Therefore, it is possible to increase the probability of returning to the advantageous gaming state after the advantageous gaming state ends, even if the transition probability to the advantageous gaming state immediately after the start of the supply of operating power is not set very high.

Feature F4. A gaming machine according to feature F3, characterized in that if a transition to the advantageous gaming state does not occur in the starting expectation state, the predetermined gaming state is entered.

According to feature F4, even if a transition to a favorable gaming state does not occur in the expected state at the start, the game state becomes a specified gaming state, so it is possible to continue a gaming state in which a favorable transition is possible but which is not a favorable gaming state.

Feature F5. A role selection means for executing a role selection process in each game (a function for executing a role selection process in the master MPU 72);
A corresponding control execution means (a function for executing the processes of steps S309 and S310 in the master MPU 72) for executing winning corresponding control based on the establishment of a winning corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination;
Equipped with
The gaming machine described in any one of features F1 to F4, characterized in that the situation setting means sets the situation to one in which advantageous transition is possible based on winning any role in the lottery process for the role in a situation in which the advantageous transition is not possible.

According to feature F5, in a situation where a favorable transition is not possible, a favorable transition possible situation is set based on winning any role in the role selection process, so that it is possible to quickly transition from a situation where a favorable transition is not possible to a situation where a favorable transition is possible.

Feature F6. A situation setting means for setting a favorable transition possible situation (second section SC2) (a function for executing the processing of step S3605 in the main MPU 72 of the fifth embodiment);
When the advantageous transition is possible, an advantageous transition means (a function for executing the process of step S3803 in the main MPU 72 of the fifth embodiment) for transitioning the game state to an advantageous game state (pseudo bonus state ST4) advantageous to the player;
A start-time expectation setting means (a function for executing the processing of step S3606 in the main MPU 72 of the fifth embodiment) for setting the start-time expectation state (first CZ state ST6) based on the setting of the advantageous transition possible situation;
Equipped with
The gaming machine is characterized in that the starting expectation state is more likely to transition to the advantageous gaming state than a predetermined gaming state (normal gaming state ST1) which is a situation in which the advantageous transition is possible but which is not the starting expectation state.

According to feature F6, when a new advantageous transition situation is set, the starting expected state is set so that it is easy to transition to an advantageous game state. This makes it possible to increase the player's sense of anticipation for a new advantageous transition situation being set.

Feature F7. A gaming machine according to feature F6, characterized in that if a transition to the advantageous gaming state does not occur in the starting expectation state, the predetermined gaming state is entered.

According to feature F7, even if a transition to a favorable gaming state does not occur in the expected state at the start, the game state becomes a specified gaming state, so it is possible to continue a gaming state in which a favorable transition is possible but which is not a favorable gaming state.

Feature F8. A role selection means for executing a role selection process in each game (a function for executing a role selection process in the master MPU 72);
A corresponding control execution means (a function for executing the processes of steps S309 and S310 in the master MPU 72) for executing winning corresponding control based on the establishment of a winning corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination;
Equipped with
The gaming machine described in feature F6 or F7, wherein the situation setting means sets the advantageous transition possible situation based on winning any role in the lottery process for the role in a situation where the advantageous transition is not possible.

According to feature F8, in a situation where a favorable transition is not possible, a favorable transition possible situation is set based on winning any role in the role selection process, so that it is possible to quickly transition from a situation where a favorable transition is not possible to a situation where a favorable transition is possible.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A9, features B1 to B13, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E10, features F1 to F8, features G1 to G7, and features H1 to H10 may be applied to the features F1 to F8. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

<Feature Group G>
Feature G1. A picture display means (reel unit 31) that displays a picture in a variable manner;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that is operated to start the variable display of the picture on the picture display means;
A game start means for setting a game execution status based on the operation of the start operation means (a function for making a positive determination in step S304 in the master MPU 72);
A role selection means (a function for selecting a role in the master MPU 72) for selecting a role when the game is in the execution state;
A stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) that is operated to stop the variable display of the picture in the picture display means;
A symbol display control means (a function of executing a reel control process in the main MPU 72) controls the symbol display means so that the display of the symbols is started when the game is in the execution state, and the display of the symbols is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means;
A winning corresponding control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S309 and S310 in the master MPU 72) for executing a control corresponding to a winning role when a stop result corresponding to a winning role in the lottery process of the winning role is displayed after the changing display of the pattern by the control of the pattern display control means, as a winning corresponding to the winning role is established;
In a gaming machine equipped with
A special role (index value IV = 10) is set as the role that will be won in the lottery process of the role,
The picture display control means enables a first stop result (a combination of symbols corresponding to a first bell win) to be displayed based on the stop operation means being operated in a first stop mode (first stop of the left reel 32L) when the special role is won, and enables a second stop result (a combination of symbols corresponding to a special bell win) to be displayed based on the stop operation means being operated in a second stop mode (first stop of the right reel 32R) when the special role is won,
This gaming machine is characterized by having a special notification control means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2307 and S2308 in the main MPU 72, and a function of executing the processing of step S2504 in the presentation side MPU 92) that causes a special notification (notification that the right reel 32R should be stopped first) to be executed so that the player can recognize that he should operate the stop operation means in the second stop mode when the special role is won during a specified waiting period (transition waiting period) in which a specified profit (pseudo bonus state ST4) is awarded after a specified number of games have been played.

According to feature G1, if a special combination is won during a specified waiting period in which a specified profit is awarded after a specified number of games have been played, a special notification is executed to enable the player to recognize that he or she should operate the stop operation means in the second stop mode. Then, when the stop operation means is operated in the second stop mode, the second stop result is displayed. This makes it possible to notify the player that the award of the specified profit is approaching by utilizing the stop result of the picture display means. This makes it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

Feature G2. The gaming machine described in Feature G1, characterized in that even if the second stop result is displayed during the predetermined waiting period, the predetermined waiting period continues without the predetermined benefit being awarded until the predetermined number of games is played during the predetermined waiting period.

According to feature G2, even if the second stop result is displayed during the specified waiting period, the specified waiting period continues without the specified benefit being awarded until the specified number of games have been played during the specified waiting period. This makes it possible to notify the player that the specified benefit is approaching, without affecting the timing of the awarding of the specified benefit, by using the stop result of the picture display means.

Feature G3. The gaming machine described in Feature G1 or G2, wherein the special notification control means prevents the special notification from being executed when the second stop result is displayed during the specified waiting period, even if the special role is won again during the specified waiting period.

According to feature G3, if the second stop result is displayed during the specified waiting period, no special notification is executed even if the special role is won again, so that it is possible to prevent excessive special notifications from being executed for a player who is already aware that the predetermined profit is about to be awarded.

Feature G4. The gaming machine according to any one of Features G1 to G3, wherein the special notification control means is configured to, when the special role is won during the specified waiting period and the special notification is executed but the second stop result is not displayed, execute the special notification again if the special role is won again during the specified waiting period.

According to feature G4, if a special notification is executed during a specified waiting period and the second stop result is not displayed, the special notification is executed again if the special role is won again during the specified waiting period. This makes it possible to increase the opportunities for the second stop result to be displayed during the specified waiting period.

Feature G5. A gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G4, characterized in that it is provided with a means (a function for executing the process of step S2510 in the presentation side MPU 92) for executing a predetermined notification indicating that the predetermined benefit will be awarded if the predetermined waiting period has elapsed without the special role being won.

According to feature G5, if a special role is not won within a specified waiting period, a specified notification is executed to indicate that a specified benefit will be awarded, so that the player can be made aware that a specified benefit will be awarded even if the special role is not won within the specified waiting period.

Feature G6. A gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G5, characterized in that it is provided with a means (a function for executing the processes of steps S2309 and S2310 in the master MPU 72, and a function for executing the process of step S2502 in the presentation MPU 92) for executing a predetermined notification (notification that the left reel 32L should be stopped for the first time) that allows the player to recognize that the stop operation means should be operated in the first stop mode when the special role is won outside the predetermined waiting period.

According to feature G6, if a special role is won outside the specified waiting period, a specified notification is executed to enable the player to recognize that the stop operation means should be operated in the first stop mode, so that if a special role is won outside the specified waiting period, the first stop result is displayed. Therefore, the second stop result is displayed during the specified waiting period, making it possible to increase the player's attention to the display of the second stop result.

Feature G7: As the predetermined profit, a first predetermined profit (first pseudo bonus state) in which the player's profitability is relatively high, and a second predetermined profit (second pseudo bonus state) in which the player's profitability is relatively low are set;
The gaming machine described in any one of features G1 to G6, characterized in that the picture display control means controls the picture display means so that if the second stop result is displayed during the specified waiting period in a situation in which the first specified benefit will be awarded after the end of the specified waiting period, a specified stop result (a ``red 7'' symbol, a ``red 7'' symbol, or a combination of ``red 7'' symbols) is displayed thereafter, and controls the picture display means so that if the second stop result is displayed during the specified waiting period in a situation in which the second specified benefit will be awarded after the end of the specified waiting period, a specific stop result (a ``BAR'' symbol, a ``BAR'' symbol, or a combination of ``BAR'' symbols) is displayed thereafter.

According to feature G7, when a second stop result is displayed during a predetermined waiting period in a situation where a first predetermined profit is awarded after the end of the predetermined waiting period, the picture display means is controlled so that a predetermined stop result is displayed thereafter, and when a second stop result is displayed during a predetermined waiting period in a situation where a second predetermined profit is awarded after the end of the predetermined waiting period, the picture display means is controlled so that a specific stop result is displayed thereafter. This makes it possible to allow a player to recognize whether the first predetermined profit or the second predetermined profit will be awarded by using the stop result, even if roles corresponding to the first and second predetermined profits are not prepared.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A9, features B1 to B13, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E10, features F1 to F8, features G1 to G7, and features H1 to H10 may be applied to the features G1 to G7. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

<Feature H Group>
Feature H1. A means for shifting the game state to a favorable game state (pseudo bonus state ST4) favorable to the player (a function for executing the processes of steps S2203, S2206, and S2213 in the main MPU 72);
A means for executing an additional process to increase the number of games executed in the advantageous gaming state until the advantageous gaming state ends (a function for executing the processes of steps S2603 to S2616 and steps S2703 to S2708 in the main MPU 72);
Equipped with
The gaming machine is characterized in that the add-on means is capable of executing the add-on process in a target game (a game that is not in the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 and has a bet number of "3"), and does not execute the add-on process in a non-target game (a game that is not in the first CB state ST2, the second CB state ST3, and has a bet number of "2").

According to feature H1, by executing the add-on process in an advantageous gaming state, the number of games executed before the advantageous gaming state ends increases. Therefore, the player will expect the add-on process to be executed in an advantageous gaming state. In this case, the add-on process may be executed in the target game, but the add-on process is not executed in the non-target game. This makes it possible to impose certain restrictions on the circumstances in which the add-on process may be executed.

Feature H2. A configuration in which a game can be started when a predetermined number of gaming media ("2" or "3") is bet set,
The target game is a game in which a first predetermined number ("3") of gaming media among the predetermined number is bet set,
The gaming machine according to feature H1, wherein the non-target game is a game in which a second predetermined number ("2") of gaming media among the predetermined number is bet on.

According to feature H2, the add-on process can be executed in a game in which a first predetermined number of gaming media is bet, whereas the add-on process is not executed in a game in which a second predetermined number of gaming media is bet. This basically makes it possible to play a game in a situation in which a first predetermined number of gaming media is bet.

Feature H3. A gaming machine according to Feature H2, characterized in that a game in which the first predetermined number of gaming media is bet is more advantageous to a player than a game in which the second predetermined number of gaming media is bet.

According to feature H3, in a configuration in which a game in which a first predetermined number of gaming media is bet is more advantageous to a player than a game in which a second predetermined number of gaming media is bet, an add-on process may be executed in a game in which a first predetermined number of gaming media is bet, whereas an add-on process is not executed in a game in which a second predetermined number of gaming media is bet. As a result, by executing a game in which a first predetermined number of gaming media is bet to create an advantageous situation, an add-on process can be executed automatically.

Feature H4. The gaming machine described in Feature H2 or H3, wherein the first predetermined number is greater than the second predetermined number.

Feature H4 makes it possible to increase the number of gaming media required to execute the top-up process.

Feature H5. The add-on means is capable of executing the add-on process in the target game during the add-on period of the advantageous gaming state,
The gaming machine includes an update means (a function for executing the process of step S2708 in the master MPU 72) for executing an update process for bringing the end condition of the added-on period closer to being satisfied based on the execution of the target game during the added-on period,
A gaming machine described in any one of features H1 to H4, characterized in that the update means does not execute the update process even if the non-target game is played during the added-on period.

According to feature H5, not only is the process for adding on not executed even if a non-target game is executed during the added-on period, but the added-on period itself does not progress if a non-target game is executed during the added-on period. This makes it possible to prevent an event from occurring in which the added-on period progresses even though the process for adding on is not executed for that game, even if a non-target game is accidentally executed during the added-on period.

Feature H6. Equipped with a period-based performance control means (a function for executing a performance-side added-on period process in the performance-side MPU 92) for executing a period-based performance during the added-on period;
The gaming machine described in feature H5 is characterized in that the period-responsive presentation control means progresses the period-responsive presentation regardless of whether the target game is executed or the non-target game is executed during the added-on period.

According to feature H6, since a period-dependent effect is executed during the added-on period, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the added-on period. In this case, if a non-target game is executed during the added-on period, the progress of the added-on period is stopped, whereas the progress of the period-dependent effect continues. This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable even if a non-target game is executed during the added-on period.

Feature H7. The gaming machine described in Feature H6, characterized in that when the non-target game is executed during the added-on period, the update process is not executed in the non-target game, but the period-dependent presentation proceeds, so that the period-dependent presentation ends in a game prior to the game in which the added-on period ends.

According to feature H7, if a non-target game is played during the added-on period, the update process is not executed in the non-target game, but the period-responsive presentation continues, so that the period-responsive presentation ends in the game before the game in which the added-on period ends. This makes it possible to execute the period-responsive presentation for the number of games that corresponds to a predetermined number of games, even if a non-target game is played during the added-on period.

Feature H8. The gaming machine described in Feature H7, characterized in that if the add-on process is executed while the add-on period is continuing even after the period-based presentation has ended, the profit that was the subject of the add-on process is not notified to the player.

According to feature H8, if an add-on process is executed while the add-on period is still ongoing even after the period-based performance has ended, the player is not notified of the profit that was to be awarded in the add-on process. This makes it possible to avoid giving a strange feeling to a player who recognizes that the add-on period has ended because the period-based performance has already ended.

Feature H9: The add-on means reliably executes the add-on process when the target game is executed during the add-on period;
The gaming machine described in any one of features H6 to H8, characterized in that when the non-target game is executed while the period-responsive presentation is being executed, a notification is executed to indicate that the minimum profit among the profits that are eligible to be awarded in the additional processing is awarded.

According to feature H9, since the add-on process is executed each time a target game is executed during the add-on period, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the add-on period. In this case, if a non-target game is executed while the period-dependent presentation is being executed, a notification is executed indicating that the minimum profit among the profits that can be awarded in the add-on process has been awarded, even though the add-on process is not actually executed. This makes it possible to give the player the impression that the add-on process is executed in each game during the add-on period, while preventing a notification from being executed indicating that a profit greater than the profit that will actually be awarded during the add-on period has been awarded.

Feature H10. Equipped with a situation setting means (function for executing the processing of step S1805 in the main MPU 72) for setting to a favorable transition possible situation (second section SC2);
The advantageous transition means transitions a gaming state to the advantageous gaming state when the advantageous transition is possible,
The gaming machine includes a situation ending means (a function for executing the process of step S1914 in the main MPU 72) for ending the advantageous transition possible situation based on the establishment of a situation ending condition in the advantageous transition possible situation (the establishment of the ending condition of the second section SC2),
When the situation end condition is satisfied in the advantageous transition possible situation and the advantageous gaming state, not only the advantageous transition possible situation but also the advantageous gaming state is ended,
A gaming machine described in any one of features H1 to H9, characterized in that regardless of whether the target game or the non-target game is executed in the advantageous transition possible situation, processing is executed to bring the situation closer to the establishment of the situation ending condition.

According to feature H10, when a non-target game is played, the process for adding bonus is not executed, but a process for bringing the situation ending condition closer to being met is executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the disadvantage of playing a non-target game.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A9, features B1 to B13, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E10, features F1 to F8, features G1 to G7, and features H1 to H10 may be applied to the features H1 to H10. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

The invention relating to each of the above feature groups, Feature A, Feature B, Feature C, Feature D, Feature E, Feature F, Feature G, and Feature H, makes it possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine has a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores game balls given to a player, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball launching device and launched toward the game area in response to the player's launch operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is paid out from a payout device to the tray storage section. In addition, a configuration in which an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section are provided as the tray storage section is also known for a pachinko machine, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are guided to the game ball launching device, and the game balls that are surplus in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

In addition, in a slot machine, when medals have been bet and the start lever is operated to start a new game, a lottery process is executed by the control means. When the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation stop control to stop the rotation of the reels. Then, if the stop result after the reels have stopped rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is awarded to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the entertainment value of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: A game machine that has an operating means operated by the player, a game ball launching means that launches game balls based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage that guides the launched game balls to a specified game area, and various game components arranged within the game area, and that awards a special prize to the player when the game ball passes through a specified passage section of each of the game components.

Slot machines and other reel-type gaming machines: A gaming machine that starts the rotation of a rotating body based on the operation of a start operation means, stops the rotation of the rotating body based on the operation of a stop operation means, and awards a bonus to the player based on the image that appears after the rotation has stopped.

10... slot machine, 31... reel unit, 41... start lever, 42-44... stop buttons, 72... main MPU, 74... main RAM, 74c... continued game counter, 74d... total win counter, 92... performance MPU, SC2... second section, ST1... normal game state, ST4... pseudo bonus state, ST6... first CZ state, ST7... second CZ state.

Claims (1)

A situation setting means for setting a specific situation in which a favorable transition can be made based on the occurrence of a setting trigger in a predetermined situation;
When the specific situation occurs, an advantageous transition means for transitioning the game state to an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player;
a situation ending means for ending the specific situation to the predetermined situation based on the establishment of a situation ending condition in the specific situation;
an advantageous end means for ending the advantageous gaming state based on the establishment of an advantageous end condition in the advantageous gaming state, and for ending the advantageous gaming state when the specific situation ends and the predetermined situation occurs based on the establishment of the situation end condition, even if the advantageous end condition is not established;
A predetermined storage means capable of storing predetermined information;
a means for enabling a player to have an advantage in regard to the transition to the advantageous game state when the specific situation is set by the situation setting means in a situation where the specific information is stored in the specific storage means, compared to a case where the specific situation is set by the situation setting means in a situation where the specific information is not stored in the specific storage means;
A gaming machine comprising:

Images